JP2016193087A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of deterring a game from becoming monotonous.SOLUTION: A slot machine 1 includes: main control means (main board 409) capable of executing control relating to progress of a game; and a display device (special display LED 612) that is managed by the main control means and can display a predetermined performance. The main board 409 executes a lottery relating to a prize winning combination, and can grant advantageous privilege advantageous to a player if a game is progressed by predetermined game operation when a predetermined result is acquired by the lottery.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 48

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a swivel type gaming machine (also referred to as a “pachislot machine” or a “slot machine”).

  Conventionally, a rotating type gaming machine performs internal lottery based on an operation by a player and starts rotation of a reel with a plurality of types of symbols, and the rotating reel can be operated by a player. It is known as a gaming machine that pays out a gaming value (for example, a medal) to a player based on a symbol combination displayed when stopped based on the game.

  In this type of gaming machine, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (normal gaming state) when a predetermined condition based on the result of the internal lottery or the symbol combination displayed when the reels are stopped is satisfied. It is controlled to an advantageous gaming state. Examples of the advantageous gaming state include a bonus game and an AT game (ART game). In the advantageous gaming state, the player is given benefits such as being able to proceed with the game while consuming the gaming value or acquiring more gaming value than in the normal gaming state. For example, in the case of an AT (or ART) game, “appropriate game operation” regarding the stop order and stop timing of reels is taught based on the winning combination, and the player plays a game along the taught game operation. By performing the above, more game value can be obtained than when other game operations are performed (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-156205 A

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when it is controlled to an advantageous gaming state such as an AT game, it can be expected to obtain a lot of gaming value, but it is monotonous only to repeat the taught gaming operation. There was a lot of risk of becoming a game.

  In view of the above-described problems, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress monotonization of a game.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention comprises main control means capable of executing control relating to the progress of a game, and a display device managed by the main control means and capable of displaying a predetermined effect. The control means includes a combination of a lottery means for executing a lottery with respect to the winning combination, and a predetermined game operation based on a result of the lottery by the combination lottery means. An instruction display means for displaying on the display device in any one of the display forms, and a player when the game is advanced by a game operation based on any one of the display forms displayed by the instruction display means An advantageous privilege granting means that can give an advantageous privilege that is advantageous to the benefit bonus, and a different privilege granting means that can give a different privilege different from the advantageous privilege given by the advantageous privilege granting means Similar display means for causing the display device to display an expectation display that suggests the degree of expectation of a different benefit that can be given by the different benefit granting means by any one of the display modes used in the indication display. And.

  According to such an invention, by using a display mode common to an instruction display for instructing a gaming operation that leads to the provision of the advantageous privilege, an expectation display that suggests an expected degree of a different privilege different from the advantageous privilege is performed. Thus, when the display mode is displayed on the display device, a sense of expectation for different types of benefits (advantageous benefits and different benefits) is simultaneously held, and whether the display mode is based on the indication display or based on the expectation display Since it is possible to entertain the player with something, it is possible to prevent the game from getting bored.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which can suppress the monotonization of a game can be provided.

It is a disassembled perspective view of a slot machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which omitted the door-shaped front member. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the slot machine which shows the state which abbreviate | omitted the door-shaped front member. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a Z1 part in FIG. 4. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a portion Z1 in FIG. 4 showing a state in which the connector holder is moved. It is a cross-sectional view of the slot machine showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is omitted. FIG. 8A is an enlarged view of a portion Z2 in FIG. 7, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged view of a portion Z2 in FIG. 7 showing a state where the connector holder is moved. It is an enlarged view which shows the principal part of Fig.8 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side. It is a disassembled perspective view of a case member. It is the perspective view which looked at the case member from back. (A), (b) is a perspective view of the principal part of a case member explaining the temporarily fixed state of a connector holder. It is a disassembled perspective view of a wiring relay member. It is the front view which abbreviate | omitted the cover body of the wiring relay member. It is a disassembled perspective view of a connector holder. It is a disassembled perspective view of a connector holder. It is a perspective view of the stopper which stops a case member. It is a perspective view of the stopper which shows another form. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the symbol variation display apparatus which shows the other form of a handle. It is a perspective view of the principal part which shows the relationship between a case member and the stopper of the outer main body side. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the relationship between a wiring window and the reel of a design variation display apparatus. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing a lower half portion of the slot machine with the medal releasing device omitted. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26. It is the rear view which looked at the heat radiation opening from the back side of the slot machine. It is a partial cross-section partial front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked up at the power supply device from the bottom. It is a principal part sectional drawing of the side plate of an outer main part, and a power supply device which shows another form. It is a schematic sectional drawing of the illuminating device which shows another form. It is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member which disassembles and shows a transparent plate and a light emitting unit. It is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member which decomposes | disassembles and shows a transparent plate. FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 33A-A of the door-shaped front member equipped with a transparent plate. It is a disassembled / assembled perspective view of a hinge metal fitting. It is a diagram which shows the chain | linkage of a hinge metal fitting. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows a door-shaped front member. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening. It is the perspective view seen from the back side which shows the upper half part of a door-shaped front member. It is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the coupling tool to the vertical direction. It is a principal part crossing top view of the door-shaped front member which shows the example of another hinge metal fitting. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the principal part which shows the middle of opening of the door-shaped front member of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the image display body and the frame member in the model unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the door-shaped front member, connecting a connector. FIG. 3 is a development view in which a symbol array of a reel band is developed in a plane. It is an enlarged view near the symbol display window in the slot machine as viewed from the front. It is the schematic which shows roughly the structure of the various mechanism elements with which the slot machine is equipped, an electronic device, an operation member, etc. It is an example of the lottery table used for the lottery of the winning combination. It is a figure which shows each winning combination and the condition apparatus established corresponding to each winning combination. It is the figure (the 1) which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to each condition apparatus, the number of medals paid out, etc. FIG. It is the figure (the 2) which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to each condition apparatus, the number of payout of medals, etc. FIG. It is the figure (the 3) which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to each condition apparatus, the number of payout of medals, etc. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the basic 1 game processing procedure in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a game state transfer control process. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of a rough process of an instruction | indication function process. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows the detailed process sequence of an instruction | indication function generation process. It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows the detailed process sequence of an instruction | indication function generation process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of an instruction | indication function related process. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table used for initial stage number addition extra lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table used for the initial game number addition game number lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table used for AT initial winning lottery. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a precursor lottery. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a precursor lottery. It is FIG. (3) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a precursor lottery. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a sign game number lottery. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a sign game number lottery. It is FIG. (3) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a sign game number lottery. It is FIG. (4) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a sign game number lottery. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for the state transfer lottery A. FIG. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the lottery table used for the state transfer lottery A. FIG. It is FIG. (3) for demonstrating the lottery table used for the state transfer lottery A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table used for special state transfer lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table used for special state game number lottery. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for the state transfer lottery B. FIG. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the lottery table used for the state transfer lottery B. FIG. It is FIG. (3) for demonstrating the lottery table used for the state transfer lottery B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of AT lottery game state in the instruction | indication function generation process of each example. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the instruction | indication function display of a 1st example. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the instruction | indication function display of a 1st example. It is a figure for demonstrating the indicator used by the instruction | indication function display of a 2nd example. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the instruction | indication function display of a 2nd example. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the instruction | indication function display of a 2nd example. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of a display of the instruction | indication function display of a 2nd example. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the example of a display of the instruction | indication function display in which the several display mode was set. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the example of a display of the instruction | indication function display in which the several display mode was set. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the group display in instruction | indication function display. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of a display of the instruction | indication function display of a 1st example. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a display period by various displays etc. It is a timing chart which shows another example of a display period by various displays etc. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for continuous effect generation | occurrence | production lottery. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the lottery table used for continuous effect generation | occurrence | production lottery. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for continuous effect content lottery. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the lottery table used for continuous effect content lottery. It is FIG. (The 1) for demonstrating a 1st type expectation degree display (pattern 1). It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating a 1st type expectation degree display (pattern 1). It is a figure for demonstrating a 1st type expectation degree display (pattern 2). It is a figure for demonstrating a 2nd type expectation degree display (pattern 1). It is a figure for demonstrating a 2nd type expectation degree display (pattern 2). It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a display when the priority display (expectedness priority display) of timing is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a display when the priority display (instruction function priority display) of timing is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a display when the priority display (expectedness priority display) of a layer is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a display when the priority display (instruction function priority display) of a layer is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating the expectation degree display which produces the display availability of a specific aspect. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a reel stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a bonus game start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a bonus game completion | finish determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of AT game determination processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the data block of RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating the error display by special display LED. It is a flowchart (the 1) for demonstrating the process at the time of the error generation in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart (the 2) for demonstrating the process at the time of error generation in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a process sequence of the electric power interruption reset process in 1st Embodiment. 6 is a timing chart illustrating an example (part 1) of a display period when an error occurs in the first embodiment. 6 is a timing chart illustrating a display period example (part 2) when an error occurs in the first embodiment. 6 is a timing chart illustrating an example (part 3) of a display period when an error occurs in the first embodiment. 6 is a timing chart illustrating a display period example (part 4) when an error occurs in the first embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the example of a display period (the 1) when the electric power interruption reset process shown in FIG. 115 is performed during a game. FIG. 116 is a timing chart showing a display period example (part 2) when the power interruption recovery process shown in FIG. 115 is performed during the game. FIG. 116 is a timing chart showing a display period example (part 3) when the power interruption recovery process shown in FIG. 115 is performed during the game. 12 is a flowchart (part 1) for explaining an error occurrence process in the slot machine 1b. 12 is a flowchart (No. 2) for explaining the error occurrence process in the slot machine 1b. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1b. 12 is a flowchart (No. 1) for explaining an error occurrence process in the slot machine 1c. 12 is a flowchart (No. 2) for explaining the error occurrence process in the slot machine 1c. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1c. 10 is a flowchart (part 1) for explaining an error occurrence process in the slot machine 1d. FIG. 10 is a flowchart (part 2) for explaining an error occurrence process in the slot machine 1d. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1d. It is a flowchart (the 1) for demonstrating the process at the time of error generation in the slot machine 1e. 12 is a flowchart (No. 2) for explaining the error occurrence process in the slot machine 1e. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1e. 10 is a flowchart (part 1) for explaining an error occurrence process in the slot machine if. 12 is a flowchart (No. 2) for explaining the processing at the time of error occurrence in the slot machine if. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1f.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings, taking a slot machine as a gaming machine as an example. 1 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine, FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine with the door-shaped front member omitted, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine, and FIG. 4 is a door-shaped front member omitted. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 4, FIG. 6 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 4 showing a state where the connector holder is moved, and FIG. FIG. 8A is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 7, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 7 showing the state in which the connector holder is moved. 9 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 8A, FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side, FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the case member, and FIG. FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b) show a temporarily fixed state of the connector holder. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the wiring relay member, FIG. 15 is a front view in which the cover of the wiring relay member is omitted, and FIGS. 16 and 17 are exploded perspective views of the connector holder. 18 is a perspective view of a stopper for stopping the case member, FIG. 19 is a perspective view of a stopper showing another embodiment, FIGS. 20 and 21 are cross-sectional views of the main part showing the guide structure of the case member, and FIG. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the main part showing the relationship between the case member and the stopper on the outer main body side, and FIG. 24 is the relationship between the wiring window and the reel of the symbol fluctuation display device. 25 is a longitudinal sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine, FIG. 26 is a perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine with the medal releasing device omitted, and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. Figure 28 shows heat dissipation from the back of the slot machine. FIG. 29 is a partial sectional front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device, FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing the power supply device viewed from below, and FIG. 31 shows another embodiment. FIG. 32 is a schematic sectional view of a lighting device showing another embodiment, FIG. 33 is a perspective view of a door-shaped front member showing the transparent plate and the light emitting unit in an exploded manner, and FIG. Is an exploded perspective view of the door-shaped front member shown by disassembling the transparent plate, FIG. 35 is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 33A-A of the door-shaped front member mounted with the transparent plate, and FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a chain of hinge fittings, FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member, FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening, and FIG. The perspective view seen from the back side which shows the upper half part of a door-shaped front member, FIG. 41 cut | disconnects a connection tool longitudinally 42 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part of the door-shaped front member showing another example of the hinge fitting, and FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member shown in FIG. 44 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front opening / closing member is opened in the model unit, and FIG.

[1. First Embodiment]
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention has a box-shaped outer body 100 having an open front surface, and a rotary shaft 100a on the front surface of the outer body 100. A door-shaped front member 200 that is pivotably attached to a door, a symbol variation display device 300 that varies a plurality of symbols by driving means, and an opening 401 on the front surface that is detachable from the outer body 100. It has a case member 400 and an image display body 500 that displays an arbitrary image.

[2. Outer body]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the outer body 100 has side plates 102 and 102 attached to the left and right sides of the bottom plate 101, and a top plate 103 installed on the top of the side plates 102 and 102. It has a letter-shaped frame shape and is formed in a box shape in which only the front surface is opened by fixing a back plate 104 to the back of the frame. The left and right side plates 102, 102 have a trapezoidal shape in which the front edges are slightly inclined in a backward inclined state, and thus the opening of the outer body 100 has a backward inclined inclination. In addition, a plurality of (in the embodiment, in the embodiment) the top plate 103 is located in a region facing the upper pier 600 (see the imaginary line in FIG. 25) of the gaming machine installation island in a state of being installed on the gaming machine installation island (not shown). 4) through-holes 132 are formed.

[2-1. Outer body-partition plate]
In the outer main body 100, a shelf-like partition plate 105 is provided substantially at the center of the height. The partition plate 105 is made of metal and has a substantially convex shape in front view having a protruding portion 106 at the center as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, and vertical mounting pieces 107 formed at both ends are attached to the outer body 100. The side plate 102 is fixed to the inner surface of the side plate 102, and a vertical mounting piece 108 formed at the rear end is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. The mounting piece 108 at the rear end of the partition plate 105 is formed with a cylindrical projection (not shown) by burring (metal processing for raising a short cylindrical projection while expanding the hole diameter of the lower hole with a punch). The cylindrical protrusion is driven into a small hole (not shown) pre-processed in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 and positioned. In addition, an opening 109 for wiring is formed between the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 in the innermost part on both sides of the partition plate 105.

[2-1-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space]
In the space below the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, a medal releasing device 110 that releases a medal as a game medium to a medal tray 201 at the lower front of the door-shaped front member 200, and the medal releasing device 110 A medal auxiliary storage box 111 for storing overflowing medals, a power supply device 112, and the like are provided.

[2-1-1-1. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Medal release device]
The medal releasing device 110 is obtained by attaching a medal storage hopper 110b to a device main body 110a having a built-in driving means. A medal discharge port 110c is provided on the front surface of the device main body 110a. A certain medal is sent out one by one toward the discharge port 110c by the operation of the driving means. The hopper 110b is provided with an overflow rod 110d for discharging overflowing medals, and the above-mentioned medal auxiliary storage box 111 faces below the protruding end of the overflow rod 110d. The medal releasing mechanism of the medal releasing device 110 may employ any currently known mechanism, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

[2-1-1-2. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply unit]
As shown in FIGS. 26 to 30, the power supply device 112 is attached to an inner corner portion in which three members of the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100, the left side plate 102 and the back plate 104 are orthogonal to each other. Yes. The power supply device 112 is a component for supplying electricity to the electrical components such as the medal discharge device 110 and is likely to generate heat. Therefore, the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 radiates heat to the attachment portion of the power supply device 112. A mouth 104a is opened.

  The device case 112a of the power supply device 112 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. By doing so, since the inside of the device case 112a can be seen, it is easy to find an unauthorized work on the substrate 112s (see FIG. 30) of the power supply device 112 and the like. The device case 112a includes an upper plate 112b that covers the upper surface, a rear plate 112c that faces the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100, a front plate 112d that covers the opposite side of the rear plate 112c, and an interior of the slot machine 1. It is formed by a side plate 112e that covers the facing side, a slope plate 112f that covers the boundary between the top plate 112b and the side plate 112e in a chamfered form, and a bottom plate 112r (see FIG. 30) that covers the bottom. On the other hand, the surface of the device case 112a that faces the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 is not covered and is in an open state, but this open surface is attached to the outer main body 100 by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100. It is blocked.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 is provided with a convex surface portion 102a to form a stepped guard portion 102b, and the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is provided below the guard portion 102b. It is a specification that makes one side sink. As a result, even if one surface of the device case 112a is not covered, the joint between the device case 112a and the side plate 102 is blocked by the guard portion 102b, so that foreign matter cannot be inserted. FIG. 31 shows another embodiment in which the guard portion 102b is formed in a groove shape. In this example, the edge of the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a slightly protrudes toward the side plate 102, and the tip of the guard portion 102b is formed. It fits into the groove.

  Thus, in the device case 112a of the power supply device 112, when the surface of the outer body 100 that is in contact with the side plate 102 has an open structure without a cover and is covered with the side plate 102 during use, the device case 112a is moved into the device case 112a. The substrate 112s or the like can be easily assembled using the open surface, and workability is improved because it is not necessary to attach a cover to the open surface after the substrate 112s or the like is assembled into the apparatus case 112a.

  A large number of air holes 112g, 112g,... Are formed in the upper surface plate 112b, the side surface plate 112e, the inclined surface plate 112f, the rear surface plate 112c, and the bottom surface plate 112r of the device case 112a so that heat is not trapped inside. . The device case 112a is lifted in a raised manner by legs 112h, 112h... Provided at the bottom, and a ventilation space 112i is formed between the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a and the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100. Therefore, low-rise and relatively cool air can be introduced into the device case 112a from the ventilation space 112i through the ventilation holes 112g, 112g,. Since the ventilation space 112i of the embodiment communicates with the heat radiating port 104a of the outer main body 100, cold air at the back of the machine can be introduced into the ventilation space 112i. If the inverted L-shaped step 112j (see FIG. 30) for raising the ventilation space 112i is formed at the boundary between the rear plate 112c and the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a, the height of the leg 112h and the heat radiation port 104a are formed. Even if there is a deviation in the height, the ventilation space 112i can be communicated with the heat radiation port 104a.

[2-1-1-2-1. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply-Fixed]
The power supply device 112 includes an attachment piece 112k that is perpendicular to one side of the front plate 112d of the device case 112a, and a protrusion that protrudes from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a toward the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. 112 m and the heat radiating port 104 a opened in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 are fixed to the outer main body 100.

  That is, the contour of the heat radiating port 104a is formed smaller than the contour of the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a, so that the power supply device 112 hits the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 and does not pass through the heat radiating port 104a. The protrusion 112m protruding from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a is in a position inscribed in the heat radiating port 104a, and is a horizontal protrusion inscribed in the upper side of the radiating port 104a to resist the lifting operation of the power supply device 112. It consists of a piece 112m-1 and a vertical protrusion 112m-2 inscribed in the vertical side of the heat radiating port 104a in order to resist the rollover operation of the power supply device 112. Therefore, the power supply device 112 is pushed along the inner surface of the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100, and the protrusion 112m is inserted into the heat radiating port 104a. Fixing in the right direction (rollover) is completed. Of course, the movement of the power supply device 112 is regulated by the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100 in the downward direction and by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 in the left direction in FIG. The movement of the power supply device 112 can be completely restricted with respect to directions other than the direction of pulling forward by a simple operation of only fitting the protrusion 112m.

  On the other hand, a plurality of screw through holes 112p are formed in the mounting piece 112k projecting from the front plate 112d, and are fixed to the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 through wood screws 112q in at least one of the through holes 112p. Thus, since the movement of the power supply device 112 is also restricted in the direction of pulling forward, the power supply device 112 can be reliably fixed to the outer main body 100 with one wood screw 112q.

[2-1-1-2-2. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply-Power cord]
A power cord (not shown) for receiving power from the outside is connected to the power supply device 112. Conventionally, a bulging portion is provided on the side of the heat radiating port 104a and the power cord is pulled out from the bulging portion. However, at this position, there is a high risk that the power cord is bundled with the ground. The slot machine 1 may be turned on during manufacturing, and a power cord must be taken out of the outer main body 100 in preparation for the case. Therefore, the slot machine 1 is moved on the manufacturing line or between lines. When moving the power cord, the power cord may slip on the ground or get caught under the bottom plate 101 of the slot machine 1.

  On the other hand, the heat radiation port 104a of the embodiment expands the cord outlet 104b from the upper side toward the upper side, and draws the power cord from there. This ensures a sufficient height for hanging the bundled power cords in a suspended state. Therefore, the trouble of accidentally damaging the power cord in the process of manufacturing the slot machine 1 is drastically reduced.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present invention, since the power supply device 112 is set at the inner corner portion of the outer main body 100 and only one wood screw 112q is screwed in, the mounting is completed. Great labor saving in installation work. Further, in the present invention, fixing is completed by screwing to one surface, and therefore, particularly when the portion to be fixed is brought to the front (front side) of the power supply device 112, it is easy to see and can be fixed securely. . Incidentally, conventionally, it is necessary to screw with respect to a plurality of surfaces or members of the power supply device 112. In particular, a screw fixed to the back plate 104 is difficult to visually recognize and may be forgotten.

  Further, since the heat radiating port 104a is necessary as a cooling means for the power supply device 112, even if the heat radiating port 104a is used for fixing the power supply device 112, an extra process and cost hardly occur. On the contrary, the cooling efficiency is improved because the position of the heat radiating port 104a and the position of the power supply device 112 are matched for fixing. In addition, when the device case 112a is made of a synthetic resin as in the embodiment, the mounting projection 112m can be integrally formed, so that it costs little. Therefore, the total cost required for mounting the power supply device 112 can be reduced as compared with the conventional case.

  Furthermore, when the device case 112a is made of a synthetic resin, there is an advantage that the leg portion 112h and the step portion 112j of the device case 112a useful as a measure against heat generation of the power supply device 112 can be implemented with almost no cost.

[2-1-2. Outer body-partition plate-upper space]
On the other hand, the case member 400 is housed in a space above the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, and a wiring relay member 113 serving as the core of the wiring means described later is provided on the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. The back plate 104 is further provided with a vent hole 133 for heat dissipation above the wiring relay member 113.

[3. Door-shaped front member]
3 shows the front side of the door-shaped front member 200, and FIG. 1 shows the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. The door-shaped front member 200 has a medal tray 201 on the lower side on the front side, and an operation unit 202 is provided in the approximate center on the front side. The operation unit 202 includes a medal insertion slot 203 and a one-sheet insertion button 205 for instructing insertion (withdrawal) of only one medal stored as data in a memory of a main board 409 described later. Similarly, a MAX insertion button 206 for instructing insertion of the maximum number (for example, three) that can be used in one game, and a medal return for returning a medal packed in a medal selector 207 to be described later to the medal tray 201. A button 208, a storage release switch 209 for inputting a storage release command (medical release command) stored as data in the memory of the main board 409, and a start lever 210 for operating the symbol variation display device 300 And three reel stop buttons for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300. Down 211a, 211b, 211c and the like are provided. Of course, the configuration of the operation unit 202 shown here is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto.

  In addition, a medal selector 207 is provided on the back side of the insertion slot 203, and a medal basket 212 is connected to the side of the medal selector 207 and a return basket 213 is connected to the bottom. The medal selector 207 is a publicly known switch that switches the flow path by turning on and off a built-in solenoid (not shown). In addition, in a gaming state in which medals are refused to be inserted, such as medals exceeding the prescribed number, the flow path is set to the return basket 213 side. When the door-shaped front member 200 is in a closed position where the door-shaped front member 200 covers the front surface of the outer main body 100, the tip of the medal basket 212 faces the hopper 110 b of the medal discharge device 110. The medal that flows through the medal bowl 212 through the hop-off reaches the hopper 110b. On the other hand, the return basket 213 is connected to the front-side medal tray 201, and the medal that flows from the insertion slot 203 through the medal selector 207 to the return basket 213 returns to the medal tray 201.

[3-1. Door-shaped front member-perspective window]
The door-shaped front member 200 is sized to cover the entire front surface of the outer main body 100, and the upper half of the door-shaped front member 200 is a see-through window for games covered with a transparent plate 214a as shown in FIGS. 214. The see-through window 214 and the transparent plate 214a of the embodiment are larger than usual so that the image display body 500 and the design variation display device 300 can be seen side by side, and the image is formed by the forehead frame 216 integrated with the door-shaped front member 200. The regions of the display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 are visually divided vertically. In this way, if one transparent plate 214a is set to a size that covers both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300, the arrangement of the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 is switched up and down. However, it can be used as it is.

[3-1-1. Door-shaped front member-see-through window-transparent plate]
The transparent plate 214a uses a transparent synthetic resin (for example, methacrylic resin containing rubber excellent in impact resistance, scratch resistance, and optical properties, and in the embodiment, “Acrypet (registered trademark) IR D30” manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. is used. ) In a generally inverted trapezoidal shape, and an edge member 214b that bulges to the front side of the three sides (left and right sides and upper side) excluding the bottom, with the side facing the player as the front 214b and 214b are integrally molded at the time of resin molding using a mold for resin molding. When the edge member 214b is integrally formed on the periphery of the flat plate-like transparent plate 214a as described above, the edge member 214b serves as a reinforcing bar to increase the strength of the entire transparent plate 214a. As described above, even if it is large enough to cover both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300, bending and distortion hardly occur.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the edge member 214b is a shell structure that opens to the rear surface side (not a solid, but a shell-like structure with a space inside, and the thickness of each part is arbitrary). The light emitting unit 217 and, for example, a decorative member (not shown) having a pattern or characters on the surface are incorporated in the internal space as necessary.

  In FIG. 34, the light emitting unit 217 is depicted as being attached to the door-shaped front member 200, but the actual light emitting unit 217 is fitted into the edge member 214b as shown in FIG. ing. Therefore, the transparent plate 214a and the light emitting unit 217 are handled as an integral part.

  The shape of the edge member 214b is not limited to that shown in the figure, and can be arbitrarily changed according to the design of the light emitting unit 217 and the decorative member. Further, the portion where the edge member 214b is provided is not limited to the three sides of the periphery of the transparent plate 214a as in the embodiment, and may be provided on any one side at a minimum.

  In addition, in FIGS. 33 and 34, reference numeral 218 denotes a fixing member provided at the left and right corners on the transparent plate 214a. The screw is passed through the through hole 214c (see FIG. 33 enlarged view) from the back side of the transparent plate 214a. (Not shown), it is stopped in the state of FIG. 34 fitted between the edge member 214b and the edge member 214b. The fixing member 218 functions as a corner decoration on the appearance, and on the through holes 200a and 214d (see an enlarged view of FIG. 33) provided at the corner portions on the door-shaped front member 200 and the transparent plate 214a. It is screwed into a screw (not shown) passed from the back side of the door-shaped front member 200, thereby serving as a nut for fixing the transparent plate 214a to the door-shaped front member 200.

  33 to 35, reference numeral 217a denotes a light emitter of the light emitting unit 217, and 217b denotes a reflecting member that supports the light emitter 217a. As shown in FIG. 35, the reflection member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located on the left and right is set at an angle so as to reflect a large amount of light from the rod-shaped light emitter 217a toward the periphery of the slot machine 1. In the form in which the light emitting unit 217 is incorporated inside the edge member 214b of the transparent plate 214a, the light emitter 217a can be arranged on the front side of the slot machine 1, so that it looks like a lighthouse at the tip of the cape. This is advantageous when light is emitted toward the surroundings. In addition, the reflecting member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located above is set so as to reflect a large amount of light from the light emitter 217a (a combination of the light source 217a-1 and the light guide plate 217a-2) upward of the slot machine 1. ing.

  The light-emitting unit 217 having the above-described structure can be turned on during a game, especially when a big hit is made, and can produce an effect that appeals to the surroundings of the occurrence of the big win. In this way, by performing an effect with a high degree of appeal to the surroundings, it is possible to draw attention to the player who has won a big hit, and the line of sight of many people gives the player a sense of superiority, which further increases the game. In addition, it is expected that the popularity of the model will increase and the operating rate will improve by appealing to the surroundings that the jackpot is coming out.

  The transparent plate 214a of the embodiment has the above-described configuration, and the bottom of the plate-shaped front member 200 is formed with respect to the concave groove 219 (see an enlarged view of FIG. 34) provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. Inserted obliquely from the front and fitted into a joiner type, in that state, the transparent plate 214a is erected to bring all the edge members 214b, 214b, 214b into contact with the front surface of the door-shaped front member 200. It fixes with the screw | thread 603 (refer FIG. 1) passed from the back. FIG. 35 is a cut view of the main part of the door-shaped front member 200 at this time. As is apparent from FIG. 35, if the player has a foreign object from the boundary between the door-shaped front member 200 and the edge member 214b. Even if it is forcibly inserted, there is little room for the tip of the foreign material to cross the inside of the edge member 214b and reach the back side of the transparent plate 214a. Therefore, it exhibits an excellent crime prevention effect.

[3-2. Door-shaped front member-lock device]
A lock device 215 that opens and closes using a dedicated key (not shown) is provided on one side of the free end side of the door-shaped front member 200.

[4. Design variation display device]
The symbol variation display device 300 is a reel rotation type display device, and incorporates and accommodates, for example, three reels 301a, 301b, and 301c that can be individually rotated by driving means 303 such as a motor, and the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. And a device case 302 that plays a game with a combination of a plurality of symbols (not shown) drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c.

  The device case 302 has a deformed hexagonal column shape excluding three faces from the octagonal column that lies on its side to the front (player), and includes a bottom plate 304, a top plate 305, and a right side in FIG. Right side plate 306, left side plate 307 on the left side, vertical rear plate 308 covering the rear surface, upper swash plate 309 provided between the top plate portion 305 and the rear plate 308, bottom plate 304 and rear plate 308. And a part of the arc of the reels 301 a, 301 b, and 301 c protrudes from the front of the device case 302.

  In addition, the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 is provided with a handle 311 that can be changed between a useable state in which a finger can be hooked and a non-use state in which the top plate portion 305 is depressed. To carry.

  The configuration in which the changeable handle 311 is provided on the top plate portion 305 of the apparatus case 302 as described above is closely related to a measure for increasing the strength of the case member 400. That is, in the embodiment, as will be described later, a reinforcing bar 402 is provided in the opening 401 of the case member 400 to give the opening 401 of the case member 400 sufficient strength to allow the image display body 500 to be cantilevered. Since such a reinforcing bar 402 crosses the opening 401, it clearly becomes an obstacle to the insertion and removal of the apparatus case 302 into and from the case member 400. On the other hand, if the handle 311 can be changed and hung on the top plate portion 305 as in the embodiment, the protrusion of the handle 311 is eliminated, so that the device case 302 can pass under the reinforcing bar 402 without difficulty. Accordingly, it is possible to provide the reinforcing bar 402 in the direction crossing the opening 401 at the opening 401 of the case member 400 only by providing the handle 311 that can be changed as described above on the top plate 305 of the device case 302. Become. Incidentally, the conventional apparatus case has a room for providing a reinforcing bar at the opening of the case member because the handle protrudes from the top plate and becomes an obstacle.

  In addition, the handle 311 of the embodiment is configured to swing and change between the standing use state and the lying down non-use state, but the structure that can change the handle 311 between the use state and the non-use state is implemented. The form is not limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, two belt loops 314, 314 are cut and raised on the top plate 305, and the belt loops 314, 314 are made of, for example, synthetic resin or leather, and stoppers 315, 315 are provided at both ends. A useable state in which fingers can be hooked, such as a structure in which the band-shaped handle 311 provided is inserted and the center is pulled up to change to a usable state in which fingers can be hooked from the obstructed non-use state of FIG. Any structure may be used as long as it can be changed to the unused state.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 11, a flange-like lower handle 316 protrudes from the bottom plate 304 of the device case 302 of the embodiment, and the device case 302 is pushed in by grasping the lower handle 316. By pulling, it is easy to put in and out the case member 400.

[5. Case material]
The case member 400 has a size substantially matching the space above the partition plate 105 of the outer main body 100, and includes a bottom plate 403, side plates 404 and 404 erected on both the left and right sides of the bottom plate 403, and a bottom plate 403. The rear plate 405 is erected on the rear edge of the rear plate 405, and the top plate 406 covers the upper surface of the rear plate 405 and the side plates 404, 404.

  In the case member 400, the bottom plate 403 is made of metal, the side plates 404, 404, the rear plate 405, and the top plate 406 are made of synthetic resin, and the side plate 404, 404 and the inner surface of the opening 401 of the top plate 406 are made of metal reinforcement. Members 407, 407, and 407 are provided, and a metal reinforcing bar 402 across the opening 401 is stretched between the reinforcing members 407 and 407 of the side plates 404 and 404. The area below the reinforcing bar 402 is the installation area for the symbol variation display device 300, and the opening 401 above the reinforcing bar 402 is the installation area for the image display body 500. An area surrounded by the case member 400 behind the display body 500 is assigned as a wiring work space 408, and a main board 409 as a main control board is mounted on the inner wall surface of the rear plate 405 of the wiring work space 408, and Control boards other than the main board 409 (for example, the sub board 510 (see FIG. 44)) are also mounted in the wiring work space 408.

  The top plate 406 of the case member 400 is formed with skylight portions 443 and 443 as shown in FIG. The skylight portions 443 and 443 are divided into two with a reinforcing band 444 for maintaining the strength of the top plate 406 interposed therebetween, each of which has an axis line passing through the through holes 132, 132. It exists in the area | region containing an intersection, and is opened sufficiently widely than this through-hole 132,132 .... However, the peripheral edge on the front side of the skylight portion 443 is close to the through hole 132 located on the front side. By doing so, the through-hole 132 can be found by searching with the peripheral edge of the skylight 443 as a reference, so that the position of the through-hole 132 can be quickly and easily determined even if the operator cannot look into the skylight 443. Here, the skylight 443 also functions as the opening of the present invention. That is, by providing a plurality of skylight portions 443 as openings on the upper surface of the case member 400, the weight can be reduced, and the burden on the operator during transportation or replacement can be further reduced.

  As shown in FIGS. 2, 5, 6, and 12, a plurality of bosses 410, 410 project from the outer surface of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400, and the bosses 410 serve as the back plate of the outer body 100. The boss holes 114 and 114 pre-processed in 104 are fitted and positioned. 2 and 5, the bosses 410 and 410 are provided near a wiring window 411, which will be described later. On the other hand, the boss holes 114 and 114 on the outer body 100 side are close to the wiring relay member 113. Accordingly, the positioning of the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and the wiring relay member 113 of the back plate 104 becomes accurate.

  On the other hand, a concave step portion 412 is formed on the bottom surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400 as shown in FIG. 2, and the concave step portion 412 fits into the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. A tapered portion 413 extending in the rearward direction is provided at the end on the rear plate 405 side of the recessed step portion 412, and is guided by the tapered portion 413 and the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105 and the case member 400. The concave step 412 can be smoothly fitted. Thus, the case member 400 is straightly guided to the back of the partition plate 105 by the fitting of the concave step portion 412 of the case member 400 and the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. For example, as shown in FIG. A rail member 115 in the form of a concave groove is laid on the plate 105 or press-molded integrally. On the other hand, a wheel 414 is installed on the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the wheel 414 is rolled in the groove of the rail member 115. Also good. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 21, a rail member 116 having a convex shape is laid or integrally formed on the partition plate 105, and on the other hand, flanges 415 and 415 are formed on both ends of the wheel 414 of the case member 400, The rail member 116 may be sandwiched between the flanges 415 and 415 of the wheel 414.

  Further, the case member 400 is stopped by a swing lever-shaped stopper 117 shown in FIGS. 1, 2, 18, and 23 in a state where the case member 400 is set at a predetermined position on the partition plate 105. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the stopper 117 is pivotally attached to the front end of the partition plate 105 and the two attachments 118 and 118 suspended from the top plate 103, as shown by the solid line in FIG. The operation posture engaged with a part of the case member 400 and the non-operation posture not engaged with the case member 400 as indicated by an imaginary line in FIG. Regulate movement. If the stopper 117 is key-shaped as shown in FIG. 19 and engaged with the hooking portion 416 provided on the case member 400, the upward movement of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105 is also restricted. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23, the stopper 117 pivotally attached to the fixture 118 of the top plate 103 is located at a position facing a locking hole 442 penetrating the corner portion of the side plate 404 and the top plate 406 of the case member 400. The operation posture and the non-operation posture can be switched from the inside of the case member 400 while the case member 400 is pushed into a predetermined position.

  In addition, a wiring window 411 in the form of a long hole penetrating to the back plate 104 side of the outer main body 100 is opened on the rear plate 405 of the case member 400. The wiring window 411 corresponds to the upper swash plate 309 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300 installed on the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. The horizontal empty space 417 above the upper swash plate 309 (or a horizontal triangular space 417 formed between the upper swash plate 309 and the main board 409) and the back. It functions as an opening connecting the plates 104.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 12, the case member 400 is provided with a shelf-like temporary fixing member 418 (hereinafter also referred to as “temporary fixing shelf”) at a substantially intermediate position of the height of the empty space 417. In addition, recesses 419 and 419 are formed on the outside of the rear plate 405 and on both sides of the wiring window 411, which are wiring passages that pass through the left and right side surfaces of the case member 400.

  If the layout of the wiring window 411 is specified with reference to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, the wiring window 411 has the reel 301a of the symbol variation display device 300 as shown in FIG. , 301b, 301c and the horizontal plane HH passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c as a lower limit, that is, the height at which the lower side is placed within the range. In other words, it is an arrangement.

[6. Image display]
The image display body 500 is a panel-type unit capable of displaying an image, for example, which is composed of at least a liquid crystal display (in addition, a plasma display, an organic EL display, etc.), and can open and close the front opening of the case member 400. It also functions as a front opening / closing member 90 (see FIG. 44). Note that the image display body 500 is attached to a reinforcing member 407 provided on the left side plate 404 of the case member 400 in FIG. 11 (see the shaded portion in FIG. 11 for the attachment position), and is rotated by the hinge fitting 420. It is supported freely.

  As shown in FIG. 44, a sub-board 510 is assembled on the back side of the image display body 500. For this reason, the image display body 500 such as a liquid crystal display and the sub-board 510 can be integrally configured, and the handling is facilitated, and the wiring connecting the both can be omitted. The complexity of the space 408 can be suppressed. Further, when the image display body 500 is opened, the sub-board 510 appears so as to jump out of the case member 400, so that the workability for the sub-board 510 can be significantly improved.

[6-1. Image display-Hinge bracket]
FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the hinge fitting 420. FIG. In addition, since the hinge metal fitting 420 has a vertically symmetrical structure, the upper part will be mainly described. The hinge fitting 420 is fixed to the fixing member 420a attached to the reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400, the rotating member 420b attached to the back side of the image display body 500 (see the broken line area 500s in FIG. 36), and the rotating member 420b. It comprises a short link 420c and a long link 420d that connect the members 420a.

  The fixing member 420a of the hinge bracket 420 has a horizontal fixing piece 420e in the form of a shelf plate. One end of a long link 420d is connected to the upper surface of the fixing piece 420e by a pin P1, and a short link is connected to the lower surface of the fixing piece 420e. One end of 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P2. On the other hand, the rotating member 420b of the hinge bracket 420 has a horizontal bearing piece 420f that is in the form of a shelf plate. One end of the long link 420d is pin P3 on the upper surface of the bearing piece 420f, and the lower surface of the bearing piece 420f. In addition, one end of the short link 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P4.

  Thus, the fixed piece 420e, the bearing piece 420f, the long link 420d, the short link 420c, and the pins P1 to P4 constitute a four-bar rotation chain as shown in the diagram of FIG. A so-called double lever mechanism is formed in which a fixed piece 420e facing a certain bearing piece 420f is a fixed link. As shown in FIGS. 37A to 37C, both the lever mechanisms approximate the rotation trajectory of the image display body 500 to the rotation trajectory centering on the rotation shaft 100 a of the door-shaped front member 200. Therefore, each pin position is set. That is, the hinge bracket 420 functions as a rotation center moving mechanism, and even if the rotation position of the door-shaped front member 200 changes, the rotation outer edge side of the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are not rotated. The distance from the edge side is made substantially constant.

  The long link 420d and the short link 420c have overlapping regions 420g and 420h that overlap vertically when the image display body 500 is rotated (opened) by approximately 90 degrees (for example, the overlapping of the long link 420d). The region 420g is expanded in a triangle so as to overlap the overlapping region 420h of the short link 420c.), And pin holes 420i and 420j are formed in the overlapping regions 420g and 420h, respectively. The pin holes 420i and 420j are aligned on the same axis and inserted into a rod-shaped stop pin (not shown) to connect the long link 420d and the short link 420c, thereby locking the lever mechanism and locking the image display body. It is for fixing 500 to an open position.

[6-2. Image display-Lock piece]
As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the vertical reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400 is locked to the reinforcing member 407 on the opposite side of the reinforcing member 407 provided with the hinge fitting 420 (on the right side in FIG. 11). A piece 421 is pivotally attached. When the lock piece 421 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 11, the tip of the lock piece 421 is engaged with a receiving portion 508 projecting from the back side of the image display body 500. The image display body 500 is locked at a position where the upper portion of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. On the other hand, when the lock piece 421 is rotated in the reverse direction from the locked state, the lock of the image display body 500 is released, and the lock piece 421 is rotatable about the hinge fitting 420. Normally, before the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, the image display body 500 is locked in the closed position to prevent unnecessary rotation, while in the state where the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, the image is displayed. The display body 500 is unlocked to be rotatable.

[6-3. Image display body-connector]
By the way, since the image display body 500 which can be opened and closed is provided in the case member 400 separately from the door-shaped front member 200 of the outer main body 100, when the inside of the case member 400 is visually recognized or the case member 400 is operated. In this case, the door-shaped front member 200 on the near side must be opened first, and then the image display body 500 on the far side must be opened, which may reduce workability and annoyance. .

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present example, the rotation direction of the image display body 500 is set to the same direction as the rotation direction of the door-shaped front member 200, and the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are appropriately connected. 700 is connected, and the image display body 500 is also opened and closed together with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. According to this, when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened, the image display body 500 is also rotated in the same direction via the connector 700, and the front surface of the case member 400 is opened. In other words, the image display body 500 is rotated around the door-shaped front member 200, and not only the inside of the outer main body 100 but also the inside of the case member 400 can be visually recognized by a single lateral opening operation.

  Here, as described above, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 according to the embodiment are configured such that the pivot locus of the image display body 500 is the rotation axis 100a of the door-shaped front member 200 by the lever mechanism of the hinge fitting 420. However, there is still a relative shift between the movements of the two. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the coupling tool 700 of the embodiment forms a fixed sheath member 701 on the back surface on the free end side of the image display body 500, and slides inside the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is accommodated in a free state, and the tip of the rod 702 is connected to the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200 (specifically, the base member 215a of the lock device 215) so as to be rotatable by a stop shaft 703. is there. By doing so, as shown in FIG. 39, the image display body 500 opens and closes together as if it is an accessory part of the door-shaped front member 200 in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. The rod 702 of the connector 700 enters and exits the fixed sheath member 701 to absorb the relative shift in movement.

  Note that the maximum protrusion length when the rod 702 protrudes most from the rotation outer edge (free end) of the image display body 500 is when the image display body 500 is in the open position (for example, when it is opened 90 °). It is set based on the distance between the rotating outer edge of the door-shaped front member 200 (position of the stop shaft 703) and the rotating outer edge of the image display body 500. For this reason, the length of the rod 702 can be set to the minimum necessary length, and the increase in size of the coupler can be suppressed.

  The retaining shaft 703 is attached to support pieces 215b, 215b, and 215b formed by bending a part of the base member 215a of the lock device 215 so as to be movable up and down, and is always urged downward by a spring 703a. Has been. Therefore, the stop shaft 703 can be moved up against the bias of the spring 703a, and the rod 702 of the connector 700 can be attached and detached by moving up and floating the lower end. That is, the stop shaft 703 can be inserted from above into the shaft hole portion 702a formed at the tip portion of the rod 702, and can be held by the biasing force of the spring 703a.

  In FIG. 40, reference numeral 704 denotes an elastic cantilever type stopper provided on the upper surface of the fixed sheath member 701 of the connector 700. The rod 702 removed from the stop shaft 703 is attached to the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is held inside, and is engaged with a hook wall 702b at the end of a groove 705 formed on the upper surface of the rod 702 to prevent the rod 702 from blinding. On the side of the rod 702, a knob 706 protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction, and the stopper 704 is unlocked by picking the knob 706 and forcibly moving the rod 702. It is like that. Further, a retaining prevention piece 701 a is suspended from the bottom surface on the front end side of the fixed sheath member 701 and is inserted into the groove 705 of the rod 702. The retaining prevention piece 701a is in contact with the hooking wall 702b when the rod 702 protrudes the most, and prevents the rod 702 from coming out of the fixed sheath member 701.

  In FIG. 40, reference numeral 509 in the vicinity of the connector 700 is an engaging portion protruding from the back surface of the image display body 500 on the rotating outer edge side. The engaging portion 509 is engaged with the reinforcing bar 402 that traverses the opening 401 of the case member 400 to support the load on the free end side of the image display body 500 in the closed position. As shown in FIG. 11, the reinforcing bar 402 has a slide-type guide part 402 a inclined downward toward the image display body 500 in order to smoothly guide the engaging portion 509 to the upper surface of the reinforcing bar 402. It is provided. Further, the engaging portion 509 of the image display body 500 is formed of a synthetic resin having excellent lubricity different from that of the image display body 500, and is detachably attached to the image display body 500. Yes.

  By the way, the relative displacement of the movement due to the difference in the rotation trajectory between the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above-described telescopic rod-type connector 700 but also a flexible wire. Can also be absorbed. However, if the connecting tool is a flexible wire or the like, the door-shaped front member 200 will hit the image display body 500 that is stopped while the door-shaped front member 200 is open, and the smoothness will be impaired. There is a fear. On the other hand, for example, an urging means such as a winding spring may be provided on the image display body 500 so as to constantly urge it in the closing direction. By doing so, when the door-shaped front member 200 is closed, the image display body 500 is closed by itself while pulling the coupling tool by the action of the urging force, so that the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 do not collide. Of course, the means for rotating the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above. For example, the hinge bracket 420, which is an element for rotation in the above, is not limited to the structure of the both lever mechanisms as described above, but is centered on a single pin 420k as shown in FIGS. A simple one that rotates the image display 500 may be used.

  Locking means for locking the image display body 500 in the closed position as described above, in which the image display body 500 is attached to the case member 400 with a hinge structure so that the image display body 500 can be rotated like a door. When the above-mentioned lock piece 421) is added, the lock is continued in principle with the case member 400 mounted on the outer main body 100, and the lock is released only when necessary, such as checking in the wiring work space 408. It is also possible to select the handling, and in that case, since the important parts (for example, the main board 409 and the sub board 510) in the wiring work space 408 can be blocked by the image display body 500, it is effective in improving the crime prevention performance. .

  A gap 10 is provided between the upper edge of the opening 401 of the case member 400 and the upper edge of the closed image display body 500, and the reinforcing member 407 of the top plate 406 is attached by a finger passing through the gap 10. It can be grasped. Further, a handle opening 422 is formed in the front center portion of the top plate 406 of the case member 400 (the reinforcing band 444 between the skylight portions 443 and 443), and a finger passing through the handle opening 422 is used to attach the top plate 406 to the top plate 406. The reinforcing member 407 can be gripped. Therefore, the case member 400 can be properly used for the handle 422 and the gap 10 in accordance with the place and posture of handling. For example, when the case member 400 is transported before being incorporated into the outer main body 100, it is better to carry it in a bowl shape using the handle port 422. On the other hand, the case member 400 mounted on the outer main body 100 is shown in FIG. As described above, the grip port 422 is hidden behind the outer body 100 so that a finger does not enter, so that the case member 400 is pulled out by placing the finger on the reinforcing member 407 from the gap 10. The lower handle 316 (see FIGS. 4 and 11) of the device case 302 protrudes from the front center of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the outer body 100 is pushed or pulled by holding the lower handle 316. The case member 400 can be easily taken in and out of the case. In this case, the lower handle 316 is integrated with the case member 400 because the device case 302 is fixed to the case member 400 with screws. Therefore, the lower handle 316 protrudes in front of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400. Is equal to

[6-4. Image display body-frame member]
The image display body 500 has a size that covers almost the entire region above the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400. In addition, a frame member 501 that surrounds a region below the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400, that is, a front region of the symbol variation display device 300 in a frame shape, is integrally formed below the image display body 500. The reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are bordered by the frame member 501. The surface of the frame member 501 is a decorative surface, on which an appropriate pattern is drawn. Although not shown, the frame member 501 is an electric decoration composed of a light emission source such as an LED, a light emission control board that controls the light emission source, and a decorative member that is disposed in front of the light emission source and can transmit light. Is provided. Here, what combined the image display body 500 and the frame member 501 is demonstrated as the front opening / closing member 90 (refer FIG. 44) below.

[6-4-1. Image Display Body-Frame Member-Lighting Device]
A lighting device 502 is provided on the upper and lower sides of the frame member 501, and the design of the symbol variation display device 300 is illuminated brightly by the lighting device 502. Since the frame member 501 is suspended below the image display body 500 and is close to the symbol variation display device 300, it is possible to bring the light source closer to the symbol variation display device 300 by incorporating the illumination device 502 into such a frame member 501. it can. Therefore, the means for incorporating the lighting device 502 into the frame member 501 has a feature that sufficient brightness can be ensured even with a low amount of light compared to the conventional lighting device.

  As illustrated in FIG. 4, the illumination device 502 illustrated as an embodiment has a strip-like substrate that is elongated in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface of the drawing (in the width direction of the slot machine 1 and in the same direction as the rotation axis of the reel 301 a...). A large number of light emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as LEDs) 504 are arranged in a row 503, and the lower lighting device 502 includes an LED 504 in a tube frame 506 whose upper surface is closed with, for example, a milky white translucent cover plate 505. On the other hand, the upper illuminating device 502 is formed by disposing the LED 504 downward in a translucent cover 507 having a U-shaped cross section upward, for example, milky white.

  Note that the upper lighting device 502 is installed obliquely downward with the lighting direction from directly below to the player side, that is, the transparent plate 214a side, as shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the direction of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 503 is set so that the center line L (see the enlarged view of FIG. 4) of the main irradiation region of the LED 504 having relatively strong directivity is inclined with respect to the transparent plate 214a. It is inclined obliquely downward toward the transparent plate 214a side.

  Also, if a rod-like light emitter such as a fluorescent lamp is used as the light source of the lighting device 502, the substrate 503 in FIG. 4 is changed to a plate-like or concave reflecting member that wraps the light source, and direct light and What is necessary is just to set so that the centerline of the main irradiation area directed by the sum total of reflected light may strike the back surface on the transparent plate 214a side. As described above, when the irradiation aim of the illumination device 502 is set to the transparent plate 214a, even if a part of the leaked light illuminates the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, there is almost no influence.

  According to experiments, when the illumination direction of the illumination device 502 is directed to the peripheral surface side of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, specific portions of the curved reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are strongly reflected and difficult to see. On the other hand, when the center line L of the main irradiation area is inclined with respect to the transparent plate 214a as described above, the outer peripheral surface of the reel is illuminated through the transparent plate 214a, so that the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. It was confirmed that a wide range became bright and easy to see. The reason for this is that the light emitted from the lighting device 502 is reflected by the transparent plate 214a fitted in the transparent window 214 of the door-shaped front member 200 and diffused to the whole, or the reel 301a, It is presumed that the wide range of 301b and 301c looks bright or is due to their synergistic action.

  The structure of the upper illumination device 502 as described above can also be adopted in the lower illumination device 502, and of course, it can be adopted only in the lower illumination device 502 as shown in FIG. 32 is a diagram in which the upper illumination device 502 in FIG. 4 is disposed on the lower side and the lower illumination device 502 is disposed on the upper side. Therefore, “upper” in the description of the illumination device 502 is “lower”. And read “below” as “upper”.

  By the way, when the LED is used as the light source of the lighting device 502 as in the embodiment, (a) the conventional driving is performed at a high voltage (for example, about 800 V at start-up and about 600 V at operation) because it is driven at a low voltage. (B) Longer life than a cold cathode tube, (c) Stronger than a cold cathode tube that is a glass tube, (d) Width of production because multicolor emission is possible (E) There is an advantage that it is lighter than a cold cathode tube used in combination with an inverter, and therefore the burden on the hinge fitting 420 that supports the image display body 500 is small.

[7. Wiring means]
For example, each of the insertion buttons 205 and 206 and the start lever 210 (hereinafter simply referred to as “generic names” in the operation unit 202 of the medal discharge device 110, the power supply device 112, and the door-shaped front member 200 attached to the outer main body 100. The main body 409, etc. in the case member 400 (sometimes simply referred to as “case member side electric component” as a generic term for the case member side electric component). Connected. In the slot machine 1 according to the embodiment, the model unit 50 (see FIGS. 44 and 45) including the front opening / closing member 90 and the case member 400 is detachable from the outer main body 100. At this time, rational wiring means is provided for easily connecting or disconnecting the main body side electrical component (housing side electrical component) and the case member side electrical component.

[7-1. Wiring means-wiring relay member]
As described above, the wiring relay member 113 shown in FIG. 14 is attached to the upper part of the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. 4 and 5, the wiring relay member 113 is located at a position corresponding to the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and faces the empty space 417 of the case member 400 from the wiring window 411. Yes. The wiring relay member 113 relays the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric parts and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electric parts, and is connected to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. A mounting plate 120 to be screwed, a cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120, and a plurality of (two in the embodiment, large and small) connector boards (hereinafter referred to as “mounting board”). It may also be referred to as a “connector connection terminal board”.

  Of the two connector boards 122 and 123, the larger connector board 122 located on the left side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is fixedly attached to the mounting plate 120, and is connected to the main board 409. A connector 124 that is paired with the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 is provided.

  On the other hand, the smaller connector board 123 located on the right side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is attached in a non-fixed and free-movable state in the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121. Accordingly, FIG. As shown in Fig. 4, the movable member can move in the vertical direction and can move in the horizontal direction. This small connector board 123 is provided with a connector 125 that makes a pair with the connector 427 at the tip of the harness 426 connected to the case member side electrical components other than the main board 409. The connector 125 and the connector 124 are board-fixed types that are fixed to a printed circuit board by fixing means such as soldering, and inexpensive DIN standards are used.

  Further, the cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120 includes two large and small openings 126 and 127 through which the connectors 124 and 125 pass, a support cylinder 128 protruding in a position side by side with the openings 126 and 127, and a lower half. And a tunnel-like wiring duct 129 projecting forward.

  The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 passes through the inside of the wiring duct 129 or is bundled with a hook-shaped wiring stopper 130 protruding from the lower front surface of the mounting plate 120 of the wiring relay member 113. 1 are distributed to the side plates 102 and 102 of the outer main body 100 as shown by a one-dot chain line L in FIG. 1, and the direction is changed substantially vertically near the corners of the side plates 102 and 102 and the back plate 104, many of which are The wiring board 109 is connected to the electrical component on the main body side through the wiring opening 109 provided in the back of the partition plate 105. Of course, when there is a main body side electrical component (for example, the external relay terminal plate 131 provided on the inner surface of the side plate 102 in FIG. 1) in the region above the partition plate 105, regardless of the wiring opening 109 of the partition plate 105. Connected as is.

From the wiring means described so far, the following technical idea can be grasped.
(A) The rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is self-exposed between a horizontal plane passing through the rotation center of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 and a horizontal plane passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. The wiring window 411 is formed at a height at which the lower side is located.
(B) A wiring relay member 113 is installed on the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 to relay the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric parts and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electric parts.
(C) A vertical wiring path through which wiring passes along the inner surfaces of the side plates 102 and 102 of the outer main body 100 is formed.
(D) The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 is guided to the side of the case member 400, and is connected to the main body side electrical component through the wiring path therefrom.

  In the gaming machine having the components (a) to (d) above, the main body side wirings 119 do not pass behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, and the side plates 102, 102 of the outer main body 100 are connected. Since the wiring path provided along the corner (including the corner with the back plate 104 (see FIG. 10)) is bypassed, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c can be brought close to the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. The diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is larger than that of the conventional configuration, that is, the conventional configuration in which the main body side wirings 119 pass through the back of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c almost down the center of the back plate 104. Can be bigger. Note that the larger the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the greater the force of rotation.

[7-2. Wiring means-connectors 425 and 427]
As described above, the two connectors 124 and 125 provided on the wiring relay member 113 include the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 connected to the main board 409 of the case member 400 and the case member side other than the main board 409. The connectors 427 at the ends of the harnesses 426 connected to the electrical components are respectively connected.

  The two connectors 425 and 427 are integrally attached to one connector holder 428 as shown in FIG. The connector holder 428 includes a holder main body 429 to which the connectors 425 and 427 are screwed, a plate-like attachment piece 431 that has a through hole 430 at a substantially central portion and protrudes on both sides of the holder main body 429, and It consists of a well-known button-type panel fastener 432 (trade name “Nylatch”: registered trademark) mounted in the through hole 430 of the attachment piece 431, and as shown in FIGS. 5 and 8A, the wiring relay member 113 An attachment piece 431 is applied to the tip of the support cylinder 128, and a button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is inserted into the support cylinder 128 and locked. Accordingly, since the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support cylinder 128 serving as a fixing means, and then fixed to the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 cannot be disconnected.

[7-2-1. Wiring Relay Board-Connector 425, 427-Temporary Stop Shelf]
As described above, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connectors 124 and 125 of the wiring relay member 113. However, before the case member 400 is assembled into the outer main body 100, that is, from the factory shipment to the completion of installation, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected. 427 is temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided in the case member 400.

  The temporary fixing shelf 418 is a shelf-like member that faces the wiring window 411 from the inside of the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 12, and 13, and is shown in FIG. In this way, a substantially horizontal bench portion 433 on which the connector holder 428 is placed, a bench side plate 434 erected on both ends of the bench portion 433, and three inward claw pieces 435, 435 protruding from each bench side plate 434. , 435. Between the central one of the inward claw pieces 435, 435, and 435 and the other two on the upper and lower sides, there is an interval at which the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be fitted. One bench side plate 434 has a thin plate structure in which a finger hook portion 436 is extended at the tip, and is supported at one end by applying a force in the X direction indicated by an arrow in FIG. It can be bent outward like a leaf spring, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be easily detached from the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 in the bent state. The imaginary line in FIG. 8A shows an example in which the tip of the finger hook portion 436 is bent into a key shape. By doing so, the connector holder 428 can be removed just like pressing the button as indicated by arrow Y. It can be done easily.

  6, the connector holder 428 is placed on the bench portion 433 of the temporary fixing shelf 418, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 is attached to the inward claw pieces 435, 435 of the bench side plate 434. The connector holder 428 is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418 by being fitted between 435. Of course, even if it is temporarily fixed, the connector holder 428 is set to have a strength that does not come off the temporary fixing shelf 418 during transportation of the case member 400. The connectors 425 and 427 integrated with the connector holder 428 are temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided in the case member 400 and do not move. Therefore, during the operation of transporting the case member 400 or assembling the case member 400 into the outer main body 100, the connectors 425 and 427 at the tips of the harnesses 424 and 426 hit the parts in the case member 400 and, of course, the parts. There is no danger of damaging itself.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 8B → FIG. 8A, in the wiring process after the case member 400 is fixed to the outer main body 100, one bench side plate 434 is bent outward as described above. When the connector holder 428 is removed from the temporary fixing shelf 418 and the connector holder 428 is moved to a position where the attachment piece 431 thereof contacts the support tube 128 of the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connector of the wiring relay member 113. 124 and 125 (details will be described later), the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is pushed in that state, and the attachment piece 431 is locked to the support cylinder 128. At this time, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIGS. 5 and 6, if the guide rail 440 for guide is provided on the bench portion 433, it is only necessary to push the connector holder 428 inward, so that workability is improved. improves.

  The connector holder 428 attached to the wiring relay member 113 as described above is stable with the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 as a supporting base and is not in contact with the case member because it is separated from the case member. Even if 100 and the model unit 50 move relatively, an unreasonable load is not applied.

From the explanation so far, the following technical idea can be grasped.
(A) an outer body having a box shape in which the front surface is open and the back surface is covered with a back plate, and the power supply device and other body side electrical components are provided;
(B) a model unit provided with a symbol variation display device for changing a plurality of symbols on a case member detachably attached to the outer main body, and other case member side electrical components;
(C) a wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body to relay the main body side wiring connected to the main body side electric component and the case side wiring connected to the case member side electric component;
(D) a connector attached to the tip of the case-side wiring;
(E) a connector holder attached to the connector;
(F) a temporary fixing member provided in the case member for temporarily fixing the connector holder;
(G) fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member, and (h) temporarily fixing the connector holder to the temporary fixing member in a state before the model unit is mounted on the outer body. (I) A gaming machine, wherein the connector holder is changed from the temporary fixing member to the fixing means while the model unit is mounted on the outer body, and the connector of the connector holder is connected to the wiring relay member.

  In the above gaming machine, the mounting of the model unit 50 to the outer main body 100 and the connection of the connectors are performed separately. In contrast, for example, a connector is directly attached to the model unit 50. A method of automatically connecting the connectors by the operation of pushing the model unit 50 into the outer main body 100 is conceivable. However, in this method, when the model unit 50 having a large mass vibrates inside the outer main body 100 during transportation or the like, a large burden is applied to the connector coupling portion, so there is a concern about reliability, and there is a problem that costs for the countermeasure are high. is there.

  The gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-type front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent from the door-type front member 200. In contrast, a gaming machine in which the door-shaped front member is divided into two upper and lower stages and the upper door-shaped front member is a part on the model unit 50 side is also conceivable. However, in such a gaming machine, when a player who is excited during the game hits the upper door-shaped front member, a direct impact is applied to the connector coupling portion, so that the coupling of the connector may become unstable. There is a problem that requires a new security structure for the joint between the upper and lower door-shaped front members.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent from the door-shaped front member 200. After the connector holder 428 is connected to the wiring relay member 113, the connector holder 428 is coupled to a part (wiring relay member 113) fixed to the outer body 100 and separated from the model unit 50 as shown in FIG. 5. Therefore, even when a low-cost general connector used by soldering to a printed circuit board is used, there is no concern about reliability and durability during transportation and gaming. In addition, only the model unit 50 is an object to be replaced when the model is changed, and the door-shaped front member 200 is not an object to be replaced.

[7-2-2. Connector 425, 427 and connectors 124, 125]
As described above, the connector 425 and the connector 427 are attached to one connector holder 428. By doing so, the connection of the two connectors 425 and 427 is completed by one operation of setting the connector holder 428 to a predetermined position of the wiring relay member 113. However, as a practical problem, in the structure in which the independent elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connector holder 428 are gathered together and integrated, the problem of “accurate positioning” between the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 becomes a difficult problem. encounter. That is, if the positioning of the four elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 on the wiring relay member 113 side is not accurate, the connectors 425 and 124 and the connectors 427 and 125 cannot be coupled together. This is because it is difficult to achieve such positioning accuracy at the cost of mass-produced products. As one means for solving such a problem, a method of using a so-called drawer connector having a mechanism for enhancing flexibility at the time of connection without soldering to a printed circuit board can be considered, but the drawer connector itself is expensive. Therefore, the cost burden is still large.

  On the other hand, in the wiring means of the embodiment, the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 as the board support member are divided and the connectors 124 and 125 are respectively attached, and at least one of the connector boards 122 and 123 is wired. A direction that is non-fixedly placed in the gap between the mounting plate 120 of the relay member 113 and the cover body 121 and is orthogonal to the connecting direction of the connector 427 and the connector 125 (here, “orthogonal” is not strictly 90 degrees). , Meaning that it is about 90 degrees on social belief)). In such a configuration, when the connection aim of the connector holder 428 is set to the connector 425 and the connector 124, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position of the other connector 427 and the connector 125, the connector board 123 moves and the deviation is corrected. Since it moves to correct, connector 427 and connector 125 can also be coupled.

From the explanation so far, the following technical idea can be grasped.
(1) “In a gaming machine having two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors that are paired with each connector, one connector group is fixed to one connector holder and paired with these connectors. The connector board is mounted on the connector board, the connector board is further divided for each connector, one of them is fixed to the board support member, and the other connector board is connected to the board support member in the connector coupling direction. A gaming machine characterized by being mounted so as to be movable in an orthogonal direction. "
(2) “A plurality of symbols are attached to an outer body having a box shape in which the front surface is open and the back surface is covered with a back plate, and includes a power supply device and other body-side electrical components; and a case member that is detachable from the outer body. In order to relay a model unit provided with a variable symbol display device and other case member side electric parts, main body side wirings connected to the main body side electric parts, and case side wirings connected to the case member side electric parts A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body; two or more connectors attached to the tip of the case side wiring; a connector holder that collectively supports the two or more connectors as a connector group; and the connector A fixing means for fixing the holder to the wiring relay member and a board that is paired with each connector of the two or more connector groups and is fixed to the printed board A connector connection terminal board, which is attached to a wiring relay member attached to the back plate and to which the connector of the other connector group is fixed. The connector terminal board is divided for each connector and one of them is fixed to the wiring relay member, and the other connector connecting terminal board is attached to the wiring relay member so as to be movable in a direction perpendicular to the connector coupling direction. A gaming machine characterized by doing so. "
(3) In a gaming machine having “two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors paired with each connector, one connector group is fixed to the board support member via the connector board. In addition, another connector group that is paired with these is attached to one connector holder, and one connector in the connector group is fixed to the connector holder, and the other connector is connected to the connector holder in the direction of connector connection. A gaming machine characterized by being mounted so as to be movable in an orthogonal direction. "
(4) “A plurality of symbols are provided on an outer body having a box shape in which the front surface is open and the back surface is covered with a back plate and provided with a power supply device and other body-side electrical components; and a case member detachable from the outer body. In order to relay a model unit provided with a variable symbol display device and other case member side electric parts, main body side wirings connected to the main body side electric parts, and case side wirings connected to the case member side electric parts A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body; two or more connectors attached to the tip of the case side wiring; a connector holder that collectively supports the two or more connectors as a connector group; and the connector A fixing means for fixing the holder to the wiring relay member and a board that is paired with each connector of the two or more connector groups and is fixed to the printed board And a connector connection terminal board that is attached to a wiring relay member attached to the back plate and to which a connector of the other connector group is fixed, and the connector holder. On the other hand, a gaming machine characterized in that one connector in the connector group is fixed and the other connector is attached to the connector holder so as to be movable in a direction perpendicular to the connector coupling direction.

  The above gaming machines are designed so that the connector holder is operated by aiming at the connector of the fixed connector connection terminal board, even if there is a slight deviation due to manufacturing error etc. in the relative position between other connectors, Since the non-fixed connector connection terminal board moves together with the connector and moves to correct the deviation and absorbs the error, it is possible to connect the connectors which are not the joint aim. Accordingly, it is possible to collectively connect a plurality of systems of connectors using one connector holder. In addition, the connector used is a general-purpose and inexpensive, for example, DIN standard soldered to a printed circuit board, and the cost is low.

  In addition, the connector holder is securely fixed to the back plate of the outer main body via a wiring relay member, and consequently the wiring relay member, by fixing means such as Nylatch (registered trademark). On the other hand, the connector holder and the model unit are only connected via a flexible harness. Even if the model unit moves, the movement is not transmitted to the connector holder because the flexible harness absorbs the movement. . For this reason, even if a relative movement occurs between the outer body and the model unit due to vibration during transportation, the connector holder moves only with the outer body and is not affected by the model unit. No load is applied to the part. Therefore, the reliability of connector connection is very high.

  As in the embodiment, the configuration in which the small connector board 123 corresponding to the small connector 125 is movable and the large connector 425 and the connector 124 are used as a reference for coupling is compared to the opposite configuration. , 427, 125 can be easily combined. This is because the smaller connector board 123 can be handled with a lighter force, so that it is easy to automatically correct the deviation. In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the connectors 425 and 124 are coupled before the other connectors 427 and 125, so that the connectors for coupling aiming can be easily matched.

  Further, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 9, the chamfered portion C (the chamfered portion C ( If a straight chamfering or a curved chamfering is possible), the guiding action along the taper of the chamfered portion C makes the connectors more connectable.

  In addition to the configuration in which the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 are movable as in the embodiment, it is also possible to allow any one of the connectors 425 and 427 on the connector holder 428 side to be movable. In this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained. A specific example of the connector holder 428 is shown in FIG. In this example, a holder cylinder 429a with a female thread is projected from the holder main body 429 of the connector holder 428, while ear pieces 427b having free holes 427a on both sides of the connector 427 are formed, and the receiver cylinder 429a of the connector holder 428 is formed. The loose hole 427a of the connector 427 is loosely fitted, and a screw 427c with a washer is used to prevent the ear piece 427b from coming off. By doing so, the connector 427 can freely move with respect to the connector holder 428 within the range of the difference in diameter between the free hole 427a and the receiving tube 429a. In this case, the connector boards 122 and 123 may be fixed to the mounting plate 120 integrally. In the embodiment, two connectors are handled as one connector group, but the number of connectors in one connector group may be two or more.

  Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 12, the back of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is recessed toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300. A cable groove 437 is formed, and wiring ports 438 and 438 penetrating the side plate 404 (or the rear plate 405) of the case member 400 are opened near both ends of the cable groove 437. The wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 are for connecting the symbol variation display device 300 and the main board 409 and the like. In FIG. The cable 313 (see FIG. 12) of the reel substrate 312 provided on the non-hinge side surface of the door-shaped front member 200 is pulled out of the case member 400 from one wiring port 438, and the cable 313 is as shown in FIG. The cable is inserted into the cable groove 437, and the tip of the cable 313 is returned from the other wiring port 438 into the case member 400 to be connected to the main board 409 or the like. The cable groove 437 is provided with cable stoppers 439 at predetermined intervals so that the cable 313 does not fall off from the cable groove 437.

  Thus, the main board 409 and the reel board 312 are both case member-side electrical components in the case member 400, and it is not necessary to pull out the cable 313 outside the case member 400. The reason why the case member 400 is intentionally provided with the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 to bypass the cable 313 to the outside is as follows.

  The installation location of the reel substrate 312 is a non-hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 among the side surfaces of the symbol variation display device 300 (device case 302) in consideration of the workability of wiring for inserting and removing connectors in a limited space. The side corresponding to is preferable. On the contrary, if the reel substrate 312 is provided on the side surface of the device case 302 corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200, the door-shaped front member 200 (see FIG. 1) that is fully opened and the reel substrate 312 are close to each other. This is because a large working space required for inserting and removing the connector cannot be secured because of facing each other.

  However, on the other hand, when the connection part of the boards (main board 409, sub board 510, image display body 500, etc.) to be connected to the reel board 312 is on the side corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 of the case member 400. The cable 313 crosses the inside of the case member 400. Then, the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is attached to the case member 400, or the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is pulled out.

  On the other hand, if the case member 400 is provided with the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 to bypass the cable 313 to the outside as in the embodiment, the trouble of the cable 313 as described above does not occur. In addition, the wiring work is better when the device case 302 is slightly pulled out from a predetermined position, and accordingly, the length of the cable 313 from the wiring port 438 to the reel board 312 is also the wiring cost. There is room to say. Accordingly, the cable 313 is slackened with the apparatus case 302 set at a predetermined position, and the cable 313 is slackened depending on the amount of pull-out. When the slack of the cable 313 is large, the cable 313 is formed in a triangular space formed between the lower swash plate 310 of the apparatus case 302 and the corner portion at the back of the case member 400, which is located side by side with the wiring port 438. The loose part of can be escaped.

  Further, when the cable groove 437 is inflated toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 as in the embodiment, it is between the back of the case member 400 and the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302. Useful for effective use of dead space. Note that wiring using the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 is not limited to the cable 313 of the reel substrate 312, and can be applied to all cables crossing the inside of the case member 400.

  In addition, in FIG. 11, the code | symbol 441 is a function separation relay terminal board.

  The slot machine 1 configured as described above is shipped from the factory in a finished product state in which the case member 400 is mounted on the outer main body 100 and necessary wiring is completed. Then, the finished product is attached to the game machine installation island of the amusement hall. At this time, as shown in an imaginary line in FIG. When stopping with the fixing member 601, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are opened, and the fixing member 601 is inserted into the through hole 132 of the outer main body 100 from the inside of the case member 400 through the skylight 443, and The fixing member 601 is tightened over the skylight 443 with a tool 602 such as a screwdriver, and the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail 600 of the gaming machine installation island are fixedly connected. In addition, since the through-hole 132 is provided with two or more, it can be arbitrarily selected and used as needed. For example, even if the position and size of the upper beam 600 vary, the through hole 132 corresponding to the upper beam 600 can be selected. Further, when the entire gaming machine is replaced, if the through-hole 132 to be used is changed, it is possible to prevent the adverse effect that the hole of the fixing member 601 is opened at the same position of the upper rail 600 (so-called fool hole).

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 25, a gap S is formed between the outer main body 100 and the case member 400, and heat generated from the image display body 500 or the like is used to cool the image display body 500 (not shown). Then, it passes from the skylight portion 443 of the case member 400 through the gap S to the vent hole 133 of the back plate 104, and from there to the inside of the gaming machine installation island. At this time, there is a wiring relay member 113 between the back plate 104 and the case member 400, which acts like a barrier and closes the gap S over a wide range. Therefore, the hot air flowing through the gap S is blocked by this portion, and the wiring relay member 113 It is positively discharged to the outside from the vent hole 133 of the back plate 104 located above. Therefore, the heat dissipation effect is high.

[8. Each reel symbol, symbol row]
As shown in FIG. 46, each reel 301a, 301b, 301c has a series of symbols (a total of 21 symbols indicated by array numbers 0 to 20) formed by arranging a plurality of types of symbols at regular intervals. A reel band (symbol band) on which the symbol is marked is attached. FIG. 46 shows a state in which the symbol rows written on the reel bands 321a, 321b, and 321c attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are developed in a plane. In addition, in order to identify the symbol arrange | positioned in a symbol row | line | column, the said sequence number is described for convenience. 46 shows the reel 301a to which the reel band 321a is attached as the left reel, the reel 301b to which the reel band 321b is attached as the middle reel, and the reel 301c to which the reel band 321c is attached as the right reel. In this description, the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c are indicated as necessary.

  Each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c has a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged in each symbol row, and the opening 401 (also referred to as symbol display window, hereinafter symbol). It arrange | positions so that it can visually recognize via the display window 401 (refer FIG. 47 demonstrated next).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, the types of symbols include “7” symbol painted in red (hereinafter referred to as “red 7 symbol”), “7” symbol painted in blue (hereinafter “7” symbol). "Blue 7 symbol"), "BAR symbol", "Cherry symbol with cherry symbol", "Watermelon symbol with watermelon symbol", "Replay symbol", "Bell symbol" "Bell design", "designed as" righteous "(hereinafter referred to as" righteous design ")", "designed as" positive "(hereinafter referred to as" corrected symbol ")" is there. The bell symbol can be divided into “bell 1 symbol” in which one star is drawn and “bell 2 symbol” in which two stars are drawn according to the number of stars drawn in the bell. it can.

  In FIG. 46, “Red 7 design” indicates that the reel band 321a has two array numbers 3 and 6, the reel band 321b has one array number 12, and the reel band 321c has array number 10 One corresponds. “Blue 7 design” corresponds to one of array number 16 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 3 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 15 in the reel band 321c. The “BAR symbol” corresponds to one of array number 11 in the reel band 321a, two of array numbers 6 and 9 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 2 in the reel band 321c. The “cherry symbol” has one of array number 10 in the reel band 321a, three of array numbers 1, 14, and 17 in the reel band 321b, and array numbers 7 and 14 in the reel band 321c. These correspond to two. The “replay symbols” are five in the reel band 321a: array numbers 1, 4, 7, 12, and 17, and in the reel band 321b, array numbers 0, 5, 8, 11, In the reel band 321c, five of the array numbers 1, 5, 8, 13, 13, and 17 correspond to the reel band 321c. “Bell 1 design” has three arrangement numbers 13, 15, 18 in the reel band 321a, and five arrangement numbers 2, 7, 10, 15, and 18 in the reel band 321b. In the reel band 321c, three of array numbers 9, 12, and 16 correspond. The “bell 2 symbol” corresponds to three of array numbers 2, 5, and 8 in the reel band 321a, and two of array numbers 0 and 4 in the reel band 321c. “Watermelon design” has three arrangement numbers 9, 14, and 19 in the reel band 321a, two arrangement numbers 4 and 13 in the reel band 321b, and arrangement number 3 in the reel band 321c.・ 4, 11 and 20 correspond. The “definition symbol” corresponds to one of array number 20 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 19 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 18 in the reel band 321c. The “normal symbol” corresponds to one of array number 0 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 20 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 18 in the reel band 321c. In addition, the kind of design is an example, Comprising: It is not restricted to these kinds.

[9. Frame member]
FIG. 47 shows an enlarged view around the frame member 501 including the symbol display window 401 in the slot machine 1 as viewed from the front. 47, a symbol display window 401 is formed at the center of the frame member 501, and a plurality of indicators such as lamps and LEDs (corresponding to “various indicators” described later) around the symbol display window 401. Is shown to be placed. A part of the three reels (reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is made visible through the symbol display window 401. Further, it is shown that the effect display surface of the image display body 500 is arranged above the frame member 501, and images (including moving images) displayed on the image display body 500 are visible from the player. It has become. Hereinafter, each of the above-described configurations shown in FIG. 47 will be described in detail.

[9-1. Symbol display window]
As shown in FIG. 47, from the symbol display window 401, three consecutive symbols among the symbols in the symbol row of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c are visible. The three positions where this symbol is displayed are “upper (or upper position)” (for example, the position where “bell 1 symbol” of the reel 301a is displayed), “middle (or middle position)” (for example, , A position where the “replay symbol” of the reel 301b is displayed) and a “lower stage (or lower position)” (for example, a position where the “bell 1 symbol” of the reel 301c is displayed).

  From the above, it is possible to display “number of stages × number of reels” symbols in the symbol display window 401. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, a maximum of nine symbols can be displayed in the symbol display window 401 by “the number of stages (3) × the number of reels (3)”.

  Various lamps are provided on the left side of the frame member 501 (also referred to as a display panel, which will be unified as the display panel 501 below) on the left side when viewed from the symbol display window 401. Among them, “BET1”, “BET2 ”And“ BET 3 ”are BET lamps (bet lamps) 614. The numbers of the BET lamps (the numbers 1, 2, and 3 of“ BET 1 ”,“ BET 2 ”, and“ BET 3 ”above) are as follows. Each corresponds to the number of bets (the number of bets, the number corresponding to the number of medals bet), that is, “1” is one bet (the number of bets placed is one) and “2” is 2 bets (the number of medals bet is 2), and “3” corresponds to 3 bets (also called a MAX bet, the number of medals bet is 3).

  An effective arrangement is determined according to the number of bets. This “effective arrangement” is also called an effective line. Hereinafter, it is referred to as an effective line. A combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination, which will be described later, is determined to be displayed as a combination mode of symbols corresponding to the winning combination only after being displayed side by side on one active line. That is, even if each symbol constituting the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is individually displayed in the symbol display window 401, each symbol is not lined up on any active line (that is, the predetermined symbol is displayed). If the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not arranged on the active line), it is not determined that the symbol combination mode corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. In this way, when the symbol combinations corresponding to the predetermined winning combination are not arranged on the active line, it is determined that the disparate symbol combination mode (that is, the lost symbol combination) is displayed.

  Next, the bet number and the effective line will be specifically described. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, as an example, in a normal gaming state (general gaming state) and a bonus internal state, a game with three cards is defined or recommended (a prescribed number of three). However, as will be described later, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, in a bonus state controlled during the bonus game, a game with two cards is played (a prescribed number of two). Further, the effective lines in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment are two lines, that is, a straight line arrangement that rises to the right (upward line to the right) and a straight line arrangement that moves to the right (downward line to the right). Specifically, a line (that is, a line rising to the right) 623b in which “BAR symbol-replay symbol-definition symbol” is displayed in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 47, and “bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol” are displayed. Only the two lines of the line 623a on which “” is displayed (that is, the lower right) line 623a are effective lines.

  Note that the bet number and the active line are not limited to the above example. For example, the effective line may be a line that can be visually recognized by the player in the symbol display window 401, and may be, for example, a mountain-shaped or V-shaped array in addition to one or a plurality of linear arrays. Further, the number of effective lines is not limited to two, and one or a plurality of effective lines may be set. Further, the number of active lines may be changed according to the number of medals bet in the game.

  47. The combination of symbols on the active line displayed in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 47 is “bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol” displayed on the right-down line 623a which is one of the effective lines. Since this symbol combination is a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role (replaying role), in the next game, an automatic bet is made without inserting medals, and the same game as the previous game is executed again. It becomes possible to do. Even if “bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol” is displayed on the active line, it is difficult for the player to grasp at a glance which combination of symbols is displayed. However, the combination of the symbols “replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol” is displayed on the middle line that is not the active line, so that the player can grasp that the player has won the replay. In addition, like the above-mentioned replay combination (re-playing combination), it is necessary to prepare a symbol combination that is difficult to grasp the winning combination at a glance on the active line but difficult to grasp the winning combination when viewed from the entire symbol display window 401. For other winning combinations, symbol combinations may be prepared in the same manner. At this time, even if it is difficult to grasp the winning combination at first glance only by the effective line, the player can easily grasp the winning combination of the winning combination when viewed from the entire symbol display window 401.

[9-2. Various indicators]
As shown in FIG. 47, the display panel 501 has a plurality of indicators such as lamps and LEDs that can be lit (or blinked) in accordance with the gaming state of the slot machine 1 around the symbol display window 401. Yes. Among such a plurality of displays, various displays other than the special display LED 612 will be described.

  The error lamp 604 starts to light (or flash) when any trouble or failure (hereinafter referred to as “error”) occurs during the game of the slot machine 1, and an error is currently occurring. It is a lamp that has the role of notifying players (including hall attendants). In FIG. 47, in the vicinity of the error lamp 604, an error is abbreviated and “ERR” is drawn. Since it is difficult to show details of the error only by lighting or blinking with the error lamp 604, the slot machine 1 can display information indicating the details of the generated error on the special display LED 612 provided separately. .

  The replay lamp 606 is a lamp having a role of notifying the player that a replay can be performed (a game can be performed again without betting a new medal) when the game result is a replay (described later). In FIG. 47, in the vicinity of the replay lamp 606, replay is abbreviated and the letters “REP” are drawn.

  The start lamp 608 is a lamp that starts to light (or blink) when the number of bets reaches the MAX bet and prompts the player to operate the start lever 210 (start operation). In FIG. 47, the characters “STR” are drawn in the vicinity of the start lamp 608 for abbreviated start.

  The medal IN lamp 610 is a lamp having a role of prompting the player to bet by continuing to be lit (or flashing) until the bet number reaches the maximum (MAX bet). In FIG. 47, in the vicinity of the medal IN lamp 610, the letters “INS” are drawn, omitting the insert (input of game value).

  The stored number display LED 613 displays the number of stored medals (game value) that can be used by the player when the player inserts medals or pays out medals accompanying game results. This display has a role of notifying the player of the number of medals stored, and is composed of two side-by-side 7-segment LEDs (the number of stored number display LED 613a on the left side and the number of stored number display LED 613b on the right side). For example, when the upper limit number of medals that can be used by the player is 50, and the upper limit number is stored, “5” is displayed on the stored number display LED 613a and the stored number display LED 613b is displayed. By displaying “0”, the stored number of medals “50” is displayed so as to be distinguishable from the player.

  The BET lamp 614 (614a to 614c) indicates the number of BETs when a BET operation for betting medals (game value) up to the specified number is performed before the start lever 210 is operated at the start of the game. The display is a display device having a role of notifying the bet number (BET number) of game value in one game, and is composed of three lamps corresponding to the BET number. Specifically, when the BET number is 1, the BET lamp 614c is turned on, and when the BET number is 2, the BET lamp 614b is turned on in addition to the BET lamp 614c, and the upper BET number is 3 (MAXBET). Then, all the BET lamps 614a to 614c are turned on by further turning on the BET lamp 614a.

  Note that these display units described above are controlled by the main board 409 (see FIG. 48 described later).

  In addition to these, a bonus notification lamp for notifying the winning of a bonus game, which will be described later, a 7-segment LED for displaying the cumulative payout number of medals in a bonus game, etc., and counting the bonus game are provided separately. Also good.

  Further, the indicator such as the stored number display LED 613 and the special display LED 612 (described later) is not limited to the 7-segment LED as long as the information to be displayed on the indicator can be displayed. For example, the number of segments may be different from “7” (14-segment or 16-segment), or LCD (liquid crystal display), VFD (fluorescent display tube), organic EL, etc. may be used instead of LED. May be.

[9-3. Special display LED]
The special display LED 612 has a role of displaying a payout number to notify the player of the payout number of the game value by displaying the payout number when there is a payout of medals (game value) accompanying the game result. It is a display, and is composed of two side-by-side 7-segment LEDs (the special display LED 612a on the left side and the special display LED 612b on the right side). Specifically, a two-digit number can be displayed using the special display LEDs 612a and 612b, and when 15 medals are paid out according to the game result, the timing at which the medals are paid out one by one. In addition, by changing the display contents such as “01”, “02”,..., “15”, it is possible to notify the player of the game value (medal) payout status in real time.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special display LED 612 has a role of displaying an instruction function for displaying the instruction content by the “instruction function” in the game, in addition to the role of displaying the number of payouts. The details of the “instruction function” will be described later. In summary, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when the occurrence of an instruction by the “instruction function” is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the special display LED 612 As the instruction function display, information indicating the pressing position of the reels 301a to 301c and the stop order (reading as the pressing order or the pressing position of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in the stop operation) is displayed, and depending on the content of the display When the reel 301 is stopped, a game result advantageous to the player is provided.

  In the instruction function, the performance that affects the generation of the instruction (specifically, lottery related to the instruction function and management of state transition, etc.) is controlled by the main board 409, and specifically, lottery related to the instruction function. In addition to the control of the state transition, the indication function display on the special display LED 612 is also managed by the main board 409. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, based on the determination result by the main board 409, other display means (for example, the image display body 500) other than the display destination of the instruction function display indicate the instruction function of the same content. However, such a display may be controlled by a peripheral board other than the main board 409 (for example, the sub board 510). The connection relationship between the special display LED 612, the main board 409, and the sub board 510 is illustrated in FIG.

  More specifically, when a push order small combination (any of AT1 to AT10) is selected as a winning combination during an AT game, the selected push order small combination is controlled under the control of the main board 409 (especially the CPU 1110). The special display LED 612 displays the instruction content of “appropriate push order” corresponding to Therefore, the player can recognize the proper pressing order when interpreting the display content of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612. On the other hand, information similar to the display content of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510 by a command or the like, so that the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 that has received the command indicates It is possible to display an image indicating the “push order” on the image display body 500. A specific display example of the instruction function display will be described later in [11-3-4].

  In the slot machine 1, such an instruction function display can be performed in a mode in which any display unit in the display panel 501 also functions (in this example, the special display LED 612 that displays a payout number is displayed. ) That is, with the special display LED 612, the instruction function display and the payout number display are performed. For example, by dividing each display period, it is possible to display both without confusion. In this embodiment, the payout number display function is also used. However, a display device having other functions may be used, or a display function display dedicated display may be provided.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an error is detected as an abnormal state, the error lamp 604 is turned on to notify the occurrence of the error, while the special display LED 612 can identify the type of the error. It also has a function for displaying error information. The display timing of the instruction function display, the payout number display, and the error information display will be described later in [11-3-5], [11-3-7], and the like.

[10. Slot machine internal configuration]
FIG. 48 schematically shows configurations of various mechanism elements, electronic devices, operation members, and the like that are installed in the slot machine 1. The slot machine 1 has a main board 409 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game. On the main board 409, a CPU 1110, a ROM 1112, a RAM 1114, an input / output interface 1116, and the like are mounted. The main board 409 has a function that influences a game result (acquisition of game value), specifically, for example, a lottery such as a winning combination, bonus, AT, etc., and a game state control and instruction based on the lottery result It manages the determination of instructions by function and the payout based on winning combinations.

  48, as an example of a configuration not shown in FIG. 48, a door open detection switch that detects the open state of the door-shaped front member 200, a storage release switch 209 (stored medal clearing switch), and a medal selector 207. And a stop button LED (stop button LED_1, stop button LED_2, stop button LED_3) that can be lit around each of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c, and the like. These configurations are controlled by the main board 409.

  The above-described single-loading buttons 205 and 206, start lever 210, reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c, storage release switch 209, etc. are all connected to the main board 409, and these operation buttons use sensors not shown. Thus, an operation by the player can be detected, and the detected operation signal can be output to the main board 409. Specifically, when the start lever 210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-described symbol variation display device 300 (starting the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is output to the main board 409, and the reel stop button 211a. , 211b, 211c are operated, an operation signal for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is output to the main board 409, respectively.

  Hereinafter, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are referred to as a left reel 301a, a middle reel 301b, and a right reel 301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are referred to as a left reel stop button 211a, a middle reel stop button 211b, and a right reel stop button 211c.

  Further, the slot machine 1 accommodates other devices together with the main substrate 409, and various signals are inputted to the main substrate 409 from these devices. In addition to the symbol variation display device 300, the devices include a medal discharge device 110 and the like.

  The symbol variation display device 300 includes reel drive motors 341a, 341b, and 341c for rotating the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c (left reel drive motor 341a, middle reel drive motor 341b, and right reel drive motor 341c). This reel drive motor is composed of a stepping motor, and each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c can be rotated and stopped independently. During the rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously displayed from top to bottom in the symbol display window 401. Is displayed while changing.

  The reels 301a, 301b, and 301c have position sensors 331a, 331b, and 331c for detecting a reference position related to the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. The reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are provided with position sensors 331a, 331b, and 331c, respectively. (Left reel position sensor 331a, middle reel position sensor 331b, right reel position sensor 331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 409, the main board 409 can obtain stop position information of each reel.

  In the medal selector 207, the solenoid 207a and the insertion sensor 207b described above are installed. The insertion sensor 207 b detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 203 and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 409. When the solenoid 207a is OFF, the inserted medal is detected by the insertion sensor 207b. On the contrary, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 207b in the medal selector 207 is locked out so that the medal insertion is not accepted, and even if the player inserts a medal, the medal selector 207 The medal flowing through the return basket 213 passes through the medal tray 201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 207b is invalidated, so that neither betting by medal insertion nor medal storage is performed.

  The medal releasing device 110 has a payout sensor 110e for detecting the payout medals one by one in the discharge port 110c, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 409 from the payout sensor 110e. Has been. The auxiliary storage box 111 for game medals is provided with a medal full sensor 111a. When the number of stored medals exceeds a predetermined number, a detection signal indicating that the number of medals exceeds the predetermined number is sent to the main board. Output to 409. At this time, the image display 500, the special display LED 612, the error lamp 604, and the like display an error display notifying the abnormality of medal storage, and notify the player, the hall employee, and the like that an abnormality has occurred (FIG. 112 described later). Equivalent to “Auxiliary storage full error” shown in

  On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 409 to the symbol variation display device 300 and the medal discharge device 110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 341a, 341b, and 341c described above is output from the main board 409. The medal releasing device 110 receives a driving signal from the main board 409 according to the combination of symbols stopped on the active line, and the medal releasing device 110 performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals necessary for payout is insufficient or there are no medals in the medal releasing device 110, the number detection by the payout sensor 110e is delayed. When a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses, the payout sensor 110e outputs a payout medal abnormality signal to the main board 409, and in response to this, the main board 409 indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the medal payout. The notification content is displayed on the error lamp 604, special display LED 612, image display 500, etc. to notify the player, hall employee, etc. that an abnormality has occurred (in the “payout medal empty error” shown in FIG. 112 described later). Equivalent). The main board 409 and various indicators (error lamp 604, start lamp 608, special display LED 612, stored number display LED 613, etc.) are connected by a harness, for example, and the main board 409 is connected to each of these indicators via corresponding ports. The lighting and display in can be operated.

  The slot machine 1 includes a sub board 510 as a peripheral board different from the main board 409. The sub board 510 includes a CPU 1118, a ROM 1120, a RAM 1122, an input / output interface 1130, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 1124, and an AMP (Audio). Amplifier) 1126, sound source IC 1128, and the like are mounted. The sub board 510 receives various command signals from the main board 409, and controls the display of the image display body 500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 502 and the operation of the speaker 512.

  Further, when the external relay terminal board 131 is provided on the main board 409, the slot machine 1 is connected to the hall computer 1200 of the game hall via the external relay terminal board 131. The external relay terminal board 131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to the hall computer 1200. Note that the connection configuration in FIG. 48 is merely an example in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. For example, as another connection configuration, not only the main board 409 but also a peripheral board other than the main board 409 (for example, the sub board 510) may be connectable to the external relay terminal board 131. Various signals can be transmitted from various boards connected to the relay terminal board 131 to the external relay terminal board 131 and output to the hall computer 1200 via the external relay terminal board 131. More specifically, various game information managed by the sub-board 510 and emergency information that can be managed by the sub-board 510 (for example, error information for notifying malfunctions and malfunctions of the components of the slot machine 1) are provided. The data can be output to the computer 1200.

  In addition, the power supply device 112 is attached with a setting key switch 112t, a reset switch 112u, a power switch 112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 1 and can be operated only when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened. Among these, the power switch 112v is for turning on / off the power supply to the slot machine 1, and the setting key switch 112t is for changing the setting (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 1. . The reset switch 112u is for releasing an error that has occurred in the slot machine 1, and is also operated when changing the setting together with the setting key switch 112t. Note that these switches described above may be installed on the main board 409.

  The above is an example of the internal configuration of the slot machine 1. In a game by the slot machine 1, when the player operates the start lever 210 in a state where the bet number of medals is determined, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c rotate, and thereafter, the player rotates the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c. Is operated, the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are controlled to stop, and when all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination of symbols on the active line, and necessary. Accordingly, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is awarded.

  As described above, the reels 321a, 321b, and 321c are attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, respectively (see FIG. 46). Then, when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the display content displayed in the symbol display window 401 (the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line) of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. It is determined whether or not a combination mode (design combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned effective line (upward right line 623b and downward right line 623a) in the symbol display window 401.

  In this example, the number of effective lines is two. However, when the slot machine 1 has a plurality of effective lines, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on each of the plurality of effective lines. It is determined whether or not. As a result, when it is determined that a plurality of symbol combinations of winning combinations are displayed, medals of a quantity that is the sum of the number of payouts corresponding to each displayed winning combination are paid out. In the slot machine 1, a predetermined number (for example, 15) can be defined as the upper limit of the number of medals paid out per time. In such a case, if the sum of the number of payouts corresponding to each winning combination displayed on multiple active lines exceeds the upper limit, a predetermined number of medals will be paid out and the upper limit will be exceeded. Minutes are truncated. In addition, the excess of the upper limit value is not divided into the next and subsequent games and paid out.

  In the following, the case where the combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one of the active lines is the symbol corresponding to the (predetermined) winning combination (this is called the winning combination symbol). It is said that the combination is complete or the winning symbol is complete.

  The symbols of the slot machine 1 include “red 7 symbol”, “blue 7 symbol”, “BAR symbol”, “cherry symbol”, “replay symbol”, “bell 1 symbol”, “bell 2 symbol”, “watermelon symbol” ”,“ Yizu design ”and“ Principal design ”have already been mentioned, but among them,“ Red 7 design ”,“ Blue 7 design ”and“ BAR design ”are more prominent than other designs. The design is easy and easy to identify. Here, the ease of identification refers to the level at which the player can easily identify the symbol including the reel being rotated and the reel being stopped. These symbols can be easily stopped while aiming so that these symbols are stopped in the symbol display window 401 when the player performs a stop operation because of the color and size of the symbols even while the reel is rotating. (That is, it is easy to push). Furthermore, as can be seen from FIG. 46, “justice symbol” and “justice symbol” can also be read as “justice” in the form of a circle formed by two symbols, “justice symbol” and “justice symbol”. As described above, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are arranged adjacent to each other in the vertical direction, and therefore, it is easy to press them up.

  These symbols are merely symbolic symbols by themselves (one symbol does not correspond to the winning combination), but they become a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination by becoming a predetermined combination. . That is, a predetermined game privilege is given. In the following, a combination of symbols allowed corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIG. 49 will be described.

[10-1. Combination of winning roles and symbols]
Here, a winning combination (including what is called a winning combination) of the slot machine 1 and a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination will be described with reference to FIGS. 49, 50, and 51 to 53. FIG. 49 is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of a winning combination. A lottery table (also referred to as a winning value determination table) shown in FIG. 49 is stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like. Although details will be described later, in the slot machine 1, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 performs a lottery for a winning combination, and such a lottery is also referred to as “internal lottery”.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing each winning combination and a condition device established corresponding to each winning combination, and is stored in the ROM 1112 or the like in advance. In FIG. 50, a blank in the table means that the condition device to which the corresponding condition device number is assigned is inactive (OFF), and “1” in the table is assigned to the corresponding condition device number. This means that the condition device is activated (ON). 51 to 53 are diagrams (Nos. 1 to 3) showing symbol combinations and medal payout numbers corresponding to each condition device, and these are also stored in the ROM 1112 or the like in advance.

  The slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described below is assumed to have an AT (assist time) function using a push order small combination as an example of a function provided in the gaming machine. The push order small combination corresponds to the winning combination of “AT1” to “AT10” shown in FIG. 49, and when a winning combination of these winning combinations can be displayed, a set of bell symbols can be displayed. Call. In a gaming machine having an AT function, it is determined whether or not an AT has been won by a lottery (AT lottery) performed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110). In an AT game, following the instruction by teaching or announcing the proper pushing order that can be expected to pay out the most medals, mainly in the case where the pushing order small role is selected as the winning role in the internal lottery of the winning role. The player who performed the reel stop operation can acquire many medals. On the other hand, in gaming periods other than AT games (non-AT), the medal acquisition in the proper pushing order can be made uncertain by not teaching or notifying the pushing order as described above. It is possible to make a difference in the expected number of medals and the consumption rate of medals. Such an AT function is an example of an instruction function provided in the slot machine 1, and detailed processing thereof will be described later.

  Further, to supplement the pushing order, since the slot machine 1 uses three reels 301a to 301c, the pushing order (stopping order of the reels 301) is "left-middle-right", "left- There are six types: “right-middle”, “middle-left-right”, “middle-right-left”, “right-left-middle”, and “right-middle-left”. In the following description, the respective pressing orders are referred to as “forward pressing”, “clamping pressing”, “middle pressing”, “middle reverse pressing”, “reverse clamping pressing”, and “reverse pressing”, respectively. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the same reel stop control is performed regardless of the pressing operation of “middle forward pressing” or “middle reverse pressing”. These two pressing orders may be simply referred to as “middle pressing” without being divided. In this case, there is substantially a push order of 5 choices.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, as a procedure for a stop operation for stopping the reel 301, a game in which a push order is not taught during a period when the AT game is not performed (non-AT) is performed. When the left reel 301a is stopped first (that is, the stop operation is first performed on the reel stop button 211a), “left press (“ forward press ”or“ squeeze press ””) is recommended. When a stop operation that does not follow the recommended procedure is performed, for example, by first stopping the right reel 301c, an unfavorable measure may be taken for the player, such as temporarily stopping the AT lottery.

  For example, when the winning combination is a winning combination corresponding to a push order small combination (in this example, a pressing order bell), the reel stop button 211 (individually, the reel stop button 211a, The appearance of stoppages is made different depending on the pressing order of 211b and 211c). Such a difference in the appearance of stoppage can be realized, for example, as follows. That is, as the winning combination corresponding to the “push order bell”, a plurality of types of winning combinations (specifically, “AT1” to “AT10” shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50) each associated with an appropriate pressing order. Correspondingly, when the winning combination is “AT1”, forward pressing (left / middle / right) is equivalent to “appropriate pressing order”), and each winning combination selected by internal lottery depends on different combinations The operation of multiple types of condition devices (corresponding to the small items shown in FIG. 50) is allowed. At this time, under the priority control (for example, “number priority control” or “symbol combination priority control”), the drawing pull-in control for stopping the reel 301 differs according to the pressing order of the reel stop button 211. By setting so as to be executed, it is possible to change the mode of the stop appearance based on the pushing order, and as a result, it is also possible to make a difference in the number of payouts.

  Here, the “number priority control” refers to a condition device that maximizes the number of payouts at the time of winning when a plurality of condition devices are allowed to operate. Is a pull-in control that pulls a symbol of a symbol combination corresponding to the condition device onto the effective line and stops it. In addition, “symbol combination priority control” gives priority to a condition device that maximizes the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed by “drawable symbols” when multiple condition devices are allowed to operate. In addition, it refers to pull-in control in which a symbol corresponding to the condition device is pulled onto the effective line and stopped.

  Specifically, for example, when “AT1” having a proper push as “appropriate push order” is selected as a winning combination, the condition devices that are allowed to operate are small items 1, small items 4, small items 6, small items 7, They are accessory 9, accessory 12, accessory 14, accessory 15, and accessory 17 (see FIG. 50). Here, when the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 is “appropriate pressing order (left / middle / right)”, the pull-in control is performed by the “number priority control”, and the “unsuitable pressing order” is performed. ", It is determined that the pull-in control by the" design combination number priority control "is performed. At this time, in the case of “appropriate pushing order”, the condition device (small item 17) with nine winning combinations having the largest payout number at the time of winning is given priority, and the symbol combination with nine winning combinations is drawn on the effective line. On the other hand, in the case of “inappropriate pushing order”, the condition device (one accessory 9, the accessory 12, the accessory 14, the accessory 15) having a larger number of symbol combinations that can be displayed than the accessory 17 or the condition of the two-player combination. The device (small item 1, small item 4, small item 6, small item 7) is prioritized, and the symbol combination of one or two sheets is drawn on the effective line. Thus, when “AT1” is selected as the winning combination, if the reel 301 is stopped in “appropriate pushing order”, the 9-piece winning combination is won, while the reel in “inappropriate pushing order”. When 301 is stopped, it is possible to win a winning combination (one winning combination, two winning combination) that is less than the nine winning combination.

  The symbols that can be drawn on the active line when the reel 301 is stopped are limited based on the position of the reel 301 when the reel stop button 211 is stopped (specifically, for example, a maximum of four frames). Depending on the timing of this stop operation (pushing timing), symbols that can be drawn and symbols that cannot be drawn are generated. As a result, the mode of the stop appearance differs depending on the push timing, and the priority of the condition device corresponding to the push timing is also set in advance.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1, when a winning combination associated with "appropriate pushing order" is won, the operation of a plurality of condition devices is allowed, and different priority control is performed with respect to the drawing pull-in control of the reel 301. When a game based on “appropriate push order” is performed, a privilege (for example, comparison) that is advantageous to the player than when a game based on “improper push order” is performed. It is possible to stop at a stoppage that can give out a large number of medals).

  Although not illustrated in FIGS. 49 to 53, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment may use, for example, push order replay as another push order small combination. Hereinafter, such push order replay will be briefly described. Strictly speaking, the replay combination is not a “pocket” because the gaming value is not paid out even if the corresponding symbol combination stops on the active line, but is included in the “push order small role” for convenience. . In addition, since the push order replay is one of the replay roles, any combination of replay roles on the effective line will always be used regardless of the push order or the push position at the time of winning. Will be stopped and a replay privilege will be granted.

  When the push order replay is used in the slot machine 1, similar to the push order bell described above, a plurality of winning combinations for the push order replay are prepared according to the number of push orders, and each push order replay is selected at the time of the win. A combination of a plurality of condition devices that are allowed to operate is prepared. Then, by setting priority control that stops the “specific symbol combination” when a stop operation is performed in a “specific push order” for a combination of these multiple condition devices, A special replay combination that “a specific symbol combination can be displayed when a stop operation is performed in the order of pressing” can be realized, and the “specific symbol combination” appears in the symbol display window 401 It is possible to make the stop appearance in the characteristic aspect. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined pressing order replay is won, only when a stop operation is performed in a “specific pressing order” of reverse pressing, “blue 7” is displayed on a predetermined line in the symbol display window 401. It is possible to make it possible to stop a “specific symbol combination” in which “symbol matching” is displayed.

  As an example of a method of using such a push order replay, when the above-mentioned “specific symbol combination (blue 7 symbols aligned in symbol display window 401)” appears, gaming benefits other than payout of gaming value (The game value is not paid out because it is a replay role). The granting of the game privilege specifically includes, for example, adding the number of AT games, shifting to an advantageous state, and the like. And in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when winning the push order replay and giving the above-mentioned game privilege, by instructing “a specific push order” based on the instruction function, A player can be notified of a gaming method that can stop the “combination”, and the gaming interest can be enhanced. If the above gaming benefits are not granted at the time of winning the push order replay, the stop operation is not performed in the “specific push order” (for example, a stop method other than the “specific push order” is instructed) Etc.) is preferable.

  The above is the outline of the push order small combination in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. In the following description, the AT game using the push order small role as described above is an example of a special game advantageous to the player, but the special game advantageous to the player in the slot machine 1 is an AT game. It is not limited, and other advantageous gaming states (for example, a bonus game, an ART game, or an RT game) may be used. In addition, the AT function is not limited to the AT function using the push order small combination, and for example, the bonus given based on the timing of the stop operation for the push position small combination (reel stop button 211 is changed. It may be an AT function or the like using a winning combination.

[10-1-1. Types of winning roles]
First, the lottery table shown in FIG. 49 will be described. In the slot machine 1, different lottery tables are prepared depending on the gaming state, and FIG. 49 shows a general state, a bonus internal state, and a bonus state as an example of the gaming state in the slot machine 1. Here, the general state is a normal gaming state in which the bonus game is not established and the bonus flag is not established. The bonus internal state is a gaming state in which a bonus (specifically, two types BB described later) is won by internal lottery, and the bonus winning establishment state is carried over without shifting to the bonus state. The bonus state is an advantageous game state in which a bonus (specifically, two types BB described later) is won by an internal lottery, and a transition is made based on the display of a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus. In FIG. 49, two types of BB (second type special bonus) are shown as bonuses. However, the bonuses that can be mounted on the slot machine 1 may be other types, so-called BB bonus, RB You may make it provide a bonus, a single bonus (SB), etc. In such a case, it is necessary to prepare a gaming state corresponding to each bonus, but a detailed description of each gaming state is omitted because it is the same as a general gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the winning probability (or number) for each winning combination is determined for each gaming state, and is prepared in advance corresponding to each gaming state. An internal lottery is performed using the lottery table. Then, in the slot machine 1, when a winning combination is won as a result of the internal lottery, a condition device corresponding to the winning combination is activated, and a symbol combination corresponding to the activated condition device is displayed on the effective line, which will be described later. A reel stop process is performed. When any winning combination is indicated by the symbol combination displayed on the active line, medals are paid out based on the winning combination. In the medal payout based on the winning combination, the medal payout number may be set to be different depending on the game state and the number of medals to be played (specified number). At this time, it is preferable to separately prepare a lottery table corresponding to the specified number.

  In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, since one condition device and a reel control pattern correspond one-to-one, when a plurality of reel control patterns are to be prepared for one winning combination In some cases, a plurality of conditions are satisfied for one winning combination (see FIG. 50 described later). By doing so, it is possible to prepare a plurality of patterns of stopping points (a combination of symbols displayed on the effective line) for one winning combination.

  The winning combination shown in FIG. 49 can be broadly divided into a bonus combination, a small combination, or a replay combination (re-playing combination). Here, “exclusion” is not strictly a winning combination. However, as in the case where the result of the internal lottery regarding the winning combination is each winning combination shown in FIG. 49, when the result of the internal lottery regarding the winning combination is “out of place”, based on the result ( In other words, since the subsequent internal processing is set (as if the winning combination of “out” is won), for the sake of convenience, “exclusion” may be included in the following description.

  Briefly describing each of them, the “bonus combination” is a combination that triggers the execution of the bonus game, and specifically, “Type 2 BB” corresponds to the bonus combination. The “replay role (replay role)” is a role that allows the next game to be executed without re-inserting medals (replay game), and specifically, “replay” corresponds to the replay role. The “small role” is a role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, specifically, “push order bell”, “push order unquestioned bell”, “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon” “Weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “weak chance”, “strong chance”, and “strongest” correspond to small roles. As described above, the winning combinations “AT1” to “AT10” shown in FIG. 49 may be collectively referred to as “push order bell”. The reason why the number of pushing-out bells is paid out in a plurality of ways is shown in FIG. On the other hand, the winning roles “Bell 1” and “Bell 2” are sometimes called “bells regardless of the pressing order”, and can be called the “pushing order unquestioned bell” as a general name because they can always stop the bell symbol. Details of each winning combination will be described later.

  Further, “out” means that no winning combination is selected as a result of the internal lottery regarding the winning combination. In the case of “out of”, the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped except when the established state of the bonus combination is carried over (that is, the bonus internal state). On the other hand, when the bonus internal state is “out of”, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination can be stopped. However, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the lottery table as shown in FIG. 49 is used, the above situation (“out of bonus” in the bonus internal state) is rarely generated (1 In addition, since the winning probability of “Type 2 BB” which is a bonus combination is extremely low (1/65535), the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and the opportunity to execute the bonus game is extremely high. Low, most gaming states are controlled to the general state or bonus internal state.

  According to FIG. 49, there is a possibility that “out” is selected in the general state (15453/65535), but there is almost no possibility that “out” is selected in the bonus internal state and the bonus state. (Each 1/65535). Furthermore, in the bonus state, the winning probability of the push order bell is set to be much lower than the other gaming states (1/65535), and instead of being hardly won, the win probability of the push order unrecognized bell is It is set high (32059/65535). In the push order unrecognized bell, nine sheets are paid out regardless of the push order, whereas when the push order bell is in an unsuitable push order, two or less sheets are paid out. Therefore, by assigning numbers in this way, when controlled in a bonus state (bonus game), it is possible to increase the player's hand-held medals almost without reduction.

  In addition, even if one of the winning combinations (bonus combination, replay combination, small combination) is won as a result of the internal lottery, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination executes the pull-in control described later. Stop operation (operation to push reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) at an appropriate timing (push position) aiming to stop within the symbol display window 524 (more strictly speaking, the effective lines 623a and 623b) as much as possible. Otherwise, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination cannot be displayed on the active line. Therefore, as a result of the lottery, if a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the active line even though one of the winning combinations is won, as in the case where “out” is selected, it will be described later. In step S6 of FIG. 54, it is determined that the game result is lost. In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the game result is lost despite winning a winning combination, the winning combination is not displayed at random. Control is performed so that a predetermined symbol combination (stop outcome) indicating that the winning based on the winning combination has been eliminated is displayed in the symbol display area. The symbol combination (stopping appearance) displayed at the time of the loss is hereinafter referred to as “zeroing (or zeroing)”.

  In the description of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the expression “bell zero (bell zero)” is used for “push order bell (AT1 to AT10)”. Bell zeroing means that when a winning bell is selected for each winning role, a stop operation is performed in an inappropriate pushing order, and the bells are aligned (strictly, 9 This means that the symbol combination (a combination of bells from which a payout is obtained) is not stopped, and another symbol combination is displayed such that the bell combination is eliminated. In the case of such bell zeroing, the bell zeroing point is displayed as a stop point, and a smaller amount of payout (including no payout) than the original bell alignment is performed. Specifically, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device numbers 1 to 32 in FIG. 51 is a bell-zero symbol combination, and at this time, one or two payout numbers are set. As described above, the “bell zero” is different from the “zero” at the time of losing.

  In addition, in the description related to the present embodiment, the expression “rose” (separated) may be used separately from the above “zero”. “Disjoint” is not a “uniform eye” that makes it easier for the player to recognize the characteristics of a stop appearance, but a stop appearance such as a combination of seemingly disjointed symbols (so-called “soaking eyes”). "Disseminated eyes"). That is, the “separated eyes” is one of the categories related to the display mode of the symbol combination, and even the separated eyes are not always lost, so that medals may be paid out.

[10-1-2. Winning form of winning role]
The winning combination illustrated in FIG. 49 is a winning combination (single combination) in which only one combination is selected in one lottery opportunity. When the single combination is won, the subsequent reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the condition device based on the winning combination. However, in the slot machine 1, a winning combination (simultaneous winning combination) in which a plurality of winning combinations are selected at the same time may be prepared. Such simultaneous winning means that a plurality of winning roles are simultaneously selected in one lottery opportunity, for example, when a plurality of small roles (for example, a plurality of bell roles) are simultaneously selected, A bonus combination and a small combination may be selected at the same time.

  When the simultaneous winning combination is selected by the internal lottery, the subsequent reel stop control is performed based on the simultaneous operation of the condition devices based on the respective winning combinations included in the simultaneous winning combination. In the reel stop control when winning the simultaneous winning combination, a predetermined priority order (for example, a priority order such as “replay> pocket> bonus” or “replay> bonus> pocket”). Accordingly, the reel stop process is performed while the display of the winning combination symbol combination is allowed, and a bonus according to the winning combination is paid out. Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the combination of small roles, or the setting method of the active line, control may be performed so that the simultaneous winning combination is won together. Awards are paid out according to the winning role. In any case, the small role is a “non-carry-over role” that can be won only in the winning game, and the winning status of the winning role that could not be won in the winning game will not be carried over after the next game. Even if the simultaneous winning of the winning combination is selected, the medal corresponding to the winning combination is not paid out to the winning combination that could not be won in the winning game.

  In addition, when a bonus combination and a small combination are won simultaneously, a combination selected in such a combination is also referred to as a duplicate combination. When a bonus combination and a small combination are simultaneously elected, the condition device corresponding to each winning combination is activated at the same time as in the case of the simultaneous winning of the small roles, and a predetermined priority order (for example, “ Reel stop processing is performed in accordance with the winning combination according to the winning combination symbol display according to the priority order (such as “Game> Small> Bonus” or “Replay> Bonus> Small”). Awards are paid out. However, for the bonus combination, even if the corresponding symbol combination is not displayed in the winning game as described above, the winning combination state of the bonus combination is carried over until the bonus combination is displayed after the next game. It can be a “carry-over”. Specifically, the type 2 BB is a “carry-over”. Further, the replay role and the small role (for example, the bell role) are “non-carry-over roles”. In this way, when a “carry-over combination” and a “non-carry-over combination” are simultaneously selected by winning a duplicate combination, which symbol combination is allowed to be displayed is controlled by the reel stop process. When the symbol combination corresponding to “carry-over combination” is not displayed in the winning game, the winning establishment state of “carry-over combination” is carried over after the next game. However, in such a “next game”, when winning another small role, both the “carry-over” and “other small role” will be in the winning state. Since they are selected at different lottery opportunities (games), they do not correspond to duplicate roles.

  Note that, in the case of simultaneous winning, it is determined based on the priority setting in the reel stop process which combination of symbols corresponding to which winning combination is to be displayed on the active line.

  Hereinafter, the winning combinations roughly classified as described above will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 50 to 53.

[10-1-3. Bonus role]
The winning combination “Type 2 BB” shown in FIG. 49 is a bonus combination related to the second type special combination. When the bonus combination is selected as a winning combination, the corresponding condition device “BB1” is activated, a reel stop process is performed, and a privilege is given based on the displayed symbol combination. Specifically, a symbol combination (a group of “red 7”) corresponding to the condition device “BB1” is displayed on the active line, whereby a two-type BB bonus game (BB game) is executed. This bonus game is a game in which a player has an opportunity to concentrate and acquire medals over a plurality of games. In this embodiment, for example, the prescribed number of games is set to two and is shown in the bonus state of FIG. The bonus game is advanced using the drawn lottery table. The bonus game ends when the number of bonus games exceeds a specified upper limit (for example, 30 games) or when the cumulative number of payouts in the bonus game exceeds a specified number (for example, 200). When the bonus game ends, the gaming state shifts from the bonus state to the general state.

  Here, the symbol combination corresponding to “Type 2 BB” (a group of “Red 7”) is an arrangement that cannot necessarily be drawn on the effective line depending on the timing of the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 (see FIG. 46). However, “Type 2 BB” is a carry-over role that can carry over the winning flag, and even if the “Red 7” matching, which is the corresponding symbol combination in the winning game, is not displayed (not aligned), the next game or later Until the winning establishment state is carried over and the symbol combination is stopped, the game is played as a bonus internal state.

  When the bonus internal state is controlled, if a replay combination or small combination is won as a result of the internal lottery, a winning combination that can be displayed is determined according to a predetermined priority order. Specifically, it is assumed that the priority is “replay (replay role)> small role> bonus”. At this time, even if the established state of 2 types BB is maintained as the bonus internal state, The opportunity to display the symbol combination is limited to the case where neither the replay role nor the small role is won in the internal lottery (that is, a loss). However, as described above, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the ratio of deviation in the internal lottery in the bonus internal state is set to be extremely small (1/65535). Therefore, in most games, there is no opportunity to display the two types of BB symbol combinations, and the gaming state is controlled to the general state or the bonus internal state.

[10-1-4. Replay role]
The winning combination “replay” shown in FIG. 49 is a winning combination of replay (replaying combination). At the time of winning the replay role, the replay condition device (replay 1 when referring to FIG. 50) is activated, and the active line (one of the lines 623a and 623b) is allowed to stop displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role. Based on this, a reel stop process (step S5 in FIG. 54) described later is performed. In the slot machine 1, when the replay is won, it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay is always displayed on the active line, so that it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay is complete. Then, in the next game, a bet is made again without inserting a medal or a betting operation (an operation for inserting a stored medal), and a replay in which a game similar to the previous game is executed again is possible. Even if the replay symbol combination is displayed on the active line, a medal as a prize is not paid out.

  A feature of the game privilege of this replay game is that it is not necessary to spend a new medal (add a new medal) in the next game instead of not paying out a medal. In addition, since replay is a winning combination that does not involve paying out medals, even if the winning frequency is increased by increasing the winning probability, for example, there is little penalty for the hole. Therefore, the slot machine 1 has a probability of winning about once every 6 to 7 times in the normal state (general state). As a result, the amount of medals consumed by the player (the number of medals consumed per fixed time) can be kept within a certain range to some extent. In other words, the winning role of replay can be given a role of suppressing excessive medal consumption in the game progression.

  In addition, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination are uniformly arranged on each reel 301a, 301b, 301c (for example, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination are also used for the replay combination. By changing the number of other symbols (the symbols not constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role) arranged between the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to one to a maximum of four), It is possible to make it possible to align the pattern combination corresponding to the replay combination without the need for pressing. In such a case, if the priority order of the winning combination displayed is “replay (replay role)> small role> bonus”, the replay role condition device and other roles (small role and bonus role) Even if the condition device is activated at the same time, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is always stopped and displayed, and the symbol combinations corresponding to other combinations are not stopped and displayed.

[10-1-5. Bell role]
Next, the bell role as a winning combination will be described. This bell role is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals when winning. In this embodiment, several types of bell roles are prepared, and an example thereof will be specifically described below.

[10-1-5-1. Push order unquestionable bell]
First, a push order unquestionable bell (common bell) in which the winning degree at the time of winning (the winning rate and the number of medals paid out based on the winning) does not change depending on the pushing order of the reel 301 will be described.

  The specific winning combination of the “no push order bell” shown in FIG. 49 is “Bell 1” and “Bell 2” shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 50, when “Bell 1” is selected as the winning combination, the condition device for the small items 17 operates, and when “Bell 2” is selected as the winning combination, the small items 17 and 18 The condition device is activated. Here, the condition device for the accessory 17 and the accessory 18 is configured such that any corresponding symbol combination can always stop on the effective line regardless of the pushing order and pushing timing of the reels (see FIG. 51 and the like). . Therefore, when such a condition device is activated, regardless of the stop order and stop timing of the reel stop button 211 by the player, the symbol combination of the bell combination is stopped and displayed to win the bell combination. A medal payout (9 cards) according to is given as a privilege.

  Referring to FIG. 49, in the general state and the bonus internal state, the winning probabilities of “Bell 1” and “Bell 2” are relatively low and can be included in the “low winning combination (rare combination)” described later. On the other hand, in the bonus state, “Bell 1” or “Bell 2” is won with a probability of about 50%, which is one of the main winning combinations in the bonus game.

  It should be noted that “Bell 1” and “Bell 2” are distinguished from each other according to the degree of expectation for the privilege that can be given at the time of each winning. The privilege may be, for example, an expectation level related to AT (such as an AT win or a win probability related to an AT game), or an expectation level regarding a transition between gaming states such as a low probability state or a high probability state. Specifically, “Bell 2” having a lower winning probability is set as a strong bell, and “Bell 1” having a higher winning probability than “Bell 2” is set as a weak bell.

[10-1-5-2. Push order bell]
Next, a description will be given of a push order bell in which the winning degree at the time of winning (the winning rate and the number of medals to be paid out based on the win) can be changed depending on the pushing order of the reel 301.

  The winning combinations “AT1” to “AT10” shown in FIG. 49 are push-bell winning combinations that are prepared mainly to be able to reliably give a privilege to a player mainly in an AT game. Each of “AT1” to “AT10” is associated with any one of five proper pressing orders (see FIG. 50).

  In FIG. 49, the winning probabilities of “AT1” to “AT10” are equal to each other, and when they are added, the winning probability of “push order bell” is 32000/65535, but “AT1” to “AT10” Each winning probability may be arbitrarily distributed under the condition that satisfies the above total value. In this way, the winning probabilities can be equally distributed for each of the five appropriate push orders (forward push, pinch push, middle push, reverse push, reverse pinch push) in the “push order bell” (each win probability of the 5 choice bells). It is possible to make it difficult to select a specific pressing order in an appropriate pressing order. Specifically, for example, each winning probability of “AT1” to “AT4” in which the left reel 301a is selected as the first stop reel as an appropriate pressing order is 2000/65535, and other than the left reel 301a (middle) as an appropriate pressing order If each winning probability of “AT5” to “AT10” in which the reel 301b or the right reel 301c) is selected as the first stop reel is 4000/65535, the left reel 301a is pushed as the first stop reel in the proper pushing order. The winning ratio of the order bell can be made much lower than the winning ratio of the push order bell with the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c as the first stop reel in the proper push order. In such a case, in a normal game in which it is recommended to stop the left reel 301a for the first time, it is possible to suppress the percentage of winning the push order bell, and to reduce the payout rate in the normal game. It is also possible to increase the payout rate in the special game.

  As shown in FIG. 50, when "AT1" to "AT10" are selected as winning combinations, a plurality of condition devices among the small items 1 to 16, the condition device for the small items 17, and the small items 24 to 26 Of these, 0 to 2 condition devices operate simultaneously. The symbol combinations and the like corresponding to the respective condition devices are as shown in FIGS. Each of the accessories 1 to 16 is a condition device corresponding to a symbol combination of “bell elimination” (one or two payouts). This is a condition device corresponding to (dispensing). In addition, the accessories 24 to 26 are originally condition devices for weak chances and strong chances, which will be described later, and even if they are activated at the time of winning the push order bell, the priority is higher than that of other condition devices that have been activated. The symbol combination corresponding to the accessory 24 to the accessory 26 is not actually stopped.

  For these multiple condition devices that operate simultaneously, different priority controls are set for the drawing pull-in control based on the pressing order of the reel stop button 211 (individually, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) in the player's stop operation. Thus, it is possible to display different stop outcomes depending on the proper push order and the push order that is not so (unsuitable push order). That is, while the stop operation for the reel stop button 211 is performed in an appropriate pressing order corresponding to the winning combination (for example, a forward pressing in the case of AT1), the accessory 17 is changed to the accessory 17 based on the above “number priority control”. If the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and the stop operation is performed in an appropriate pushing order until the end, the symbol combination of the bell role is stopped on the active line and nine medal payouts can be given as a privilege. it can. On the other hand, when the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 is performed in an inappropriate pressing order, the symbol combinations corresponding to the condition devices other than the accessory 17 are stopped based on the above “symbol combination number priority control”. Thus, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of the accessory 17 is prevented from being stopped on the effective line, and the symbol combination of the bell zero is stopped on the effective line. (Medal payout).

  According to FIG. 50, “AT1” and “AT2” are the winning combinations of the push order small combinations in which the proper push order is the proper push order, and “AT3” and “AT4” are the push orders in the proper push order. “AT5” and “AT6” are the winning roles of the push order miniatures with the middle press as the appropriate pressing order, and “AT7” and “AT8” are the reverse presses. “AT9” and “AT10” are the winning combinations of the push order small combinations with the reverse pinching push as the proper push order. Therefore, in the case of using FIG. 50, the “push order bell” in the present embodiment is the so-called “5” in which the proper push order is divided into five ways (forward push, pinch push, middle push, reverse push, reverse push push). It becomes "selection bell". Of course, such an appropriate pushing order can be set freely within a predetermined limit at the design stage of the gaming machine. For example, even in the case of a three-option bell based only on the first stop reel. Alternatively, a 6-option bell based on the first stop reel and the second stop reel may be used.

  As described above, the push order bells “AT1” to “AT10” are winning combinations that can receive nine medals as if they won the Bell role only when the stop operation is performed in the proper push order. Yes, if the stop operation is performed in an inappropriate push order, the winning combination will be given as “Bell Zero” with fewer benefits (one or two medal payouts) than when winning the Bell role .

  Here, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, it is recommended that the left push (forward push or pinch push) be performed in the non-AT state that is not the AT state. Therefore, when a game according to the recommended procedure is performed in a non-AT state, a push order bell (specifically, AT5 to AT10) having an appropriate push order other than the left push (forward push or pinch push) is won. But I can't win the bell role. However, in the AT state, an appropriate pushing order is taught, and a stop operation according to the teaching content is allowed, so that it is possible to easily win a bell role when winning the pushing order bell. In addition, when a player performs a stop operation different from the recommended procedure and gets a medal illegally during non-AT, an overall lottery will be paid out by taking measures such as temporarily stopping the AT lottery. The expected value may be adjusted appropriately.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, it is not necessary to recommend a specific pressing order as described above. For example, except when instructed by an instruction function such as during AT, when a specific pressing order is not a recommended procedure, a player may perform a stop operation in an arbitrary pressing order. Because there is no recommended procedure, the adjustment (when measures such as temporary suspension of AT lottery) as described above are performed is not necessary. Become. In the case where a specific pressing order is not a recommended procedure, it is desirable that the winning probabilities for each pressing order in the pressing order small combination are the same. By making the winning probabilities the same for each push order, the expected value of the ball can be equalized regardless of the push order, so that the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind in the preferred push order. it can.

[10-1-6. Cherry role]
Next, the cherry role as a winning combination will be described. This cherry role is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals (2) when winning. In this embodiment, two types of cherry roles are prepared: weak cherry and strong cherry. The weak cherries and the strong cherries are provided with a difference between strength and weakness mainly in the degree of expectation related to AT (AT winning, winning probability related to AT game, etc.) (details will be described later in the explanation regarding AT).

  As shown in FIG. 50, when “weak cherry” is won, the condition devices 19 and 20 are activated, and when “strong cherry” is won, the condition devices 19 to 21 are activated (each condition device). (Refer to FIG. 52 for symbol combinations corresponding to). The detailed description of the operation of the condition device when each winning combination is selected is omitted, but if the symbol combination based on the accessory 19 and the accessory 20 is stopped and displayed on the active line, the weak cherry or strong When it is found that one of the cherries has been won and the symbol combination based on the accessory 21 is stopped and displayed on the active line, it is understood that the strong cherry has been won.

[10-1-7. Watermelon role]
Next, the watermelon role as a winning combination will be described. This watermelon role is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals (5) when winning. In the present embodiment, two types of watermelon roles, a weak watermelon and a strong watermelon, are prepared. The weak watermelon and the strong watermelon are provided with a difference in strength mainly by the degree of expectation regarding AT (AT winning, winning probability regarding AT game, etc.) (details will be described later in the description regarding AT).

  As shown in FIG. 50, when the “weak watermelon” is selected, the condition device for the accessory 22 is activated, and when the “strong watermelon” is selected, the condition devices for the accessory 22 and the accessory 23 are activated (corresponding to each condition device). See Fig. 53 for symbol combinations. The detailed explanation of the operation of the condition device when each winning combination is selected is omitted, but when the symbol combination based on the accessory 22 is stopped on the active line, either the weak watermelon or the strong watermelon is selected. When it is known that the crab has been won and the symbol combination based on the accessory 23 is stopped and displayed on the active line, it is understood that the strong watermelon has been won. Supplementally, when a weak watermelon is elected, there is a possibility that the watermelon symbols will be aligned and stopped on the right rising line or the right descending line. is there.

[10-1-8. Chance role]
Next, the chance combination as a winning combination will be described. This chance combination is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out a single medal when winning. In the present embodiment, two types of chance combination of a weak chance and a strong chance are prepared. There is a difference between strength and weakness between the weak chance and the strong chance mainly in the degree of expectation related to AT (AT winning, winning probability related to AT game, etc.) (details will be described later in the description of AT).

  As shown in FIG. 50, when the “weak chance” wins, the condition device for the accessory 24 is activated, and when the “strong chance” is won, the condition devices for the accessory 25 and the accessory 26 operate (for each condition device). (See FIG. 53 for the corresponding symbol combinations). The detailed explanation of the operation of the condition device when each winning combination is selected is omitted, but if the symbol combination based on the accessory 24 is stopped and displayed on the active line, the player has won a weak chance. When the symbol combination based on the accessory 25 and the accessory 26 is stopped and displayed on the active line, it is understood that the player has won a strong chance.

[10-1-9. The strongest]
Next, the strongest point as a winning combination will be described. The strongest is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out one medal when winning. As shown in FIG. 50, when the “strongest” is won, the condition device for the accessory 27 is activated. The symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of the accessory 27 cannot be stopped unless the reel stop button 211 is operated at an appropriate pressing timing due to the arrangement of the constituent symbols. When winning, "Positive" symbols are displayed together on the middle line.

  The strongest winning probability is set to a very low probability of 1/65535 (see FIG. 49) in any gaming state, and can be positioned as a so-called premier role. When winning such a premier role, freeze control may be added during the rotation control of the reel 301, and as a result, the player can easily grasp that he has won a special winning role. , Can increase the interest of the player.

  The above is a combination mode of each winning combination in the slot machine 1 and a symbol corresponding to each winning combination.

  These symbols are not limited to the symbols and symbol combinations described above. In addition to the above symbols, a plurality of types of symbols can be newly provided. In addition, the number of winning combinations can be further increased or decreased. Furthermore, the winning combinations described above are not necessarily provided all, and a necessary type of winning combination may be selected as appropriate.

  For example, a duplicate winning combination of a bonus combination and a small combination (or replay combination) may be set. Which combination of symbols is preferentially displayed on the active line when such a winning combination is won is controlled by a reel stop process.

  Further, instead of the push order small combination prepared for the AT game, a push position small combination may be prepared. Although a detailed description is omitted, the push position small combination means when the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 is performed at an appropriate stop timing (press position) and when it is performed at an inappropriate stop timing. It is a small role that shows different winning modes. When such a push position small role is installed, in an AT game, a teaching or notification that allows a player to easily recognize an appropriate push position is performed, so that when the push position small role is won, The player can easily win the corresponding role and can acquire many medals.

  The player of the slot machine 1 is based on the lottery probability of the winning combination (FIG. 47), the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination and the number of payouts (FIGS. 51 to 53), the arrangement of symbols (FIG. 46), and the like. In some cases, it is possible to find a gaming method in which the maximum payout can be expected in a situation where the winning combination selected by the internal lottery cannot be known. Hereinafter, such a game method is temporarily referred to as “maximum efficiency hitting method”. When playing a game with maximum efficiency, depending on the stop position of the reel, it is difficult to draw the combination of symbols with the most payouts corresponding to the winning combination on the effective line (watermelon role, cherry role) , Chances of winning, etc.) were stopped by pressing one of the reel stop buttons 211 at a specific timing so as to achieve the maximum payout in consideration of the winning probability and the number of payouts. By pressing the remaining reel stop button 211 at an appropriate timing according to the symbol form, a symbol combination corresponding to a plurality of types of winning combinations can be drawn and a large number of payouts are obtained. In other words, the maximum-efficiency hitting method can be said to be a gaming method that suppresses the missed winning combination as much as possible.

[11. Game processing]
Next, the flow of game processing in the slot machine 1 will be described. The following game processing proceeds in accordance with a processing procedure on a control program executed on the main board 409 (mainly CPU 1110 or the like).

  FIG. 54 shows one processing sequence for one basic game in the slot machine 1. First, in step S1, initial setting for preparing for the game start is executed. Especially when starting up the power supply, etc., check the connection and operation status of the various devices mentioned above, check the existence of backup data, and if backup data exists, return to the state before the power was turned off. Execute. When backup data does not exist, a predetermined process such as setting a predetermined initial value is executed.

  In the next step S2, the number of bets is determined by the number of medals inserted from the insertion slot 203, or when there are already stored medals, by pressing the MAX insertion button 206 (or the single insertion button 205). Thus, the operation of the start lever 210 is awaited. That is, the number of bets for one game is determined and the BET process is executed until the start lever 210 can be operated. Note that when the slot machine 1 is a three-sheet dedicated machine that can execute a game by inserting three medals, the one-sheet insertion button 205 may not be provided.

  In step S3, the game is started by operating the start lever 210 which has been in an operation waiting state in step S2, and an internal lottery process is performed to determine whether or not any winning combination is a result of the internal lottery. Run. This internal lottery process is either in the stage before all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c that start rotating in the subsequent step S4 are in a stopped state (stopped by a player's stop operation). This is executed to determine whether the winning combination is to be the lottery result of the game. That is, only when the lottery result of this lottery corresponds to any winning combination, when the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is on the active line. It is allowed to stop.

  Next, in step S31, instruction function processing is performed as processing related to the AT instruction function (so-called AT navigation). In the instruction function process, not only the AT game win and its start are determined, but also the precursor effect that suggests or teaches whether or not the AT game is started, and the transition to the precursor game in which the precursor effect is executed. Etc. are determined, and if the AT game is in progress, AT navigation is performed to teach the player the order of pressing. Details of the instruction function processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the instruction function processing of this example, central control related to AT functions including AT game precursors (AT winning lottery, determination of the number of AT games, execution of AT games, transition of gaming state, display of instruction functions, etc.) All are managed by the main board 409. On the other hand, auxiliary control related to the AT function (such as navigation display on the image display body 500) is managed by the sub-board 510. Even in such a case, the navigation that the sub-board 510 displays on the image display body 500 or the like. The display content of the display is limited to that according to the determination result of the instruction function by the main board 409 (content not different from the instruction function display). In the slot machine 1, the instruction content by the instruction function (which may be read as the display contents of the instruction function display) is determined by the main board 409 based on the winning combination in the game. Further, the display contents of the instruction function display controlled by the main board 409 and displayed on the special display LED 612 and the display contents of the navigation display controlled by the sub board 510 and displayed on the image display body 500 and the like are a pair. It is not limited to one correspondence relationship, and may be a one-to-n correspondence relationship (plural patterns). That is, when some instruction function display is performed on the special display LED 612 by the main board 409, the sub board 510 performs navigation display in a display mode corresponding to the instruction function display for the navigation display on the image display body 500 or the like. The specific display mode of the navigation display need not be limited to one type, and the navigation display may be performed in any one of a plurality of display modes corresponding to the instruction function display. Good. In such a case, the sub-board 510 may determine which display mode is used for navigation display, or the main board 409 may specify. Further, the slot machine 1 is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, the main board 409 may perform all processing related to instruction function processing.

  Further, in the instruction function process of step S31 shown in this example, the processing content related to the AT instruction function is determined based on the result of the internal lottery process in step S3. Further, it is preferable that the instruction function process is ended before the reel rotation process in step S4 described in the next stage is started.

  Next, in step S4, a reel rotation process for starting rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is executed with the end of the internal lottery process in step S3. In this reel rotation process, when all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c start to rotate, the depressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is validated, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are validated. An operation valid lamp (not shown) for notifying that is turned on, and a timer count is started until the next reel rotation processing is executed. The operation valid lamp is a lamp built in each of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c.

  In step S5, a reel stop process in which the player presses the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is accepted, the operation valid lamps are turned off in the order of acceptance, and rotation of the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is stopped. Execute.

  In the next step S6, when it is determined in step S5 that all the lines 301a to 301c are in a stopped state, the winning combination symbols are aligned on the “active line” (the symbol corresponding to any winning combination). Based on whether the combination mode is displayed), a determination process for determining the winning combination is executed. Specifically, by collating “display content displayed on the effective line (pattern combination mode)” and “symbol combination allowed to stop on the effective line corresponding to the winning combination” Judge the winning role. In addition, the determination process in step S6 may be determined based only on “display contents (design combination) displayed on the effective line”. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a line ("downward line 623a") on which "bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol" shown in FIG. 47 and "BAR symbol-replay symbol-definition" are displayed. Two lines of the line displaying the “design” (upward right line 623b) are defined as “effective lines”.

  In step S7, a medal payout process based on the content of the gaming privilege corresponding to the winning combination determined in step 6 is executed. In addition, when the winning combination determined in step S6 is a winning combination that involves a change in the gaming state as in the case of 2 types BB, a change in the gaming state (a change in the gaming state shown in FIG. 49) and a replay The execution of various game privileges is executed by the above.

  The above is the basic one game processing procedure of the slot machine 1. Here, step S2 (BET process) to step S4 (reel rotation process) are internal processes triggered by a series of external operations (starting operations) performed by the player. Therefore, these processes (step S2, step S3, step S31, step S4) are collectively referred to as a start process. Hereinafter, this starting process will be described in detail.

[11-1. Start processing]
FIG. 55 specifically shows each process performed in the starting process.

  In the starting process, first, in step S101, the operation of the medal insertion or one-sheet insertion button 205 and the MAX insertion button 206 is awaited. If there is a MAX bet operation or a medal insertion, the determination at step S101 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S102. This determination is made by inserting medals corresponding to a MAX bet (that is, three or more medals are inserted in the case of a specified number of three games, and two or more medals are inserted in the case of a two specified number of games). It is assumed that it is satisfied only when there is an operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 or the MAX insertion button 206 that becomes a MAX bet.

  In the next step S102, as the acceptance process, the bet number (in this example, only the MAX bet) is determined, and the active line lamp corresponding to the bet number is turned on. In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, for example, when three medals are inserted when the prescribed number is three, two lines, a right rising line 623b and a right falling line 623a, become effective lines. Turn on the effective line lamp.

  In step S103, the operation of the start lever 210 is validated. When the operation of the start lever 210 is validated, the operation waits until the operation of the start lever 210 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S104.

  In the next step S104, it is determined whether the operation of the start lever 210 has been validated, and in that case, the operation of the start lever 210 has been accepted. When the operation of the start lever 210 is validated in the previous step S103, when the operation of the start lever 210 by the player is accepted, this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S105.

  Further, the determination in step S101 is not satisfied and the process proceeds to step S104 as long as the player does not perform a bet operation or medal insertion in step S101 or does not result in a MAX bet. At this time, the determination in step S104 is not satisfied, the process returns to step S101, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  In the replay game, no new medal bet is required. This is automatically set to the MAX bet state when the MAX bet command is stored in the RAM 1114 in the replay game process described later. Thereby, the determination in step S101 is satisfied.

  In step S105, in response to the operation of the start lever 210 in step S104, the operation of the start lever 210 is invalidated.

  Next, in step S106, when the start lever 210 is operated, rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started, and a random number is extracted based on the operation of the start lever 210. After the random number is extracted, the process proceeds to the next step S107. Note that the timing for extracting the random number at this time may be performed immediately after the start lever 210 is operated, or may be performed after a predetermined time (for example, after 0.5 seconds), for example, in the programming process. Appropriate extraction timing can be set.

  In step S107, a winning determination (matching of the random number value) of which winning combination corresponds to the extracted random number value (hereinafter referred to as the extracted random number value) is performed. In this hit determination, the extracted random number values are collated in a hit value determination table described later. The collation of the random number performed here is to determine whether or not the extracted random number value corresponds (matches or matches) to a predetermined winning combination random number value. At this time, if it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any winning combination, the condition device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is turned ON (= 1) (see FIG. 50). In addition, the winning probability for each winning combination in the winning determination performed by comparing the extracted random number value with the winning determination table is as shown in FIG.

  Then, in the flag process, when determining the winning value determination table as a determination reference when collating the extracted random number value in the game, refer to a game state flag such as a BB game flag to be described later. A winning value determination table (lottery table) in the game is determined. That is, a winning value determination table corresponding to a game state flag (game state flag) that is ON (= 1) in the game is set, and the extracted random number value is collated. Assume that the game state flags are prepared according to the game state, for example, a general state flag, a bonus internal flag, and a bonus flag. When both the bonus internal flag and the bonus flag are in the OFF (= 0) state, the general state flag is always in the ON (= 1) state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the extracted random number value does not correspond to any winning combination, it becomes “losing” that does not correspond to any winning combination, and neither condition device is operated (see FIG. 50). ). Here, when any of the condition devices is ON (actuated / established), it is possible to arrange the symbol combinations corresponding to the established condition devices. The symbol combinations corresponding to each condition device are as shown in FIGS. Therefore, in the case of a loss in which none of the condition devices is established, the symbol combinations corresponding to any winning combination cannot be aligned on the effective line. Steps S106 and S107 described above are performed by random number lottery inside the slot machine 1. Hereinafter, these steps are collectively referred to as internal lottery or internal lottery. Note that the process from extraction of the random number to flag processing corresponds to internal lottery (step S3 in FIG. 54 described above).

  As described above with reference to FIG. 54, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction function process shown in step S31 is performed. Although not shown in FIG. 55, this instruction function process may be executed as part of the flag process in step S107 in FIG. 55, or after the flag process in step S107 is completed, step S108 is performed. The wait timer time-up may be executed until time-out.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a group of condition devices that are allowed to operate based on the winning combination at the predetermined timing when the flag process or the instruction function process is executed, the instruction contents of the instruction function to be generated, etc. At least a part of the information determined on the main board 409 side is notified from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) by command communication (corresponding to “instruction information command” described later). It should be noted that the command for notifying these pieces of information may be a command compiled as appropriate.

  Further, a command transmitted from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) as a result of performing the instruction function process in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can adopt the following command mode. . In other words, the winning roles are grouped based on their type (bell role, replay role, rare role, etc.) and push order (forward press, middle press, push order unquestioned, etc.), and the winning role selected by internal lottery On the other hand, a command can be transmitted from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) in a form in which the group including the winning combination can be identified. Note that the classification criteria for grouping the winning combinations is not limited to the above example, and can be arbitrarily set. For example, when the presence / absence of the push order is added to the classification criteria, all the bell roles (AT1 to AT10) included in the push order bell are grouped into one group, and the bell roles (Bell 1, Bell 2) included in the push order unquestioned bell ) In different groups, the bell role can be divided into groups according to the push order. At this time, the bell role is divided into a push order bell group and a push order unquestionable bell group. The same applies to the replay combination. For example, the replay combination may be divided into a push order replay group and a normal replay group (the push order is unquestioned). Further, all winning combinations may be grouped only by the presence / absence of the pressing order. In such a case, all winning combinations can be divided into a group having a pressing order or a group having no pressing order. Further, instead of grouping the winning combination, condition devices based on the winning combination may be grouped. Hereinafter, a command for notifying such a grouped winning combination will be described in more detail.

  First, for the command transmission for notifying the grouped winning combination, when the instruction function display is executed, the command that can understand all the breakdowns of the grouped winning combination (a command capable of so-called “complete navigation”). May be transmitted. At this time, since the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize information such as what type of winning combination is selected and what push order, the reel stop method is advantageous for the player. Navigation display (so-called “complete navigation”) can be displayed.

  In addition, when the instruction function display is executed for the command transmission for notifying the grouped winning combination, a command that can partially understand the breakdown of the grouped winning combination (for example, only the first stop can be taught). "Partial navigation") may be transmitted. At this time, since the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize a part of information regarding the selected winning combination, a navigation display (for example, only the first stop) that can partially teach a reel stop method advantageous to the player. So-called “partial navigation” can be displayed.

  In addition, regarding the command transmission for notifying the grouped winning combination, if the instruction function display is not executed, a command that does not know the breakdown of the grouped winning combination may be transmitted. At this time, the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize, based on the group indicated by the command, that the selected winning combination is a winning combination included in the group and whether or not the instruction function display can be executed. , Can not recognize any more information. For example, although it can be seen that the winning combination is one of the push order bells, the proper pushing order and the specific breakdown of the winning combination (from “AT1” to “AT10”) It can be recognized to the extent that it does not understand. Note that a command for notifying the grouped winning combination when such instruction function display is not executed may be considered as a “conditional device command” described later with reference to FIG. 60 and the like.

  Furthermore, when the instruction function display is executed, the small roles to be grouped do not need to be limited to the push order bell, but are grouped by including other roles (for example, push order bell and push order replay). You may do it. In other words, in this case, even if the push order bell is selected as the winning combination or the push order replay is selected, if the proper push order is the same, a command indicating the same group is transmitted. Means. Further, even when the instruction function display is not executed, it is not necessary to limit the small roles to be grouped to the push order bell, and to include other roles (for example, push order bell and push order replay) to group them. However, in such a case, the type of winning combination (whether replay or bell) cannot be determined on the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) that has received the command, and the indication function display is Since the winning combination cannot be taught in an unrelated state (for example, when the instruction function is not executed, the replay navigation indicating that the replay is won cannot be displayed on the image display body 500), the push order bell It is desirable to send a command by grouping for each type of push order small role, such as separate and push order replay.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can reduce the capacity consumed by the main board 409 by transmitting a command notifying the grouped winning combinations in this way, and the peripheral board side can independently determine the winning combination and its winning combination. Judgment of the pressing order can be suppressed.

  In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the wait timer started in the previous start process (specifically, the game immediately before the game) has expired (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed). The timer called a wait timer measures the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from the start of reel rotation in the game to the start of reel rotation in the next game. Is. Here, if the wait timer is timed up (4.1 seconds have already elapsed), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S109. This determination loops until the wait timer times out.

  In step S109, rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started. When the rotation speeds of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c become constant, the operation enable lamps of the respective reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are turned on. By this lighting, the player knows that the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c has become effective.

  In the slot machine 1, the reel that has started to rotate continues to maintain the rotation at the above-described constant speed until a stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) by the player is accepted. .

  Next, in step S110, the wait timer is reset, and the wait timer is started until the next start process, and the start process ends.

[11-2. Internal lottery probability]
As described above, in the slot machine 1, the result of the internal lottery (the result of collating the extracted random number value) is allowed as a winning combination corresponding to the game (hereinafter referred to as a corresponding winning combination). If the winning combination is permitted, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination is activated, and the information of the activated condition device is processed as an information command indicating the result of the internal lottery (reel stop processing, Determination processing, payout processing, etc.).

  In the slot machine 1, a random value range (this is called an extraction range) for random number extraction is determined in advance. This extraction range can be determined, for example, as an integer value from 0 to 16383 (that is, 2 14 = 16384 random numbers). In the first embodiment, the random number value in the extraction range is 1 to 65535 for convenience, but it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this. If this random number extraction range is expanded, the range of random values that can be extracted (so-called denominator) is increased, so that it is difficult to cause an event that specific random values are extracted in a biased manner.

  Within the above extraction range, random numbers corresponding to each winning combination are assigned in advance. For example, if the random value in the extraction range (from “1” to “65535” in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment) corresponding to the winning combination “Type 2 BB” is set to “1”. When the extracted random number value is “1”, the result of the internal lottery is “Two kinds of BBs have been won”, and BB1, which is a condition device of the two kinds BB, is processed as an information command in the game. Will be. In addition, if this is used, the winning probability of the two types BB (probability that the two types BB will be selected as a result of the internal lottery, the lottery probability) can be calculated from the random range corresponding to the extraction range and the two types BB. . In the example of FIG. 49, the winning probability of type 2 BB in the general state is [total number of random values corresponding to type 2 BB / total number of random values in the extraction range] of 6553/65535. The winning probability of seed BB is about 1/10.

  In this way, random numbers corresponding to all winning combinations are determined, and these random values are referred to as winning values corresponding to the respective winning combinations. In the above example (type 2 BB), the random value “1” in the extraction range is a winning value corresponding to type 2 BB. In addition, when there are a plurality of winning values, for example, if the winning value of a predetermined role is set to consecutive random values “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” within the extraction range, The range of values is a random value “1” to “4”. When it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any one of the random number values “1” to “4” (verified), the result of the internal lottery is “winning a predetermined role”. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, a single role (for example, two types BB, cherry, replay, etc.) for winning only one winning combination is prepared. As described above, in addition to such a single role, a simultaneous winning combination in which a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously selected (including a “double role” in which a bonus combination and a small combination are simultaneously selected) may be prepared. And when preparing such a duplicate combination, the winning value of the overlapping combination is also included in the above winning value.

  From this, the range of winning values for all winning combinations is determined, and it is determined whether or not the extracted random number value falls within the range of winning values of any winning combination by internal lottery. At this time, if the extracted random number value does not fall within the range of the winning value of any winning combination, it is lost. In other words, the range of the winning value of the lost game is other than the range of the winning value of all winning combinations. Note that the winning value may be referred to as a winning allowable value.

  By the way, the single winning combination corresponds to one winning combination for one extracted random value, and the simultaneous winning combination is a plurality (for example, two) winning combinations for one extracted random value. Corresponds. In other words, if the extracted random number value corresponds to the winning value of the simultaneous winning combination, it means that any of the plurality of winning combinations has been won. At this time, condition devices corresponding to each of the winning combinations of a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously established (operation is allowed). However, even if a plurality of condition devices corresponding to each winning combination are established at the same time, since the priority of the condition device for the simultaneous winning combination is set, in fact, all the symbol combinations corresponding to the established condition device are all It is not always possible to stop on the active line. For example, if a replay combination and a bonus combination are won at the same time, and if the replay combination is prioritized, the reel stop process in step S5 is performed so that the replay combination is prioritized. Since the corresponding symbol combination can always be stopped on the active line regardless of the pressing order or pressing timing, as a result, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination cannot be stopped on the effective line and is always replayed. The symbol combination is stopped.

  Further, according to FIG. 49, during the bonus, a push order unrecognized bell (Bell 1, Bell 2) and a replay winning value that can be expected to win (or establish) without depending on the push timing and push order in the stop operation are extracted. Occupies more than the majority of the range. Specifically, among all the 65535 lottery values in the extraction range, 30993 lottery values are assigned to replay and 32059 lottery values are assigned to the push order unquestionable bells, so the total is 63052. Account for over 96% of the total. In the first embodiment, the prescribed number in the bonus is two, and when the replay is established, the next game is provided without consuming medals, and when the push order unquestioned bell wins, nine Medals will be paid out. Therefore, when a bonus game is executed, a large number of medals are paid out during the bonus game execution period (during the bonus).

[11-3. Game state control processing]
Hereinafter, the gaming state control process performed in the slot machine 1 will be described.

[11-3-1. Game state transition control process]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a gaming state transition control process executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409.

  First, it is determined whether or not a bonus game (BB game) is being played (step S151). If it is determined that a bonus game is being played (YES in step S151), whether or not the bonus game end condition has been satisfied. It is confirmed whether or not (step S152). If the bonus game end condition is not satisfied (NO in step S152), the process returns while the gaming state during the bonus is maintained.

  If the bonus game end condition is satisfied in step S152 (YES in step S152), the bonus game is ended and the state is shifted to the general state (step S153). In the general state, when a game is executed over a certain period, the number of medals betted by the player to execute the game is larger than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game within the certain period. That is, the general state is a gaming state in which the number of medals decreases as the player executes the game.

  If it is determined in step S151 that the bonus game (BB game) is not being played (NO in step S151), it is determined whether or not the bonus is being played (bonus internal state) (step S154). That is, when a bonus combination (type 2 BB) is won in the internal lottery, a condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated. The condition device corresponding to this bonus combination corresponds to the bonus combination in the game won in the internal lottery. Even if the symbol combination is not displayed on the active line, the operation continues until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line even after the next game.

  If it is determined in step S154 that the bonus is in the internal state, then it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line (step S155). If it is determined in step S155 that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line (YES in step S155), the gaming state shifts to the bonus (bonus state) (step S156), and the bonus game is executed. The If a negative result is obtained in step S155 (NO in step S155), the process returns while the gaming state inside the bonus is maintained.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S154 that the bonus internal state is not established, whether or not a bonus combination (in this case, two types of BB but may be a duplicate combination including two types of BB) is won by internal lottery. Is determined (step S157). If it is determined in step S157 that the bonus combination is won (YES in step S157), the gaming state shifts to the bonus internal state (step S158). If the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line in the game selected as the bonus combination, the game in the bonus internal state is not performed, and the game state is controlled to the bonus state and the bonus game is executed. The If it is determined in step S157 that the bonus combination has not been won (NO in step S157), the game state is returned to the game state controlled to the general state.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the main board 409 controls the game state to any one of the general state, the bonus internal state, and the bonus state. On the other hand, as described above, the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment has the AT function, but the execution of the AT game by the AT function is basically controlled by a system different from the control of the gaming state described above. The In other words, the AT game can be executed in any of the game states of the general state and the bonus internal state. However, this is not the case when there is a conflict with rules and the like. For example, it is assumed that an AT game cannot be executed in a bonus state. Hereinafter, the gaming state control process related to the AT function will be described in detail.

[11-3-2. Instruction function processing]
As described in step S31 of FIG. 54, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, after the main board 409 selects a winning combination by the internal lottery process in step S3 (see FIG. 49 for the lottery table). When main processing of the instruction function processing is performed by the main board 409 and the generation of an instruction is displayed by the special display LED 612 (instruction function display), the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) has the same instruction function. Can be displayed on other displays or the like (navigation display, instruction generation effect). Note that the display mode of the instruction function display and the navigation display may be various, but both displays are required to be display contents in accordance with the instruction contents of the instruction function determined by the main board 409.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining a rough processing flow of the instruction function processing. In FIG. 57, regarding the instruction function processing performed in the slot machine 1, a series of processes executed on the main board 409 and a series of processes executed on the sub board 510 in response to a command from the main board 409 are shown. ing. 58 and 59 are flowcharts (part 1 and part 2) showing the detailed processing procedure of the instruction function generation process executed by the main board 409 in the instruction function process shown in FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure of the instruction function-related processing executed by the sub-board 510. In [11-3-2], first, an overview of the instruction function process will be described with reference to FIG. 57. In [11-3-3] and thereafter, the instruction function will be described with reference to FIGS. Details of each process included in the process will be described.

  Note that various flags are used in the following description of the instruction function process. These flags are used in the memory in the board that executes the instruction function process (for example, the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 and the RAM 1122 of the sub board 510). This is an internal flag to be held, and the value is rewritten or read by the CPU or the like (for example, CPU 1110 or CPU 1118) of each board. In addition, when a flag with the same name is used between the main board 409 and the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510), it is basically assumed that these internal flags have a common data format. It is assumed that the value of the flag is synchronized by transmitting a command signal or the like.

  In addition to the internal flag, variable data may be used. These variable data are also stored in the board memory (for example, the RAM 1114 in the case of the main board 409 and the sub board 510). In this case, the value is stored in the RAM 1122), and the value is read or rewritten by a CPU or the like (for example, the CPU 1110 in the case of the main board 409 and the CPU 1118 in the case of the sub board 510).

  First, in step S61 of FIG. 57, the main board 409 executes processing (instruction function generation processing) regarding whether or not to generate an instruction function. More specifically, the winning of the AT is determined, whether to start the AT game, and the number of continuations of the AT game are determined. Further, whether or not to execute the precursor effect of the AT game is also determined by the instruction function generation process.

  If it is determined that the instruction function is to be generated as a result of the instruction function generation process, the main board 409 performs a process of causing the special display LED 612 to display an instruction function display based on the winning combination of the game (step S62). ). By this instruction function display, it is possible to indicate an appropriate stop order of the push order small combinations established during the AT, or to indicate that a predetermined symbol should be arranged in a predetermined stop order.

  In the case of a game in which it is determined that the main board 409 does not need to perform the instruction function display in step S61, the specific instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is not performed in step S62.

  The main board 409 performs the instruction function display in step S62 based on the result of the instruction function generation process in step S61, while the same information as the display contents (instruction contents) in the instruction function display is transmitted to the peripheral board ( For example, it is transmitted to the sub-board 510) (instruction information command). When the instruction function display is not performed, the fact may be notified by an instruction information command, or the instruction information command may not be transmitted. However, if the instruction information command is not transmitted, it is necessary to determine whether the command has not been received after a predetermined time has elapsed on the receiving side. In this way, the peripheral board (sub-board 510) not only can recognize whether or not the instruction function display is performed in the game based on the reception of the instruction information command, but also can display the instruction function display. Display contents (instruction contents) can also be grasped.

  Then, the peripheral board (here, the sub board 510) that has received the instruction information command from the main board 409 performs the processing shown in steps S63 to S65 in FIG. 57 based on the information included in the instruction information command. In the instruction function process shown in FIG. 57, the instruction function generation process (step S61) is first executed by the main board 409, but the subsequent processes (specifically, the step by the main board 409 and the sub board 510). About the process of S62 and the process of step S63-S65, the execution timing of a mutual process is not restrict | limited.

  First, in step S63, it is determined whether or not the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) performs (or has performed) the instruction function display in the game, and the instruction function display is (or has been performed). ) (YES in step S63), instruction generation effect processing is performed as processing in step S64. Further, when it is determined in step S63 that the instruction function display is not performed (or has not been performed) in the peripheral substrate (for example, the sub substrate 510) (NO in step S63), the peripheral substrate (for example, the sub substrate 510) is instructed as processing in step S65. Perform function-related processing.

  The instruction generation effect process in step S64 is for displaying an “instruction generation effect” for teaching the player the stop order of the reel 301, the stop position (target pattern), etc. on the image display 500 or other display devices. This is a process for displaying a so-called AT navigation or the like. Note that the teaching content shown to the player by the instruction generation effect is limited to the display content displayed on the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display processing. For example, although the instruction content indicating “forward press” is displayed on the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display, the instruction content indicated by the instruction generation effect content is not allowed to be “reverse press”. Even if the special display LED 612 displays the instruction content indicating “forward press” and indicates that “the left reel 301a should be stopped first” as the teaching by the instruction generation effect content, The case where the reel 301b to be stopped is not taught is also not allowed. In addition, the fact that the instruction content by the instruction generation effect is limited to the display contents displayed on the special display LED 612 is not limited to the above-described pressing order, but the indication function display indicates the pressing place. It is also applied when is determined. That is, for example, although the instruction content display indicates that the special display LED 612 indicates that “all seven reels should aim for the red 7 symbol”, the instruction content indicated by the instruction generation effect content is “BAR symbol. It is not allowed to be "aiming at a red 7 symbol" with only some reels.

  In addition, as for the specific effect form of the instruction generation effect, various effect forms are conventionally known, such as displaying the pressing order and symbols on the liquid crystal screen, or lighting the LED associated with each reel 301a to 301c. Any one or combination thereof may be used.

  The instruction function related processing in step S65 relates to the instruction function when the instruction function display is not displayed on the special display LED 612 (for example, a game in a non-AT or a game won in the push order unquestioned winning combination in the AT). This is a process for displaying a predetermined effect screen (for example, an effect screen display corresponding to the sign effect), and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, in the above “Push Order Unquestioned Winner”, depending on the game method, not only the winning combination that can be expected to pay out the maximum number of games regardless of the game method at the time of winning, such as the push order unquestioned bell Some of the winning roles are such that the maximum number of payouts cannot be expected or the payout cannot be obtained. More specifically, not only a winning combination (for example, a watermelon role) that can be acquired when a game is played with a gaming method that can expect the maximum payout (equivalent to the above-mentioned “maximum efficiency hitting method”) is included. A winning combination (for example, a symbol combination using a symbol arranged on the opposite side on the symbol arrangement of the reel 301 from the symbol combination of the watermelon role is prepared, which can not be obtained when playing with `` maximum efficiency batting method '', It is a one-piece combination that is determined to be a winning when the symbol combination is stopped, and so-called a chance combination) is also included.

  The instruction function process ends when the processes of steps S61 to S65 described above are performed. Below, each process (step S61-step S65) performed as an instruction | indication function process is demonstrated in detail.

[11-3-3. Instruction function generation processing]
[11-3-3-1. First example instruction function generation process]
The instruction function generation process shown in step S61 of FIG. 57 will be described in detail while showing a specific example of the extraction table. 58 mainly illustrates processing in a mode other than the special mode, and FIG. 59 illustrates processing in the special mode. The “special mode” will be described later.

  First, in step S601 in FIG. 58, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is ON. The AT flag is an internal flag for indicating whether or not an AT game is in progress. When ON (= 1), it means that the AT is in progress, and when it is OFF (= 0). Means not in AT, ie, not in AT. If the AT flag is ON (YES in step S601), the instruction function generation process is terminated without performing any particular process. If the AT flag is OFF (NO in step S601), it is determined in step S602 whether the AT internal flag is ON (= 1). The AT internal flag is an internal flag for indicating whether or not the winning of the AT game is determined internally (AT internal state) although the AT is not in progress. In the non-AT state until the AT game is started after winning, the AT internal flag is turned ON. In addition, when the AT is not won or during the AT, the AT internal flag is turned OFF (= 0). In step S602, if the AT internal flag is ON, the process of step S603 is performed, and if the AT flag is OFF, the process of step S621 is performed.

  In step S603, an AT addition lottery is performed. In the AT extra lottery in step S603, first, whether or not to add the initial number of AT games is drawn (an initial game number extra lottery lottery), and if it is decided to add, how many games will be added lottery (Initial game number addition game number lottery). In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, a predetermined game period (for example, a pre-game period described later) may be provided before the AT starts after the AT is won. Assume that the initial number of AT games may be added when the condition is satisfied. When the process in step S603 is performed, the AT flag is OFF (NO in step S601), and the AT internal flag is ON (YES in step S602), which means that a sign game is being played. As a result, a lottery will be held on the AT. Note that during the precursor game, one of the internal flags, the “predictor game flag” is ON.

  Here, FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used for the initial game number extra lottery. According to the lottery table shown in FIG. 61, the winning combination selected by the internal lottery process (see step S3 in FIG. 54) is “replay”, “push order bell”, “type 2 BB”, or “out”. In most cases (65534/65535), the non-winning is selected and not added. On the other hand, the winning combination selected by the internal lottery process is other than the above, that is, “push order unquestioned bell”, “watermelon (weak / strong)”, “cherry (weak / strong)”, “chance eye (weak / strong) ) ”Or“ strongest ”, the player wins at a certain rate (16384/65535), and the extra is selected.

  Note that the two winning combination groups shown in FIG. 61 are repeatedly used in the following description for the sake of brevity, so that “Replay”, “Push Order Bell”, “Type 2 BB”, and “Out” are selected. The role is called “Winner of Group A”, and other than Group A, that is, “Push Order Unquestioned Bell”, “Watermelon (Weak / Strong)”, “Cherry (Weak / Strong)”, “Chance” The winning combination of “Eye (Weak / Strong)” and “Strongest” will be referred to as “B group winning combination”. Needless to say, such a division of the winning combination by the A group and the B group is merely an example for explanation, and may actually be a division of different winning combinations, or three or more divisions. Alternatively, the winning combination may be different for each lottery table.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used for the initial game number extra game number lottery. The initial game number extra game number lottery is performed when the initial game number extra lottery winner is selected. In the lottery table shown in FIG. 62, the allocation pattern of the number of added games is set differently depending on whether the winning combination is the winning combination of the A group or the winning group of the B group. As a general tendency, in the case of a winning combination of group A, a relatively small number of games are often selected, and only 200 games can be selected at most. On the other hand, in the case of winning group B, it is the same that a small number of games are easily selected, but a higher number of games is easier to select than in group A, and more than 200 games are selected. There is also a possibility.

  After the AT extra lottery is performed in step S603, it is determined whether or not the initial game number extra lottery is won (step S604). If it is determined that the winner is won, in step S605, the current “AT Processing for adding the initial game number to the initial game number and the additional game number selected in the game number lottery is performed (addition of the initial game number). “AT initial number of games” is variable data for indicating the number of AT games set at the start of the AT. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S606. If it is determined in step S604 that the initial game number is not added or not selected, the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, 1 is subtracted from the “number of precursor games”. The “number of precursor games” is variable data for indicating the number of “predictor games” in which an AT precursor effect (details will be described later) can occur.

  Next, in step S607, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games has become zero. When the number of precursor games is other than 0, that is, when the duration of the precursor games remains (NO in step S607), the instruction function generation process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the number of precursor games is 0 in step S607 (YES in step S607), it means that the precursor game has ended. At this time, since the AT internal flag is ON, the AT game is started. Therefore, the “AT flag” is turned ON (step S608). Thereafter, the AT internal flag and the precursor game flag are turned off (steps S609 and S610), the “special state flag” and “each state flag” are also turned off (steps S611 and S612), and the instruction function generation process is terminated. .

  Here, the “special state flag” is an internal flag that is turned on when the game is advanced in the “special mode”. In the first embodiment, the “special mode” is not a mere production mode but a special mode in which the winning probability related to the AT lottery is preferentially treated. The conditions for shifting to the “special mode” will be described in each step shown later. In addition, regarding the AT lottery gaming state that is controlled when the “special mode” is set, in the following description, when the game is controlled in the “special mode” when the AT lottery gaming state of the special “special state” is controlled. Suppose it is done. Derived examples will be described later. When there are a plurality of “special states” (special state 1, special state 2, special state 3) (see, for example, FIG. 63), a plurality of states are managed by one special state flag (for example, special state). If the status flag is 0, it is OFF, 1 is special state 1, 2 is special state 2, and 3 is special state 3), or a special state corresponding to each special state It may have a flag (for example, a special state 1 flag, a special state 2 flag, and a special state 3 flag are prepared). In any case, in the following determination that the special state is ON or OFF, it is determined to be ON when it is controlled to some special state, and is determined to be OFF when it is not controlled to any special state.

  In addition, each “state flag” includes a plurality of “AT lottery game states” (for example, a low-accuracy state, a high-accuracy state, an ultra-high-accuracy state, This is an internal flag for indicating the control state for each state (special states 1 to 3, hell state, etc.). Therefore, it can be understood that each state flag includes a special state flag and a hell state flag. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when “turn off each state flag”, the state flags relating to all AT lottery gaming states are returned to the initial settings (in this example, the low probability state is turned on). When “turn on each state flag”, the state flag corresponding to the AT lottery gaming state selected by the previous state transition lottery is turned on (other state flags are OFF). ) Means. In addition, when “turning off each state flag”, each state flag when not in AT (for example, low-accuracy state, high-accuracy state, ultra-high-accuracy state, etc. that can be controlled without being in AT) All of the state flags for each state may be turned off, or a predetermined state may be turned on. Details of “special state”, “each state”, “state transition lottery (state transition lottery A, B, C, special state transition lottery)” and the like will be described later.

  If the AT flag is OFF in step S602, that is, if the AT is not in the non-AT and internally won, whether or not the special state flag is OFF (= 0) in step S621. Determined. The process when the special state flag is ON (NO in step S621) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the special state flag is OFF in step S621 (YES in step S621), an AT initial winning lottery is performed (step S622). The AT first winning lottery is a lottery for determining a win in the AT game in a state where the AT game is not won. The situation in which the process in step S622 is performed is a condition in which AT is not in progress (AT flag is OFF in step S601), AT is not elected internally (AT internal flag is OFF), and is not in a special mode (special flag is OFF). Therefore, it is considered that the player is in a normal state where neither the AT nor the precursor game has been won, or that the precursor game that is not won by the AT is in progress.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used for the initial AT lottery. According to the lottery table shown in FIG. 63, the winning probability per AT first is set based on the gaming state controlled when the AT first lottery is performed and the winning combination selected by the internal lottery. Yes.

  Here, the gaming state described in the lottery table in FIG. 63 is “game state relating to the winning combination lottery” (specifically, a different number is set in the internal lottery of the winning combination as illustrated in FIG. 49). (A general state, a bonus internal state, a bonus state), and a “AT gaming state” in which different numbers are set in a lottery regarding an AT initial hit or an AT precursor game, etc., and thereafter “AT lottery gaming state” Call it.

  According to FIG. 63, as a specific example of the AT lottery game state, the hell state, the low probability state, the high probability state, the ultra-high probability state, the special state 1, and the special state 2 in the order in which the winning probability per AT first increases as a whole. , And special state 3 are prepared.

  Briefly describing each AT lottery game state, first, the hell state is a special AT lottery game state in which there is no possibility of winning at the first AT no matter what winning combination is selected. Next, the low probability state is an initial state of the AT lottery game state, and is called a low winning combination that is relatively difficult to win by internal lottery (also called “rare role”, specifically, a watermelon role, cherry role, chance If it is selected as a rare role, it can be expected to win to some extent at the first AT win. In particular, when the winning probabilities in the same kind of rare role (for example, weak watermelon and strong watermelon, etc.) are compared, it is set to be easier to win in the “strong” system than in the “weak” system. These tendencies are the same in other AT lottery game states. In addition, if a winning combination other than a rare combination (non-rare combination), that is, a high winning combination that is relatively easy to win by internal lottery (specifically, replay and push order bell), any AT is selected. Even in the lottery game state, it is almost impossible to expect winning for the first AT.

  In this example, the “low winning combination (rare role)” that is relatively difficult to win by internal lottery is a winning combination with a relatively high expectation level regarding advantageous games (for example, winning at the beginning of AT). Expected role. On the other hand, “high-winning roles (non-rare roles)” other than rare roles are “low-expected roles” because they have a lower degree of expectation regarding advantageous games than “high-winning roles”.

  The high-accuracy state is a gaming state in which the winning expectation degree per AT first is generally higher than the low-probability state, and the ultra-high-accuracy state further increases the winning expectation degree than the high-accuracy state. High gaming state.

  The special states 1 to 3 are dedicated game states controlled in the “special mode” in this example. Special states 1 to 3 have higher expectations for winning the first AT than the above-mentioned AT lottery game states (low accuracy state, high accuracy state, ultra high accuracy state), and the winning role is a rare role If this is the case, it will be won at the first AT with a probability of at least 55000/65535. Further, according to FIG. 63, the special state 2 is higher than the special state 1, and the special state 3 is higher than the special state 2 in the gaming state with higher winning expectation for the first AT.

  Note that the allocation in the lottery table shown in FIG. 63 is an example. For example, if the winning combination is a rare combination in a special state, the allocation such as winning in the first AT is always performed. Good. Each of these states may shift to another state based on the winning combination. Such AT lottery game state transition lottery will be described later with reference to FIG. 71, FIG. 74, and the like.

  In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the “gaming state related to the winning combination lottery” is controlled to the general state or the bonus internal state, the “gaming state related to the AT” is set to any one of the above AT lottery gaming states. Be controlled. Which of these AT lottery game states is controlled is managed by ON / OFF of each “state flag”. “Each state flag” is an internal flag provided corresponding to each AT lottery game state, and includes a low-accuracy state flag, a high-accuracy state flag, an ultra-high-accuracy state flag, a special state flag (special state 1 flag to Special state 3 flag), which corresponds to a hell state flag. A plurality of these status flags are not simultaneously turned ON, and when only one of the status flags is turned ON, the other status flags are turned OFF. For example, in the case of controlling to the ultra-high accuracy state, among the status flags, the ultra-high accuracy state flag is turned ON, and the other status flags are turned OFF. The “each state flag” does not have to be an individual flag corresponding to the type of AT lottery game state, but is an internal flag (for example, a flag value of 1) that collectively manages all AT lottery game states. May be a low-accuracy state, 2 may be a high-accuracy state, and so on.

  In step S623, it is determined whether or not the AT first win is won by the AT first win lottery in step S622. When winning the first AT (YES in step S623), the process of step S624 is performed, and when not winning the first AT (NO in step S623), the process of step S632 is performed.

  In step S624, a precursor lottery for determining whether to execute (shift) the “predictor game” is performed.

  Here, the “predictor game” and the “predictor effect” in the first embodiment will be described. As described above, the “precursor game” is a special game in which a “precursor effect” can occur, and the precursor game is performed over a predetermined number of games (a plurality of games) selected by lottery. The “prediction effect” is an effect that suggests or teaches whether or not the player is in the advantageous gaming state (in this case, the transition to the AT). The “predictive effect” is an effect that is continuously executed over a plurality of games. As a specific effect example, for example, a “continuous effect” performed over a plurality of games and a suggestion effect that is completed in one game. (For example, a small role navigation instruction, title display, etc.). Details of the “continuous effect” will be described later in the description of the instruction function related processing by the peripheral board (see FIG. 60).

  In this example described using FIG. 58, FIG. 59, etc., a precursor effect is always performed over a plurality of games in the precursor game, and the final game of the precursor effect is the final game of the precursor game. Therefore, the success / failure result of the AT transition indicated by the precursor effect can be regarded as a result of the precursor game. In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the sign game is played both in the case of winning at the first AT (when winning AT) and in the case of not winning in the first AT (when not winning AT). May be started. The precursor game (or precursor effect) performed at the time of winning the AT is referred to as “present precursor”, and the precursor game (or precursor effect) performed at the time of AT non-winning is referred to as “gasse precursor”. In the case of this precursor, it is indicated that the AT shift is performed at the end, and in the case of a prelude to the gasse, it is indicated that the AT shift is not performed at the end.

  Note that the precursor game determined to be executed in the instruction function generation process according to the present invention includes not only the “predictor effect” in which the “continuous effect” is performed as described above, but also includes various other effects. It is feasible. For example, although it is not a continuous production with continuity, a “roughness production” in which some predetermined production occurs more frequently than usual (for example, a characteristic background production occurs frequently, or a character line or the like is colored It is conceivable that a changing production frequently occurs.

  Then, when using such a “wrinkle effect”, as a pattern example of the sign game (predictor), a pattern of “wobble effect A” + “continuous effect A (a sign effect)”, “continuous effect A” + “ Patterns such as “Roughness Production A” + “Continuous Production B (Precursion Production)”, “Continuous Production A” + “Roughness Production A” + “Rough Production B” + “Continuous Production B (Sign Production)” It is. In the case of this precursor, it is necessary to finally announce the winning of AT transition, so it is preferable that the precursor effect is performed at the end.

  On the other hand, as a pattern example of the precursor game (Gase precursor), since the AT transition is not finally won, there is no need to perform the precursor effect at the end of the Gase precursor. It is also possible to execute a pattern of only “roughness effect”, a pattern in which “continuous effect” and “roughness effect” are combined and the end ends with “roughness effect”. In the case of a pattern that ends with a “roughness effect” at the time of the gase sign, the end of the “continuous effect (prediction effect)” performed before that is presumed to be the end of the precursor game, It may appear as if it is displayed. In addition, in any of the precursor games (present precursor, preceptive indicator), in addition to “continuous presentation” and “noisy presentation”, “normal presentation” that is not different from the normal time may be mixed.

  As described above, the precursor game determined by the instruction function generation process according to the present invention can be executed in various patterns. However, in this example, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, any of the precursor games (present precursors, gasse precursors) will be described. ) Also assumes that the game proceeds in a pattern of “normal production” + “continuous production (prediction production)”. At this time, as described above, a precursor effect is always performed over a plurality of games in the precursor game, and the final game of the precursor effect can be made the final game of the precursor game.

  In the precursor lottery in step S624, since the first winning AT is won in step S622 in advance, it is determined whether or not to execute the precursor game (main precursor) before starting the AT. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the sign lottery is performed even when the AT first lottery is not won (for example, step S633 described later). It is determined whether or not a game (gaseous omen) will be played, but in the case of a gaseous omen, a precursor effect that can make the player expect that it may shift to AT is executed, but actually Transition to AT is not indicated.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 determines whether or not the precursor game can be executed (for example, the precursor lottery in step S624) and determines the number of precursor games that are the number of executed games (for example, step S626). Process for the precursor game number lottery), and subsequent processing related to the effect of the precursor game (e.g., the display suggesting that the precursor game is being performed, the effect content of the precursor effect and the continuous effect and the execution opportunity are determined, It is preferable that the processing such as causing the presentation to be performed according to the determination result) is performed by the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) that receives the precursor game number command from the main board 409. This is because when the main substrate 409 performs all or most of the above processing, the processing amount of the main substrate 409 becomes excessive, and the processing capacity of the main substrate 409 (the upper limit of the capacity is defined) overflows. This is to prevent this from happening. In recent gaming machines, the amount of data necessary for processing related to effects is increasing as a result of progress in the types and contents of effects. Considering such a background, there is a limit to let the main board 409 perform the processing related to the effect. As described above, by distributing the processing load between the main board 409 and the peripheral board, the main board 409 In addition to suppressing the processing capacity, it is possible to enhance the production contents (production pattern) by the peripheral board that is not restricted by the capacity limitation. Details of the processing related to the effect of the precursor game will be described later in the instruction function related processing (FIG. 60, etc.) by the sub-board 510.

  FIGS. 64 to 66 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 3) for explaining a lottery table used for the precursor lottery. According to the lottery tables shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, in the precursor lottery, whether or not the precursor game is to be executed (whether or not) is drawn based on the winning combination and the AT lottery game state. FIG. 64 is an example of a lottery table used in the precursor lottery performed at the time of winning the AT, in other words, a lottery table used in the precursor lottery of the present precursor. In addition, FIG. 65 shows a preliminary lottery performed when the AT is not won in the first time in the non-special mode (for example, a state in which the AT lottery gaming state is controlled other than the special state and the game is played). 66 shows an example of a lottery table used in FIG. 66, and FIG. 66 shows a preliminary lottery performed when the AT is not won in the special mode (for example, a state in which the AT lottery gaming state is controlled to the special state and the game is played). An example of the lottery table used in FIG. In other words, FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 are lottery tables used for the precursor sign lottery of the gasse precursor.

  In the sign lottery of step S624, the lottery table of FIG. 64 is used. When the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 64 is used, execution of the precursor game is determined in any AT lottery game state, but the precursor game is not executed by changing the distribution of presence / absence. May be prepared.

  Next, in step S625, it is determined whether or not the precursor lottery in step S624 has been won, that is, whether or not the precursor game has been determined to be executed. If it is performed and the winning combination is not made (NO), the process of step S631 is performed.

  In step S626, a prelude game number lottery for determining the number of predecessor games (the number of predecessor games) is performed. FIGS. 67 to 70 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 4) for explaining a lottery table used for the precursor game number lottery. Similar to the lottery table used for the precursor lottery (FIGS. 64 to 66), the lottery table used for the precursor game number lottery depends on the presence / absence of the special mode when the lottery is performed and the presence / absence of AT winning. Different lottery tables are available. FIG. 67 is an example of a lottery table selected when an AT is won in a mode other than the special mode, FIG. 68 is an example of a lottery table selected when an AT is not won in a mode other than the special mode, and FIG. FIG. 70 is an example of a lottery table selected at the time of AT non-winning in the special mode. In step S626, the lottery table of FIG. 67 is used.

  According to the lottery tables shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, in the precursor game number lottery, the number of precursor games is drawn based on the winning combination and the AT lottery game state. Then, a precursor game is played for the number of precursor games selected by the lottery, a precursor effect appears on the way, and at the end a notification is made as to whether or not to shift to AT. In addition, with regard to the allocation by the winning combination in each lottery table, in FIG. 67 to FIG. 70, the winning combinations are grouped into the above-mentioned “rare combination” and “other than rare combination (non-rare combination)”. These lottery tables may be divided into different lottery tables for each winning combination, but as shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, the data held by the main board 409 is made as a common lottery table as much as possible. There is an effect of reducing the capacity.

  When comparing FIG. 67 to FIG. 70, a relatively small number of precursor games (specifically, four games) is selected in the special mode, whereas a relatively long number of precursor games (other than the special mode) is selected. Specifically, 8 games or more) is selected.

  Further, comparing FIG. 67 with FIG. 68, the number of predictive games at the time of AT non-winning (that is, a sign of a prelude to the Gase) in the case of AT winning in other than the special mode (FIG. 67) and AT non-winning (FIG. 68). The number of games) is more easily selected than the number of precursor games at the time of winning the AT (that is, the number of precursor games of this precursor). In addition, while the maximum number of precursor games at the time of AT non-winning is 32 games, the maximum number of precursor games at the time of winning AT is divided into 36 games. ) Is exceeded, at that time, a special effect can be achieved in that it is confirmed that this is a pre-sign indicating AT winning.

  After the precursor game number lottery is performed in step S626, the number of precursor games selected in the lottery is set in the variable data for “number of precursor games” (step S627). Then, the “predictor game flag” which is one of the internal flags is turned ON (= 1) (step S628), and the AT internal flag is turned ON (step S629). Flag to be set. Since the sign game is started means that the special mode (special state) is not reached, the special state flag is turned OFF (step S630), and the instruction function generation process is terminated.

  In step S631, the AT lottery is won, but the precursor lottery is not won. Therefore, the AT flag is turned on without performing the precursor game number lottery, and then the instruction function generation process is performed. Exit.

  In step S632, processing is performed when it is determined in step S623 that the AT initial winning lottery has not been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the precursor game flag is OFF (= 0). . If it is determined in step S632 that the precursor game flag is OFF (YES in step S632), the process of step S633 is performed. If it is determined in step S632 that the precursor game flag is ON (step S632). NO), the process of step S641 is performed.

  In step S633, a precursor lottery for determining whether to execute the precursor game is performed. The sign lottery in step S633 is a lottery process similar to that in step S624 described above, but since it is not won in the first AT in step S623, whether or not to perform a gauze sign using the lottery table illustrated in FIG. Is drawn. According to the lottery table shown in FIG. 65, when a winning combination other than a rare role (non-rare role) is selected, the execution of the precursor game is not selected, but a weak rare role (weak watermelon, weak cherry, When the weak chance) is selected as a winning combination, there is a high possibility that the execution of the precursor game is selected. When the winning combination is a strong rare combination, the possibility that the precursor game is executed is further increased, and in the strongest case, the execution of the precursor game is always selected.

  Next, in step S634, it is determined whether or not the precursor lottery of step S633 has been won, that is, whether or not the precursor game has been determined to be executed. If it has been won (YES), the process of step S635 is performed. If it has not been won (NO), the process of step S638 is performed.

  In step S635, the number of precursor games for determining the number of precursor games to be played is performed. In step S636, the number of precursor games determined by the lottery is set in the variable data for “number of precursor games”. In step S637, the “predictive game flag” is turned ON (= 1). Since the processing of steps S635 to S637 is the same as the processing of steps S626 to S628 described above, detailed description thereof is omitted. After step S637, the process of step S638 is performed.

  In step S638, a lottery (state transition lottery A) regarding the state transition of the AT lottery game state is performed. State transition lottery A is the AT lottery of the low-accuracy state, the high-accuracy state, or the ultra-high-accuracy state when the current AT lottery game state is a low-accuracy state, a high-accuracy state, or an ultra-high-accuracy state. Whether to shift to the gaming state (including continuation of the current state) is drawn. In step S678 in FIG. 59, which will be described later, when the current AT lottery game state is a special state (special states 1 to 3), which of the low-accuracy state, the high-accuracy state, or the ultra-high-accuracy state A state transfer lottery B for drawing whether to shift to the AT lottery game state is shown.

  Here, FIGS. 71 to 73 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 3) for explaining a lottery table used for the state transition lottery A. FIG. 71, 72, and 73 respectively show a lottery table for state transition lottery A that is used when the currently controlled AT lottery game state is controlled to a low-accuracy state, a high-accuracy state, or an ultra-high-accuracy state. It is an example. When performing state transition lottery, it can be recognized by referring to the value of each state flag which AT lottery gaming state is currently controlled.

  The characteristics of the lottery table shown in FIGS. Referring to FIG. 71 used in the low-accuracy state, in the low-accuracy state, there is almost no transition (promotion) to the ultra-high-accuracy state, except when the winning combination is the strongest. As for the nature, it can be seen that when the winning role is a rare role, the transition (promotion) to the high-accuracy state can be selected. In particular, when the role is weak, it is most likely to be promoted to the most accurate state. Specifically, the promotion to the highly accurate state is selected at 16384/65535.

  Referring to FIG. 72 used in the high-accuracy state, in the high-accuracy state, if the winning combination is a rare combination, the winning combination is not relegated (relegated), and the winning combination is replay, push order bell, two types It can be seen that there is a possibility of being demoted only with a fairly low probability (1310/65535) when BB is out of place. It can be seen that there is a certain degree of possibility of transition (promotion) in the super-high accuracy state, which is the upper level, when the winning combination is a rare combination (especially a push order unquestionable bell or a weak rare combination). In the overall high-accuracy state, the state is mostly maintained or promoted and is hardly demoted to the low-accuracy state.

  Referring to FIG. 73 used in the ultra-high accuracy state, in the ultra-high accuracy state, if the winning role is a rare role, it does not shift (degrade) to a lower level, and the winning role is replayed, and the push order bell It can be seen that there is a possibility of being demoted to a low-accuracy state or a high-accuracy state only with a considerably low probability in the case of the two types BB being out of place. That is, in many cases, even if the state transition lottery A is performed in the ultra-high accuracy state, the state of high benefit for the AT is maintained by maintaining the ultra-high accuracy state.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the state transition lottery A related to the state transition of the AT lottery game state is not limited to the AT game, but is performed in any game state (for example, general It may be performed in the same manner also in the state and the bonus internal state). And in such state transition lottery A during a non-AT game, the same lottery table illustrated in FIGS. 71 to 73 may be used, or different allocations may be set depending on the gaming state. The lottery table may be used.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the state transition of the AT lottery gaming state is drawn using the lottery table in which different transition probabilities are set based on the winning combination, the winning probability of each winning combination is determined. Based on the selection ratio of the transition destination state, the number of games in which each AT lottery game state is controlled continuously (so-called average stay game number) can be calculated. Specifically, for example, using FIG. 49 (lottery table for winning combination lottery) and FIGS. 71 to 73 (lottery table for state transition lottery A), the average number of staying games in each AT lottery game state in the bonus internal state is calculated. When calculated, the average number of stay games in the low probability state is about 120 games, the average number of stay games in the high probability state is about 25 games, and the average number of stay games in the ultra high probability state is about 36 games. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the average number of stay games in each AT lottery game state is not limited to the above calculation example. For example, each average stay game number is set in advance and corresponds to the setting. As such, the winning probability of each winning combination and the selection ratio of the transition destination state may be adjusted.

  In the above calculation example, the longest average stay game number is about 120 games in the low probability state, and the shortest average stay game number is about 25 games in the high probability state. On the other hand, since the number of stay games in the “special state” which is another AT lottery game state is selected from 2 games to 20 games (see FIG. 75 described later), the average number of stay games in the special state is The number of games is shorter than the average number of staying games in any of the low-accuracy state, the high-accuracy state, and the ultra-high-accuracy state. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described in the previous stage, the average number of staying games in each AT lottery game state can be arbitrarily set, but the average number of staying games in the special state can be set to other AT lottery games. It is preferable that the number of games is relatively shorter than the average number of staying games in a state (low-probability state, high-probability state, or ultra-high-precision state).

  After the state transition lottery A in step S638 is performed, each state flag is turned on so as to correspond to the state of the transition destination determined in the lottery (step S639), and the instruction function generation process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S632 that the precursor game flag is ON (NO in step S632), a process of subtracting 1 from the variable data value of “number of precursor games” is performed as the process in step S641. In step S642, it is determined whether the number of precursor games is zero. If it is determined that the number of precursor games is 0 (YES in step S642), it means that the precursor game has ended, so the precursor game flag is turned off (step S643). If it is determined that the number of precursor games is not zero (NO in step S642), it means that the precursor game is continuing, and the process of step S649 described later is performed.

  After the process of step S643 is performed, a special state transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the “special mode (special state)” (step S644).

  Here, the transition condition to the special mode (special state) in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the sign effect that displays (suggests and teaches) whether or not to shift to the AT can be performed as a result, as described above, but the sign effect ends in the sign game. After that, not only the pattern that returns to the gaming state (the gaming state here means the AT lottery gaming state) before the start of the precursor game (or precursor effect), but also another special gaming state (special state) May be controlled (transition to special mode). Note that when the transition to the AT is confirmed by the warning effect, the AT game is started as it is, and the special mode is not shifted. Therefore, such a special state is a special AT lottery game state that can be controlled only after the sign game does not indicate the transition to the AT (that is, the sign of Gasse). In this example, the special state is controlled to the special state. The game situation that is progressing is called “special mode”.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, after the end of the gase sign, whether or not to shift to the special mode (control to the special state) is determined by lottery, and if the lottery is won, the special state is controlled. The period (number of special state games) to be played is determined by lottery. Then, the game is advanced in the special mode until the number of special state games is consumed, and the AT lottery, the precursor lottery, etc. are performed again based on the winning combination selected during that time. Here, in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, one of the features is that the lottery regarding the AT in the special mode is performed in a situation that is preferentially given before the execution of the gase sign. Can be transferred to a special mode with a high expectation for AT, even if the transition to AT is denied due to the sign of Gase, which reduces the player's expectation due to the sign of Gase Can be suppressed, and a sense of expectation for a special game (AT game) can be maintained. It should be noted that the fact that the lottery regarding the AT is preferentially performed in the special mode means that, for example, in the lottery table for the initial AT lottery shown in FIG. Has been shown to be. The special state 1 to the special state 3 are gaming states that are set separately such that the degree of preferential treatment is different, and the preferential degree is high in the order of special state 1 <special state 2 <special state 3.

  In this example, it is assumed that it is determined which of the special state 1 to the special state 3 is controlled based on the gaming state when the transition to the special state is determined. Specifically, when the transition to the special state is determined in the low accuracy state, the special state 1 is selected as the special state of the transfer destination, and similarly, the special state 2 is selected in the high accuracy state. In the case of the ultra-high accuracy state, the special state 3 is selected. By doing this, the special state of the transition destination is preferentially treated according to the advantageous degree of the gaming state before the transition to the special state (low probability state <high probability state <super-high probability state) (special state) 1 <special state 2 <special state 3). Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is not limited to the one-to-one correspondence between the gaming state before the transition and the special state of the transition destination as in the above example. As another example, for example, when the transition to the special state is determined in the low-accuracy state, either the special state 1 or the special state 2 is selected as the transition destination state, and the high-accuracy state is similarly determined. In such a case, either the special state 2 or the special state 3 may be drawn by lottery.

  In the processing shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, a special state transition lottery is performed in the final game of the gasse sign, and if the lottery is won, the special mode is entered immediately after the gase sign ends. By performing such processing, the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment does not shift to the special mode until the prelude to the last game reaches the final game, so that AT shift is not denied. Therefore, even if it is a predicate, it is possible for the player to entertain whether or not to win the AT transition until the final game.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the timing for shifting to the special mode after the end of the precession sign is not limited to the immediate transition after the premise of the premise. For example, a relatively short standby period (standby game) may be provided after the end of the gaze sign until the transition to the special mode (however, the wait game period may be shorter than the number of games of the gaze sign) preferable). And when providing such a standby game, it is preferable to control to a specific effect state during a standby game. Specifically, for example, a high-frequency effect mode in which a predetermined effect frequently occurs can be considered as the specific effect state. If the high-frequency effect mode is controlled during the standby game, an effect can be generated over a plurality of games of the standby game. This can be realized and can be expected to improve game playability. Also, in the case of providing a standby game, even if the precursor game is a predicate game, if there is an effect that can be assumed to be a standby game after the end game, it will be possible to expect the transition to the special mode. Can be expected to maintain the interest of the elderly.

  In step S644, a special state transfer lottery for drawing whether or not to shift to the special mode as described above is performed using a predetermined lottery table. FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used for the special state transfer lottery. As shown in FIG. 74, the lottery table for the special state transition lottery is changed to the special state based on the winning combination of the current game and the current AT lottery game state (low-probability state, high-probability state, ultra-high-precision state). The winning percentage to be controlled (transition to special state) is set. Specifically, if the winning combination is a rare combination, it will always be won to shift to the special mode regardless of the AT lottery gaming state. If the winning role is a non-rare role, the higher the AT lottery game state is, the easier it is to win the transition to the special mode. Even if it is a non-rare role, it will win the transition to the special mode at a rate of more than half (32768/65535). As described above, when the transition to the special state is determined, the special state 1 to the special state are determined based on the gaming state (low-probability state, high-accuracy state, or ultra-high-accuracy state) when the determination is made. It is assumed that the state 3 is controlled.

  In step S645, it is determined whether or not the transition to the special mode has been won in the special state transition lottery in step S644. If the transition to the special mode is won (YES in step S645), the steps after step S646 are performed. If the process is performed and the shift to the special mode is not won (NO in step S645), the process of step S649 described later is performed.

  In step S646, upon receiving the win in the special state transition lottery in step S644, the period for controlling the special mode (special state game number) is determined by lottery (special state game number lottery). FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used for the special state game number lottery. According to FIG. 75, the number of special state games is drawn from among the different allocations depending on whether the winning role is a rare role or a non-rare role (non-rare role), and the winning role is a non-rare role. In some cases, 2 to 9 games are selected, and when the winning combination is a rare combination, 2 to 20 games are selected. In the case of the lottery table of FIG. 75, when the winning combination is a rare combination, not only the expectation of the maximum number of games is high, but also the average number of games is large, so it can be expected that the special mode will continue for a long time. Since the special mode is preferentially related to the AT over the game state before the precursor game (or the precursor effect) is executed, the fact that the special mode continues for a long time means that the degree of expectation for the AT becomes higher. .

  Next, in step S647, the special state game number selected in the special state game number lottery in step S646 is set in the variable data “special state game number” for indicating the special state game number, and then the special state flag is set. It is turned on (step S648), and the instruction function generation process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S642 that the number of precursor games is not zero, and if it is determined in step S645 that the transition to the special mode is not won, state transition lottery A is performed as processing in step S649. Is done. The state transition lottery A in step S649 is the same as the state transition lottery A described in step S638, and the state of the transition destination is determined using a lottery table (see FIGS. 71 to 73) corresponding to the current AT lottery state. It is determined.

  In step S650, each state flag corresponding to the state of the transition destination determined in the state transition lottery A in step S649 is turned on, and the instruction function generation process is terminated.

  The above is the description of each process shown in FIG. Hereinafter, each process illustrated in FIG. 59 will be described. The process shown in FIG. 59 is a process that is subsequently performed when it is determined in step S621 in FIG. 58 that the special state flag is ON (NO in step S621). 59, when the same processing as that described in FIG. 58 is performed, detailed description thereof may be omitted.

  First, in FIG. 59, in step S661, an AT initial winning lottery is performed. Since the AT initial lottery in step S661 is the same as the process described in step S622, the details are omitted.

  Next, in step S662, it is determined whether or not the hell state flag is OFF (= 0). As described above, the hell state is a special AT lottery game state in which any winning combination is not likely to be won in the first AT. In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the game is controlled to a special state after the sign game (gase sign) in which the winning result for the transition to the AT is not indicated by the sign effect. When a rare role is selected as a winning role in a game period (special mode) controlled in a special state, for example, a prelude effect indicating the winning result for the transition to the AT is displayed. The precursor game that occurs (the precursor) is executed. During the period in which this sign is executed, the winning of the transition to the AT is confirmed, so that even if further AT winning is performed, it becomes a useless game. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the sign is executed for the first AT in the special mode and the sign of the sign is executed, the period of the sign is controlled to the “hell state”, so that the useless AT winning is achieved. It is trying not to occur. Moreover, even when shifting from the special mode to the harsh precursor, it can be controlled to the hell state.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when controlling to the “hell state” as described above, not only the AT winning is suppressed but also a privilege advantageous to the player may be given. Specifically, for example, an AT addition lottery for adding the number of AT games may be performed (the AT addition lottery may be made easier than in a normal AT game). The process related to the AT extra lottery may be performed in the same manner as the AT extra lottery performed in the AT internal state described in step S603.

  If it is determined in step S662 that the hell state flag is OFF (YES in step S662), the process in step S663 is performed, and if it is determined that the hell state flag is not OFF (ON) ( The process of step S681, which will be described later, is performed.

  In step S663, whether or not the winning combination of the game is other than replay, push order bell, type 2 BB, or “out of” (that is, whether or not the winning combination is “rare combination”), Determined by referring to the activated condition device. In this example, the winning combination that is the criterion of the determination is a “rare role” for the sake of simplicity of explanation, and is not necessarily limited to the “rare role”. It may be limited to “rare role”. If it is determined in step S663 that the winning combination is a “rare combination” (YES in step S663), the process of step S664 is performed, and if it is determined that the winning combination is other than “rare combination” ( Step S663 NO) and step S671 are performed.

  The process of step S664 is a process performed when a rare combination is won in the special mode. Referring to FIG. 64 (the lottery table used in the sign lottery performed at the time of AT winning), it can be seen that a sign game always occurs when the winning combination is a rare combination and an AT is won. In addition, referring to FIG. 66 (the lottery table used in the sign lottery performed when the AT is not selected in the special mode), when the winning combination is a rare role, Even if it is not won (AT non-winning), it can be seen that a precursor game always occurs (corresponding to the situation when the process of step S672 described later is performed). Therefore, before the process of step S664 is performed, the transition to the precursor game can be confirmed by performing the precursor lottery as shown in step S624 of FIG. 58 (not shown).

  As described above, when the special mode is controlled, if a rare role is selected as a winning role, a predictive game always occurs even if the first AT lottery is not won (AT non-winning) Therefore, it is a gaming state that is likely to lead to continuous production (prediction production in a precursor game). Therefore, a screen display such as “Preparing for continuous production” may be performed as a display in the special mode to indicate to the player that the game state is likely to cause a continuous production. In addition, paying attention to the fact that a precursor game (and continuous production) occurs when a rare role is won during the special mode, a screen display such as "Now, draw a rare role?" For example, the player may be expected to win a rare role. In any case, the special mode can be regarded as a mode that leads to the subsequent precursor game (or precursor effect or continuous effect). Therefore, in a broad sense, the “following predictor game (or precursor effect or continuous effect)” Can also include special modes.

  In step S664, since the execution of the precursor game has been confirmed, the lottery game number lottery is performed, and as a process following the lottery, the lottery game number set (step S665) and the precursor game flag ON (step S666) is performed. The processing in steps S664 to S666 is the same as the processing described in steps 626 to S628 in FIG. 58, and thus the details are omitted. However, in the preliminary game number lottery in step S664, the processing shown in FIG. 69 or 70 is performed. A lottery table (lottery table selected at the time of AT winning / not AT winning in the special mode) is used.

  Thereafter, in step S667, it is determined whether or not the AT first win has been won by the AT initial win lottery in step S661. If it is determined that the first AT is won (YES in step S667), the AT internal flag is turned ON (step S668), and then the process of step S669 is performed. If it is not determined that the first AT is won (NO in step S667), the process in step S669 is performed.

  In step S669, since the sign game is started (the sign game flag ON) from the past so far, the special state flag is turned OFF. Further, since the precursor game is being executed (during the precursor game), the state is to be controlled to the hell state. Therefore, in step S670, the hell state flag is turned on, and the instruction function generation process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S663 that the winning combination is other than “rare combination” (NO in step S663), whether or not the first AT win is won by the AT initial winning lottery in step S661 as the process in step S671. Is determined.

  If it is determined in the determination process of step S671 that the first AT is won (YES in step S671), the process of step S672 is performed. When the processing in step S672 is performed, as described above in step S664, a situation in which a precursor game is necessarily generated. Therefore, before the process of step S672 is performed, the transition to the precursor game can be determined by performing the precursor lottery as shown in step S624 of FIG. 58 (not shown).

  In step S672, a sign game number lottery is performed, and then the number of sign games selected in the lottery is set in the variable data “number of sign games” (step S673), and the sign game flag is turned ON (step S673). Step S674). The processing in steps S672 to S674 is the same as the processing described in steps S664 to S666 and steps 626 to S628 in FIG. Thereafter, the AT internal flag is turned ON (step S675), and the processing after step S669 described above is performed.

  If it is not determined in the determination process in step S671 that the first AT win has been won (NO in step S671), the process in step S676 is performed.

  The process of step S676 is performed in a situation where the rare role is not won in the special mode and the first AT win is not won. Referring to FIG. 66, the precursor game is not executed in such a situation. Therefore, by performing the precursor lottery as shown in step S624 of FIG. 58 before the process of step S676 is performed (not shown), it is possible to confirm that the transition to the precursor game is not performed.

  In step S676, 1 is subtracted from the value of “number of special state games” that is variable data for indicating the number of games in the special mode. Thereafter, in step S677, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of special state games is 0. If it is determined that it is 0, it means the end of the special mode, so steps S678 to S680 related to the state transition are performed. After the process is performed, the instruction function generation process is terminated. If it is determined in step S677 that the value of the special state game number is not 0, it means that the special mode is continued, and thus the instruction function generation process is terminated without performing the processes of steps S678 to S680. To do.

  In step S678, a lottery (state transition lottery B) regarding the state transition of the AT lottery gaming state is performed. In the state transition lottery B, when the current AT lottery game state is any one of the special states 1 to 3, the AT lottery game state is shifted to any one of the low probability state, the high probability state, and the super high probability state. (Including continuation of the current state).

  Here, FIGS. 76 to 78 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 3) for explaining a lottery table used for the state transition lottery B. FIG. FIGS. 76, 77, and 78 respectively show the lottery table for state transition lottery B used when the currently controlled AT lottery gaming state is controlled to special state 1, special state 2, and special state 3. It is an example. When performing the state transition lottery, it is possible to recognize which AT lottery gaming state is currently controlled by referring to the value of each state flag (particularly, the special state flag).

  In each of the lottery tables shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, the transition destination state is lottery based on the winning combination. Referring to FIG. 76, when the special state 1 is controlled, the transition to the ultra-high accuracy state is not performed. When the winning combination is a rare combination, the transition to the high-accuracy state is always selected. If the winning combination is a non-rare combination, the transition to the low probability state or the high probability state is selected with approximately the same degree. Referring to FIG. 77, when the special state 2 is controlled, the transition to the low-accuracy state is not made, and the transition to the high-accuracy state or the ultra-high-accuracy state is selected although there is a difference in degree depending on the winning combination. Is done. In addition, when the winning combination is a rare combination, there is a tendency that the transition to the ultra-high accuracy state is more easily selected than when the winning combination is a non-rare combination. Referring to FIG. 78, when the state is controlled in the special state 3, the transition to the ultra-high accuracy state is always selected without shifting to the low-accuracy state or the high-accuracy state. Thus, comparing FIG. 76 to FIG. 78, the AT lottery gaming state (low accuracy state <high accuracy state <super high accuracy state) having a high advantage in the relationship of special state 1 <special state 2 <special state 3 From this point, it can be understood that the special state 1 <special state 2 <special state 3 is highly advantageous.

  Then, after the state transition lottery B in step S678 is performed, the special mode is ended, so the special state flag is turned OFF (step S679), and the state of the transition destination determined in the state transition lottery B in step S678 is set. Each state flag is set to ON so as to correspond (step S680), and the instruction function generation process ends.

  Next, the process after step S681 performed when it is determined in step S662 that the hell state flag is not OFF (is ON) will be described. The situation in which the process of step S681 is performed is that the AT internal flag is not ON (step S602), the special state flag is not OFF (step S621), and the hell state flag is not OFF (step S662). For example, this corresponds to a state in which a precursor game (a precursor to the gusset) is executed in the non-winning AT after entering the special mode.

  The processing performed in steps S681 to S689 is the same as the processing described in steps S641 to S648 of FIG. 58 except for the processing of step S688, and therefore, details are omitted and only a simple flow is described.

  First, the number of precursor games is subtracted (step S681), and it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games has become zero (step S682). When the number of precursor games becomes 0, the precursor game flag is turned off (step S683), a special state transition lottery is performed (step S684), and it is determined whether or not the transition to the special mode is won. (Step S685) If the winning mode is selected, the special state game number lottery is performed (Step S686), and the number of selected games is set to “special state game number” (Step S687). After the status flag is turned on (step S689), the instruction function generation process is terminated. However, at this time, since the state is shifted from the hell state to the special mode, a process for turning off the hell state flag is additionally performed between step S687 and step S689 (step S688).

  If the transition to the special mode is not won in the process of step S685, the state transition lottery C is performed (step S690). Here, the state transfer lottery C is for drawing the transfer destination of the AT lottery gaming state in the same manner as the state transfer lottery A described in step S638 of FIG. However, in this example, in the state transition lottery C, if the transition to the low probability state is determined with a probability of 100%, the next game is forcibly dropped to the low probability state with a low advantage.

  Here, the situation where the process of step S690 is performed is that the number of precursor games becomes 0 (step S682) when the AT internal flag is OFF (NO in step S602) and the hell state flag is ON (NO in step S662). Further, when the transition to the special state is denied in the special state transition lottery (NO in step S685). Explaining in a specific game situation, after the sign production, the special mode is entered, and the sign production is again performed by winning the rare role during the special mode (during this time, it is controlled to the hell mode) Regardless, it corresponds to the case where AT was not won, and in this example, in such a case, after the indication effect after the special mode ends (that is, at the end of the hell mode), the low probability state is forced. To migrate.

  In the first embodiment, winning a rare role that is a highly anticipated role during the special mode (in terms of the AT lottery game state means that it is controlled to a hell state) is a mere sign game. It is a game situation that is extremely advantageous for the player as compared to the transition to the special mode after that (the transition to the mere precursor game or the special mode is also an advantageous game situation for the player. is there). However, even if such a very advantageous gaming situation can be reached, if a special game (AT) is not won as a result, the player is placed in a low probability state that has a significantly lower advantage than other gaming states. I try to fall. In other words, in this embodiment, when an advantageous result (AT winning) cannot be achieved despite the fact that a very advantageous gaming situation (rare role winning in the special mode) has been revealed, By making the worst state (low-probability state), it is possible to realize a game machine with a sharp effect without making the specification only sweet for the player. In addition, from the hall side perspective, a gaming machine having only modes advantageous to the player (specifically, a precursor mode, a special mode, a precursor effect after the special mode, etc.) is less likely to cause a disadvantage to the hall. However, when the result of a very advantageous gaming situation is unsuccessful (AT not elected), the profit on the hall side can be secured by shifting to the worst state. Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game period controlled to the special state is on average shorter than other general AT lottery game states (low-probability state, high-probability state, and ultra-high-precision state). By doing so, the game balance can be maintained.

  After the state transition lottery C in step S690 is performed, processing for turning off the hell state flag is performed in order to shift from the previous hell state to the gaming state drawn in the state transition lottery C (step S691). ) After each state flag (that is, the low probability state flag) corresponding to the state of the transition destination selected in the state transition lottery C is turned on (step S692), the instruction function generation process is terminated.

  As described above, the processing of each step shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 is performed, so that the instruction function generation processing (step S61 in FIG. 57) by the main board 409 is performed. Based on the result of the processing, FIG. The process after step S62 of the indicated function process shown is performed.

  Note that the instruction function generation processing performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to the contents of each processing described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, and is based on various derivative patterns as described below. Can be replaced. In addition, in [11-3-3-3], which will be described later, the derivation pattern of the instruction function generation process will be described as the instruction function generation process of the second example and the third example.

  For example, in the description of FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, whether or not the precursor game flag is ON (more strictly speaking, whether or not the number of precursor games in the precursor game is 0) is used as a determination trigger. In the case where a transition is drawn (for example, steps S632, S642, and S644 in FIG. 58), as an example of a derivation pattern of the instruction function generation process, a strong sign (strong sign and weak sign) is provided in the sign game. You may make it easy to shift to the special mode. In this way, the degree of transition to the special mode can be adjusted as appropriate, so that the gameability of the slot machine 1 can be improved.

  The state transition timing based on the special state transition lottery and the lottery result is not limited to when the number of precursor games becomes 0. For example, the special state transition lottery is performed at an appropriate timing in the precursor game. It may be possible to shift to the special mode. In such a case, the sign game and the special mode are displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 by displaying the sign game and the subsequent special mode together as a series of “predictor modes”. Can be configured. Specifically, if the game period of 32 games is selected as the “predictor mode” and the predecessor game is being performed, and the special state transition lottery is won in the middle of the predecessor game, By switching to the special mode, the remaining game period of the “precursor mode” can be changed to the special mode. At this time, even if the prelude game ends as a prelude, the special mode will be in a gaming state with a higher advantage than before the premise execution, so if you can move to the special mode at an early timing, the special mode period will be longer Next, the expectation for AT winning can be raised. On the other hand, if the timing to move from the precursor game to the special mode is delayed, the display of the AT winning result by the precursor effect performed in the precursor game is expected to be long, and the special mode that is controlled after that makes the AT winner anew. It can make you expect.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the precursor game is adjusted without changing to the special state by adjusting the allocation of the lottery table with respect to the precursor game (prediction effect) and the subsequent transition to the special mode (special state). If the winning combination that triggers the execution of the preceding game is a rare role, the pattern in which the AT winning is announced only by the effect of the preceding game is halved, and the winning role that triggers the execution of the preceding game is a rare role. If it is other than (non-rare role), it can be 100% (may be nearly 100%). In this way, when a non-rare role that is difficult to win in an AT is selected, the expectation degree of winning in the AT can be remarkably increased when the player develops into a precursor game (or precursor effect).

  In the example shown in FIG. 59, as described in step S663, when the rare combination (low winning combination) is selected as the winning combination during the special mode, the occurrence of the precursor game is preferentially performed. The slot machine 1 of the form does not need to be limited to the winning of the rare role in the transition from the special mode to the occurrence of the precursor game. For example, even when a non-rare role (high winning role) is selected as a winning role during the special mode, the allocation may be made to the extent that a predictive game can be expected. (Rare role push order unquestionable bell and non-rare role push order bell may be combined to be regarded as “bell”, or non-rare role push order bell may be regarded as the main “bell”) Sometimes, the occurrence of a precursor game may be determined at 70% or more. In addition, for the first win of AT in the special mode (step S661 in FIG. 59), it is possible to make an allocation that can be expected for AT winning even when winning a high winning combination (for example, Bell). Sometimes, you may make it win AT at 50% or more. At this time, in the distribution table illustrated in FIG. 63, the winning value corresponding to the push order bell may be changed. In this way, during the special mode, it is possible to make a winning role that can be expected sufficiently even if it is a high winning role that usually can not be expected in the occurrence of a precursor game or AT winning, and enhance the interest of the player be able to.

  However, as mentioned above, when a pre-game is generated from the special mode or when a high-winning role is included in the preferential treatment for AT winning, the special mode has a very high degree of advantage, so the balance of the overall appearance rate etc. From the standpoint of maintaining, it is preferable to extremely shorten the game period of the special mode (the number of games controlled to the special state). In this way, the occurrence of a precursor game from the special mode and the expectation of winning the AT are increased, but if the game period of the special mode is shortened, the player's expectation for the short-term special mode is increased. It can be further increased.

  Note that when the game period (number of games) in the special mode is extremely shortened as described above, the specific number of games can be determined as follows, for example.

  First, as a first example, in a case where a push order bell is preferentially treated among high winning combinations, an integer value based on the reciprocal of the win probability of the push order bell is set as a special mode game period. According to the lottery table for the winning combination shown in FIG. 49, in the gaming state (general state, bonus internal state) other than the bonus state, the winning rate of the push order bell is about 0.49 (calculated from 32000/65535). Therefore, the reciprocal is about 2.04. Therefore, “2” is used when an integer value that approximates the reciprocal number is adopted as the integer value based on the reciprocal of the winning probability of the pushing order bell, and “3” when an integer value obtained by rounding up the decimal point of the reciprocal number is adopted. It becomes.

  When the game period of the special mode is “2 games”, the number of games is the number of games that the player can feel that he / she can win a predetermined winning combination (in this case, the push order bell) within the game period. Therefore, it can be expected to increase the player's willingness to play and expectation. In addition, when the game period of the special mode is “3 games”, the number of games is theoretically the number of games that can be won in a predetermined winning combination (in this case, the push order bell) within the game period (ie, Since the winning expected value is 1 or more), the possibility that a privilege (occurrence of a precursor game or AT winning) is given through the special mode is increased, and the player's expectation can be further increased.

  Next, as a second example, when the push order bell and the replay among the high-winning roles are treated as preferential targets, the winning probability of selecting the winning role as the preferential target becomes higher than that in the first example (FIG. 49, the probability of winning the push order bell or replay is about 0.63 in the general state and about 0.96 in the bonus internal state). Also, for example, it is limited to “1 game”. When the game period of the special mode is set to “1 game”, only the next game in which the failure result due to the gaze sign is shown is given an opportunity to be overridden by the special mode, so that the player's game Motivation can be increased rapidly.

[11-3-3-2. Effect of instruction function generation process of first example]
When the slot machine 1 performs the instruction function generation process (instruction function generation process of the first example) as described in [11-3-3-1] above, the following effects are also obtained. Can be realized.

  First, according to the slot machine 1, the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, so that “in a gaming machine capable of performing an expected effect expected to shift to an advantageous game, it was performed during a predetermined game period. Even if the transition to the advantageous game is denied due to the expected performance, in the relatively short game period after the predetermined game period, the special game state (special mode) that is advantageous over the plurality of types of normal game states is entered. Can be realized.

  The “expected effect” corresponds to the “predictive effect” described in the instruction function generation process of the first example. In the instruction function generation process of the first example, a “predictive effect” can be executed to suggest or teach to the player whether or not a transition to an advantageous game (AT game) is possible, and is described in step S624 of FIG. As described above, the sign game in which the sign effect is performed includes a main sign indicating that the game is shifted to the AT game (AT win) and a gasse sign indicating that the signal is not transferred to the AT game (AT non-win). The precursor game can be said to be a continuous performance game that is performed in a delay period from a game in which a lottery (AT first lottery) relating to the AT game transition is performed to a game in which the result is displayed.

  Then, according to the instruction function generation process of the first example, after the AT initial winning lottery is performed, even if the gaze omen is executed and, as a result, the shift to the AT game is denied, the special mode ( (Special state). Specifically, this corresponds to shifting to the special mode (special state) when winning in the special state transition lottery shown in step S644 of FIG. When the process of step S644 is performed, the slot machine 1 is in a situation where the remaining number of precursor games is 0 in a state where the AT has not been won (internally not won). That is, it is possible to shift to the special mode when the warning sign is finished and finished (see FIG. 74 for the lottery table).

  Furthermore, when the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, the special state controlled when winning in the special state transition lottery is, as described with reference to FIG. 63, other AT lottery gaming states (so-called normal It corresponds to the gaming state, and more specifically, the player's winning expectation for the first AT is higher than the low probability state, the high probability state, and the ultra-high probability state). This is an advantageous mode (special mode). In the example of FIG. 63, when the winning combination is a “rare role” while being controlled in a special state, the AT hit per day with a fairly high probability of at least about 84% (55000/65535) or more. Can be won. However, in the instruction function generation process of the first example, the situation in which the game is played in the “special mode” is a non-AT state, and the “special mode” has a lower priority than the special game state (AT state).

  In addition, the point that the period of transition to the special mode is “relatively short game period” is, for example, that the number of staying games in the normal gaming state is lower than the average number of staying games in the low probability state, the high probability state, and the super high probability state Although this is based on the fact that the number of games controlled by the mode (the number of special state games) is small, this detailed description will be described later.

  From the above, the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed is described as follows. “In a gaming machine capable of performing a precursor effect expected to shift to an advantageous game, a transition to an advantageous game by a precursor effect. Even if is denied, it is possible to shift to a special mode advantageous to the player. ” In the conventional gaming machine, when the result of the warning effect ends in failure (AT not elected), the game value spent to digest the warning sign that the warning effect was performed becomes useless for the player. As a result, there is a problem that the loss of the player is increased and the interest is reduced. However, according to the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, as described above, it is possible to shift to the special mode advantageous to the player even after the gaseous sign, which is consumed by the gasey sign. The game value can be compensated (compensated), and the loss of game value due to the gaze sign can be suppressed, so that the player's willingness to play can be maintained.

  Further, when the instruction function generation process in the first example is performed, three types of AT lottery game states before the precursor game (precursor effect) is started, a low probability state, a high probability state, and a super high probability state are listed. However, the special states (special states 1 to 3) can be more advantageous with respect to AT than any of those states (see FIG. 63). According to the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, even if the transition to the advantageous game is denied by the sign effect, it is more advantageous than before the sign effect is executed. The game mode can be shifted to a special mode (for example, a special state), and a gaming state with a high expectation can be provided on the contrary by the occurrence of a warning sign. Originally, the gaze precursor could be discouraged by announcing a result that does not lead to an advantageous game (for example, an AT game), but the slot when the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed According to the machine 1, by connecting to a special mode having a high expectation level through a gaze omen, it is possible to provide an expected value that can supplement the game value consumed by the player for the gase omen.

  In addition, in the instruction function generation process of the first example, the state of the advantageous game (corresponding to the AT lottery game state) is being performed even while the gaze precursor having the result of denying the shift to the advantageous game is being performed. Transition lottery can be performed. Specifically, this corresponds to the state transition lottery A performed in step S649 of FIG. In this state transition lottery A, the state transition is lottery using the lottery tables illustrated in FIGS. 71 to 73 based on the AT lottery gaming state controlled at the time point. Except for the case where the highest super-high accuracy state is controlled at the time point, the promotion probability for shifting to a more advantageous state than the current point is set higher than the demotion probability for shifting to a more unfavorable state than that point. For example, in FIG. 71, since it is a state transition lottery from the lowest low probability state, it will not be demoted. Also, for example, in FIG. 72, the rate of demoting to the low probability state is 600/65535 even when the non-rare role with the highest probability is elected, whereas the rate of promotion to the ultra-high probability state is 63625/65535. The rate of overwhelming promotion is higher.

  As described above, according to the instruction function generation process of the first example, not only can the state transition lottery be performed even while the gaseous sign is being performed, but the advantage can be increased by the state transition lottery. Is executed and the result of the negative game transition is denied, it can be expected to shift to a higher advantageous state to compensate for the loss caused by the negative result, and the player's willingness to play is reduced. There is an inhibitory effect.

  In addition, in the instruction function generation process of the first example, when a predicate is performed, an AT lottery game state (a low probability state, a high probability state) that can be normally controlled in a specific game in which the number of remaining precursor games becomes zero , A lottery to shift to a special mode that is more advantageous than the ultra-high accuracy state) can be performed, so if you win the lottery, use a lottery table (lottery table for special states) that is advantageous in the subsequent games It is possible to perform a lottery to shift to an advantageous game (AT first lottery). Specifically, the lottery for shifting to the special mode corresponds to the special state transition lottery performed in step S644 of FIG. 58 or step S684 of FIG. 59, and the subsequent lottery for shifting to the advantageous game is step S661 of FIG. This is equivalent to the first lottery at AT. The fact that the lottery table corresponding to the AT lottery game state is used in the AT initial lottery is as shown in FIG. 115, and according to FIG. It can be seen that in the special states 1 to 3, the winning probability per AT first is higher.

  Also, in step S644 of FIG. 58 and step S684 of FIG. 59, it has been described that the special state transition lottery is performed when the remaining number of precursor games is 0. However, in the instruction function generation process of the first example, the remaining The special state transition lottery may be performed when the number of precursor games is not limited to 0 but is a predetermined number other than 0. By doing in this way, since the state transition lottery (special state transition lottery) can be executed even during the sign of the gaze, even in the sign of the gaze, a state advantageous over the current AT lottery gaming state The transition to (special mode) becomes possible, and even if a gaseous warning that cannot be expected to shift to an advantageous game is executed, the investment of the game value (medal) necessary to digest the gaseous sign is all wasted It can be expected to make up for the investment.

  In other words, when the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, a transition to a special mode (for example, a special state) in which a good lottery table is used in a specific game in the middle of a prelude (or immediately after a premise) It has the feature that a lottery can be performed.

  In addition, when the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, the period during which the special mode is controlled is a “relatively short game period (relatively short period)”, and the game period includes a normal gaming state (low probability). State, high-accuracy state, and ultra-high-accuracy state). Specifically, as described in the state transition lottery A (for example, step S638 in FIG. 58) of the instruction function generation process, when the lottery tables in FIG. 49 and FIGS. The average number of stay games in the certainty state is about 120 games, the average number of staying games in the highly certain state is about 25 games, and the average number of staying games in the very high probability state is about 36 games. On the other hand, the number of stay games in the special state (special state 1 to special state 3) is selected from 2 games to 20 games (see FIG. 75 to be described later). It is a short period. Then, according to the slot machine 1 in which such an instruction function generation process is performed, a comparison is made when the predecessor game advantageous to the player is a prelude to the game (that is, when the transition to the AT game is denied). Since it can shift to such a special state for a short period of time, even if the expected performance in the precursor game ends in a failure result, an opportunity for re-chance can be given by the special state. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, it is possible to realize a gameability different from the gameability in the conventional gaming machine in which the precursor state and the normal state are repeated. It is possible to produce an effect that it is difficult for the player to get bored.

  Furthermore, according to the instruction function generation process of the first example, when a rare role that is a highly expected role (low winning role in terms of winning probability) is selected as a winning role in the above-described special state, The prognostic game is started again with a probability (100% in the description of FIG. 59). However, when the prognostic game ends as a result of failure, the gaming state after the prognostic game is low and the advantage is low. The forcible state is forcibly dropped (see state transition lottery C in step S690 in FIG. 59). Therefore, according to the slot machine 1 in which such an instruction function generation process is performed, even if an advantageous predictive game is unsuccessful, the winning combination is won in a relatively short period thereafter. In this way, the advantageous mode can be controlled such that the precursor game can be re-appeared, so that a plurality of situations advantageous to the player can be provided in a multiplex (or continuous) manner. However, on the other hand, if such a multiple advantageous situation is provided, but those results are unsuccessful (not shifting to the AT game), as a reaction, Providing a gaming machine that takes into account the profits of the hall side as well as a game machine that is not sweet to the player because it is forcibly dropped to a low probability state (lowest gaming state in this example) where the advantage is low Can do.

  Also, from the viewpoint of securing profits on the hall side, the special state is a game state that is advantageous to the player (that is, disadvantageous for the hall side), and therefore it is difficult for the hall side to control the special state for too long. Although not preferable, in the slot machine 1 when the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, the period during which the special state is controlled as described above is the normal gaming state (the low probability state, the high probability state, the super high probability state). Since it is shorter than the average number of staying games in the state), the disadvantage on the hall side can be suppressed.

  Further, in the instruction function generation process of the first example, the transition to the special mode (special state) is lottery by the special state transition lottery as described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. May be displayed with points or the like to suggest to the player. In addition, the timing which gives a point etc. is not specifically limited. Further, such suggestion effects may be performed not by the main board 409 but by the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510). And when such a suggestion effect is performed, it can be expected to enhance the interest of the player.

  In the instruction function generation process of the first example, when the special mode as described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59 is performed after the end of the gauze sign, a special effect (special state suggestion effect) that suggests that the special mode is in effect. ) May be executed. In the special state suggesting effect, for example, the content of a continuous effect that may occur when a rare role is won during the special mode (the content of the sign effect that returns) may be suggested. Further, when the special state suggesting effect is executed, a continuous effect with a high expectation degree may be easily selected from a plurality of types of continuous effects. Specifically, taking the lottery tables of FIGS. 94 and 95 as an example, when a special state suggesting effect is executed, a weak effect (a weak story) is generated when a precursor effect (continuous effect) is subsequently generated. , Weak battles) will be chosen more easily than strong productions (strong stories, strong battles). By doing in this way, a player's interest can be heightened only by producing a special state suggestion effect.

  In addition, according to the slot machine 1, by performing the instruction function generation process of the first example, “a gaming machine capable of executing any one of a plurality of effects including a specific effect indicating a determination result regarding the shift to an advantageous game” Then, in the game after the specific effect is executed, it is also possible to realize a “gaming machine that can execute a predetermined effect in a previous stage before the result of the specific effect is shown.

  The above-mentioned “specific effect” corresponds to the “continuous effect” described in the instruction function generation process of the first example, and “in the game after the specific effect is executed, before the result of success / failure in the specific effect is shown. The state in which the “predetermined stage performance” is executed is, for example, a sign game (repeatedly executed based on the “special mode” described in the instruction function generation process or the fact that the rare role is won in the “special mode”) ( Or a continuous effect in the precursor game).

  More specifically, according to the instruction function generation process of the first example described in [11-3-3-1], the “continuous effect” appears in the sign effect performed in the sign game, The player can be instructed as to whether or not to shift to the advantageous game (AT game) (see the description of step S624 in FIG. 58). The precursor effect including the continuous effect is included in the main precursor indicating that the game is shifted to the AT game (AT win), or the gasse precursor indicating that the player is not transferred to the AT game (AT non-winner). Therefore, the continuous performance performed with the harsh sign does not indicate a shift to an advantageous game.

  In addition, the “continuous effect” may be an aspect in which it is completed in one game and teaches whether or not to shift to the AT game, but in many cases, an aspect in which a continuous effect is performed over a plurality of games is taken. Further, when the “prediction effect” in the first embodiment is regarded as one of the “continuous effects”, the effect is always performed over a plurality of games. Furthermore, the “multiple games” referred to here may be constituted by a game (so-called “main game”) in which an internal lottery regarding the winning combination is performed once for each game, or in a pseudo manner during one main game. It may be composed of a game that creates multiple game modes (a so-called pseudo game) or a mixture thereof.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine capable of producing a continuous production during a precursor game, if the result of the continuous production is a negative of winning the advantageous game, the player's interest will continue for a while after that. There were not a few problems that continued to decline. To give a specific example, if a continuous performance in the precursor game appears by winning a rare role in a high probability state of AT winning, the player strongly expects for AT winning, When continuous production ended in failure results, disappointment caused the feeling of expectation to drop rapidly, and the lowered interest could not be recovered immediately.

  On the other hand, when the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, in the slot machine 1, it is assumed that the result of the precursor effect (continuous effect) does not indicate winning of advantageous game (transition to AT) (I.e., even if the foreplay effect is a prelude), after the end of the prelude, it is possible to shift to a special mode that will lead to the occurrence of the next predecessor game. It is possible to reproduce the previous stage production. In addition, since the precursor game can be executed again on the basis of having won the highly expected role (rare role) during the special mode after the gasse precursor, by the precursor effect in such a precursor game, It is possible to reproduce the production stage in the previous stage than when the failure result is shown in the first sign production.

  Therefore, according to the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, the player's interest is continuously increased by the negative result of the continuous performance as in the case of the conventional gaming machine described above. Even if the continuous production shows the result of denying the win for the advantageous game without lowering it, the effect of the previous stage can be reappeared than the result of showing the success or failure of the advantageous game. , There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the interest reduction of the player.

  In the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generation process of the first example as described above is performed, after the result of refusing to win the advantageous game in the “first continuous effect” is shown, Even if an “effect” appears, the winning result for the advantageous game is not necessarily indicated by the effect following the “previous stage effect” or the “previous stage effect”, and the win for the advantageous game is denied. Sometimes. When the “previous stage effect” appears by transitioning to the special mode after the end of the sign of gaze, whether or not the winning game result is shown is performed during the transition to the special mode or during the special mode. It is determined based on the result of the internal lottery (for example, winning combination).

  Further, in the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generation process of the first example as described above is performed, the “previous stage effect” indicates that the same effect as the “previous continuous effect” appears again. It may be an effect that can be suggested, and may not be an effect included in the “previous continuous effect”. Then, even if the “previous stage effect” appears, whether or not the same effect as the “previous continuous effect” appears is determined based on the result of the internal lottery (for example, the winning combination).

  Furthermore, the special state controlled in the special mode is also characterized in that the degree of expectation for the advantageous game is higher than the state before the execution of the continuous performance (for example, the low-accuracy state, the high-accuracy state, and the ultra-high-accuracy state). Therefore, according to such a slot machine 1, the continuous effect is controlled by controlling the game state so that the degree of expectation for the advantageous game is different before and after the continuous effect. Even if the result does not indicate that the player has won the advantageous game, the player's expectation can be maintained until after the continuous performance.

  In addition, in a conventional gaming machine, a continuous production that can be expected to shift to an advantageous game itself increases the player's expectation, but the result of the continuous production is unsuccessful (for example, AT non-winning). Had the aspect that the degree of expectation would drop at once. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1, the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, so that even if the result of the continuous effect does not indicate the win for the advantageous game, Since special modes that can be controlled (for example, special states) are more advantageous than before the appearance of the continuous production, even if the result of the continuous production ends in failure, a higher expectation state is created thereafter. It has a special effect in that it can. In other words, the failure result of the continuous production does not simply end the expected period, but it sets the stage for a more highly anticipated period. The effect is that the feeling can be maintained for a long time.

  In addition, in the slot machine 1, when the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, the transition ratio for transitioning to the special mode after the failure of the continuous performance is determined based on the effect mode of the continuous performance that has appeared. You may make it attach a difference in a ratio. Specifically, for example, the higher the probability of transition to the special mode when the result of the continuous effect is unsuccessful, the higher the chance that the continuous effect with low expectation appears (high probability). . In such a case, if a continuous performance with a low degree of expectation appears, the player's expectation that the result of the continuous performance will be successful (winning the transition to an advantageous game) is relatively low. However, on the other hand, since the probability of shifting to the special mode, which has a higher advantage than before the appearance of the continuous performance, is increased, the player's expectation for the special mode is increased, and as a result, the player's expectation for a long time is increased. Expectation can be sustained.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, when the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, the state transition lottery can be performed even during execution of the continuous effect, and a specific game (for example, the final game) during the continuous effect execution is performed. ), The state transition lottery can be performed using a lottery table that is better than the normal state transition lottery. Specifically, the state transition lottery A performed in step S649 of FIG. 58 corresponds to the state transition lottery performed during the execution of the continuous performance. Further, the special state transition lottery performed in step S644 of FIG. 58 and step S684 of FIG. 59 corresponds to the state transition lottery performed using a table better than the normal state transition lottery in the specific game during the continuous performance execution. . In this way, in the slot machine 1, it is possible to perform state transition lotteries with different degrees of advantage during the execution of the continuous performance (including the end time). Not only can we expect (state transition lottery A), but in a specific game, we can expect state transition related to advantageous games (special state transition lottery) in a more advantageous situation. Therefore, while the continuous production is presenting, the player is expected to not only expect the result of the advantageous game transition indicated by the continuous production but also to win the future advantageous game by the state transition. This is effective in maintaining the player's willingness to play.

  In particular, when the specific game where the special state transition lottery is performed is the final game of the continuous production, whether or not to win the transition to the advantageous game in the superior special mode in the game when the transition to the special mode is made Not only can the game be entertained by the player, but also in the pre-transition game, until the final game of the continuous production, the player is entertained whether or not the game will be shifted to an advantageous game (AT transfer) depending on the result of the continuous production. Therefore, the interest of the player can be particularly enhanced.

  In addition, in the slot machine 1, when the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, the state at the start of the game of the next game of the final game in which the continuous effect is executed (for example, at the start operation of the start lever 210) You may make it perform a transfer lottery. In such a case, as in the case where the final game of the continuous production as described above is a specific game in which the special state transition lottery is performed, the game is shifted to the advantageous game depending on the result of the continuous production until the final game of the continuous production. (AT transition) Whether or not (AT transition) will be enjoyed by the player, even if the continuous production ends as a result of failure, the special state transition lottery that can transition to the special state is performed thereafter, which is advantageous Since it is possible for the player to entertain whether or not to win the advantageous game in the special mode, it can be expected that the player's expectation will be maintained over a long period of time and the interest will be particularly enhanced.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, when the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, a screen display such as “Preparing for continuous production” or “Now draw a rare role?” Is performed during the special mode. Even if the continuous production in the precursor game executed before the transition to the special mode ends in a failure result, the player can greatly expect that the precursor game and the continuous production will occur again. The discouragement of the player due to the failure result can be suppressed.

  When the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed in the slot machine 1, the “special mode” is not a simple presentation mode, but a winning probability related to a special game or a special state (for example, an AT first hit probability). This is a preferential mode. For example, in the case of the instruction function generation process described with reference to FIG. 58, FIG. 59, etc., if the winning combination is “rare role” in the “special mode”, the preferential treatment such as always winning at the first AT Measures are in place. In addition, in the “special mode”, since the probability that the precursor effect (which may be read as a continuous effect here) is set to be high again, the expectation of AT winning due to the reoccurrence of the continuous effect may be increased. it can. As for the gaming state controlled in such a “special mode”, the following cases are conceivable in the case of the AT instruction function generation processing described in [11-3-3-1].

  The first case is a case where a state that can be shifted only when a specific condition is satisfied and a state that is selected using a dedicated lottery table are set. Specifically, the “special modes 1 to 3” shown in FIG. As described in the explanation of FIG. 63 and the like, “special states 1 to 3” can be shifted only when a specific condition in the precursor game is satisfied, and is selected using a dedicated lottery table. The AT lottery game state. In the slot machine 1, when a special special gaming state is set in the “special mode” as described above, a special gaming state that is not selected in other situations can be used. The superiority of the game to be played can be made extremely high.

  The second case is a case where not only when the specific condition is satisfied but also any state that can be shifted from the normal time is set. Specifically, for example, the “ultra-high accuracy state” shown in FIG. The “ultra-high accuracy state” is an AT lottery game state that can be shifted from a normal state to a low-accuracy state and a high-accuracy state, but since it is the most advantageous state among them, It is also preferable as an AT lottery game state controlled in the “special mode”. When the “super high probability state” is selected by the state transition lottery performed in the predetermined game of the continuous effect, the game in the “special mode” is started. In the slot machine 1, by setting a specific game state that can be shifted from the normal time in the “special mode” as described above, an increase in the necessary memory area by preparing a new dedicated game state is suppressed. However, it is possible to realize a wide range of playability while suppressing the processing amount by the CPU 1110.

  Further, when the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, a predetermined lottery (specifically, a special state transition lottery in step S644 in FIG. 58 or step S684 in FIG. 59) is performed, so Although the mode can be shifted to the special mode, the degree of expectation as to whether or not to shift to the special mode may be displayed with points or the like to indicate to the player. In addition, the timing which gives a point etc. is not specifically limited. Further, such suggestion effects may be performed not by the main board 409 but by the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510). And when such a suggestion effect is performed, it can be expected to enhance the interest of the player with respect to the transition to the special mode.

  In the instruction function generation process of the first example, in the processing flow after winning the special state transition lottery shown in FIG. 58, FIG. When the control (i.e., transition to the special mode) is determined, the transition to the special mode is made immediately after the end of the continuous production. Further, as described above, in the special mode, the state is controlled to a state (a more advantageous state) different from that before execution of the continuous effect. In this way, by immediately shifting to the special mode after the continuous performance, the slot machine 1 can change the expectation level of the game before and after the execution of the continuous performance, and suppress the decrease in the player's expectation. it can. In particular, when the degree of expectation is higher after execution than before execution of the continuous performance, the player's sense of expectation can be strongly maintained.

  Further, in step S644 of FIG. 58 and step S684 of FIG. 59, the processing example in which the special state transition lottery is performed when the number of remaining predictive games at the time of the gaze sign is 0 has been described. Since the continuous production (a part of the precursor production) is always performed, the situation where the number of remaining precursor games is 0 means the final game of the continuous production. According to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment as described above, the transition control to the special mode is determined in the final game of the continuous performance. In this case, the transition to the special mode (before the final game) ( In other words, since the losing due to the continuous performance is not confirmed and displayed, it is possible for the player to enjoy the possibility of the winning result due to the continuous performance (AT transition winning).

[11-3-3-3. Another example of instruction function generation processing (second example, third example)]
Next, another example (second example, third example) of the instruction function generation process in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. The instruction function generation processing of the second example and the third example is described in [11-3-3-1] mainly in terms of control processing of the gaming state (AT lottery gaming state) determined by the instruction function generation processing. Therefore, the configuration and processing similar to those of the first example will be omitted to avoid duplication, and differences will be mainly described. .

  FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the AT lottery gaming state in the instruction function generation process of each example. Specifically, FIG. 79A shows a transition example in the instruction function generation process of the first example, FIG. 79B shows a transition example in the instruction function generation process of the second example, and FIG. C) shows a transition example in the instruction function generation process of the third example. FIG. 79 shows the gaming state (AT lottery gaming state) controlled along with the passage of time and the expected degree thereof. The degree of expectation here is mainly the degree of expectation related to special game winning (AT transition). In FIG. 79, the higher the value in the vertical axis direction, the higher the expected value, and the lower the value is expected. Means a low value. A plurality of points (a1 to a5, b1 to b5, c1 to c7) in the figure indicate characteristic timings in the respective transition examples. In the following, characteristic game state control in the instruction function generation process of the second example and the third example will be described, respectively, in comparison with the game state control in the instruction function generation process of the first example.

  First, the transition of the AT lottery gaming state in the instruction function generation process of the first example will be described along the transition example shown in FIG. 79A while showing the correspondence with the processes of FIGS. In FIG. 79 (A), the game is started from a normal gaming state where the AT is not won (the internal AT is not won), and at this time, the AT lottery gaming state is controlled to the low probability state. Then, in a1 in the middle of the normal gaming state, the result of the state transition lottery (step S639 in FIG. 58), the AT lottery gaming state has shifted to the high probability state.

  After that, the game progresses in the normal gaming state, and in a2, the winning game (precursor game A) is started by winning the predecessor lottery (step S633 in FIG. 58) by selecting the winning combination of the rare role. It was. However, the precursor game A started at a2 is assumed to be a preceptive player who has not won the first AT. When the auspicious game A is started at a2, the state transition lottery A is performed for the AT lottery game state transition (step S638 in FIG. 58).

  In the slot machine 1 in which the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, the transition of the AT lottery gaming state is not particularly different from the normal gaming state while the precursor game A by the gaze precursor is performed. In a3, the number of precursor games determined by the precursor game number lottery (step S635 in FIG. 58) elapses and the precursor game A ends, but the special state transition lottery performed at the end (step S644 in FIG. 58). If the player has won the transition to the special mode, the AT lottery gaming state is controlled to the special state (any one of the special states 1 to 3) and the special mode game is immediately started (FIG. 58). Step S648). It should be noted that while being controlled in the special mode, the game is played in a state of higher advantage than the normal state (low accuracy state, high accuracy state, ultra high accuracy state) until then [11-3-3. -1].

  Next, in a4, it is assumed that in the special mode game started from a3, the precursor game (predictor game B) is started when the winning combination of the rare role is selected (step S666 in FIG. 59). Note that the precursor game A that starts at a4 is a precursor to the game that has not been won at the first AT. When the prelude game B of the Gase precursor is started at a4, the transition of the AT lottery game state is controlled to the hell state by turning off the special state flag and turning on the hell state flag (FIG. 59). Steps S669 and S670).

  When the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, in the game controlled to the hell state, the first AT lottery is not won (or a lottery table that is difficult to win is used), and the number of precursor games is drawn. The precursor game B is executed for the number of precursor games determined in (step S664 in FIG. 59).

  In a5, the sign game B is ended, and the AT non-winning result is notified by the sign effect (continuous effect) in the final game, and thereafter, the normal game state is restored. In the case where the precursor game B is the present precursor when the first AT game is won, the transition to the AT game (AT winner) is notified at a5, and then the AT game is started.

  Next, the transition of the AT lottery gaming state in the instruction function generation process of the second example will be described along the transition example of FIG.

  In the instruction function generation process of the second example, when the execution of the expected effect over a plurality of games indicating whether or not the transition to the advantageous gaming state is determined, the expected effect is determined by the internal lottery performed during the execution of the expected effect. It is characterized by suppressing the establishment of another opportunity that can lead to execution. In the slot machine 1 in which the instruction function generation process of the second example is performed, when an expected effect is executed in response to a certain internal lottery result, the execution form is determined with respect to the expected effect determined to be executed. In order to suppress the influence received, whether or not to execute the expected effect is determined based on the result of the internal lottery such as the winning combination lottery, it is possible to realize the purpose of handling the result of the internal lottery.

  In the instruction function generation process of the second example, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), when the execution of the expected effect is determined as a specific control example of the gaming state for realizing the above purpose, Then, the lottery state is controlled to a low expectation state (for example, a hell state) at a predetermined timing thereafter to suppress the transition to the advantageous gaming state.

  First, the process of b1 shown in FIG. 79B is the same as a1 of FIG. Next, in b2 of FIG. 79 (B), the winning game A of the Gase precursor is started by winning the precursor lottery (step S633 of FIG. 58) by selecting the winning combination of the rare combination. Here, in the instruction function generation process of the second example, the AT lottery game state is controlled to a low-expected state (specifically, for example, a hell state) while the predictive game A is performed by the gaze precursor. By controlling to the hell state, even if the rare role is selected in the internal lottery of the winning role performed during the precursor game A, it is possible to prevent the selection of the AT winner, the execution of the new precursor game, or the like. .

  Then, in b3, when the number of precursor games determined by the precursor game number lottery (step S635 in FIG. 58) has elapsed and the precursor game A ends, a special state transition lottery (step S644 in FIG. 58) is performed at the end. If the player has won the transition to the special mode, the AT lottery game state is controlled to the special state (any one of the special states 1 to 3) and the game in the special mode is immediately started (step S648 in FIG. 58). . Note that during the special mode, the game is performed in a state of higher advantage than the normal state (low accuracy state, high accuracy state, and ultra high accuracy state) until then, in the instruction function generation process of the first example. It is the same.

  Thereafter, when the execution of the precursor game B is decided during the game in the special mode, the precursor game B is started at b4, and when the precursor game B ends at the end of the precursor game B at b5, The result (AT not won / AT won) is shown. Since this series of processing is the same as a4 and a5 in FIG. 79A, description thereof is omitted.

  Note that the instruction function generation process of the second example is not limited to the process of realizing the transition example shown in FIG. 79 (B). Other processing that can control the gaming state so as to make it difficult to win the advantageous gaming state with respect to the execution period of the warning effect and the continuous effect).

  Further, when the instruction function generation process of the second example is performed, the slot machine 1 relates to the gaming state at least at a predetermined timing from when the execution of the expected effect is determined until the expected effect ends. The lottery state can be lowered to a low expectation state.

  Next, the transition of the AT lottery gaming state in the instruction function generation process of the third example will be described along the transition example of FIG.

  In the instruction function generation process of the third example, when an expected effect indicating whether or not to shift to the advantageous gaming state is being executed, an advantageous winning combination with high expectation regarding the advantageous gaming state (corresponding to a “highly expected role”). When, for example, a rare role is selected as a winning role, it is possible to execute another expected effect triggered by the selection of an advantageous winning role while teaching the result of the expected effect. It is characterized by doing. In the slot machine 1 in which the instruction function generation process of the third example is performed, when an expected effect is executed in response to an internal lottery result, the execution mode of the expected effect is based on another internal lottery result. For example, if another winning effect is selected based on the result of another internal lottery, both the expected effect and the other expected effect are It is a gaming machine that can realize such a respected control.

  In the instruction function generation process of the third example, as a specific control example of the gaming state for realizing the above-mentioned purpose, as shown in FIG. When execution of another expected effect is decided during (the later expected effect), the execution of the previous expected effect is continued, the result of the expected effect is displayed at the end, and the later expected effect is displayed. To be executed.

  First, the processing of c1 shown in FIG. 79C is the same as c1 of FIG. Next, in c2 of FIG. 79 (C), a winning sign A of the gaseous sign is started by winning the predecessor lottery (step S633 of FIG. 58) by selecting the winning combination of the rare combination. Here, in the instruction function generation process of the third example, special transition control (specifically, hell) is performed as in the instruction function generation process of the second example with respect to the AT lottery game state while the precursor game A by the gaze precursor is performed. For example, it is assumed that the state transition lottery A is performed in the same manner as the instruction function generation process of the first example.

  Thereafter, it is assumed that the winning combination of the rare combination is selected in c3 during execution of the precursor game A. At this time, in the instruction function generation process of the third example, if the precursor lottery based on the rare role is performed and the new precursor game (precursor game C) is won by the precursor lottery, the execution of the precursor game C is executed. A process of delaying at least after the precursor game A is completed is performed. At this time, the number of precursor games is also drawn for the precursor game C, but the selected number of precursor games is set in variable data different from the number of precursor games corresponding to the precursor game A currently being executed. In addition, the sign game C is a Gase sign that is not won at the beginning of AT, and a state transition lottery (for example, state transition lottery A) based on a rare role is performed in c3. Assume that you have been promoted to a highly accurate state.

  Then, in c4, the number of precursor games determined by the precursor game number lottery (step S635 in FIG. 58) elapses and the precursor game A ends. At the end, the result of the precursor game A (AT Non-winning transition) is taught. Thus, the precursor game A is ended at c4, but the precursor game C is started because the precursor game C whose execution is delayed at c3 is stocked. In FIG. 79 (c), when the precursor game A is started from the end of the precursor game A, no special lottery is performed regarding the AT lottery game state.

  As one of the processes included in the instruction function generation process of the third example, a predetermined connection period may be provided between the end of the precursor game A and the start of the precursor game C in c4. In addition, it is possible to perform a roaring effect that can guess the start of the precursor game C in the connection period.

  Then, the prelude game C of the prelude game is played until the predecessor game number determined in the predecessor game number lottery elapses, and the result of the AT non-winning is announced by the prelude effect (continuous effect) at the end. In c5, if the special state transition lottery is performed at the end of the precursor game C and the transition to the special mode is won, the AT lottery gaming state is controlled to the special state (any of special states 1 to 3). The game in the special mode is started immediately.

  Next, when the execution of the precursor game (precursor game B) is determined in c6 in the special mode game started in c5 in response to the selection of the winning combination of the rare role, etc., the precursor game B is Be started. Then, as shown in c7, in the case where the precursor game B is a preceptive game B, the AT non-winning result is notified by the precursor effect (continuous effect) at the end of the number of precursor games, and then the normal game state is restored. . If the precursor game B is the precursor, the transition to the AT game (AT winning) is announced at c7, and then the AT game is started.

  Supplementing such processing of FIG. 79 (C), when the rare role that triggers the execution of the precursor game C is won during the execution of the precursor game A (gase precursor), the number of precursor games determined in advance is The precursor game A is continued without being changed, and after the precursor game A is ended, the precursor game C is started. Specifically, for example, when the number of precursor games of the precursor game A is determined to be 16 games, even if the rare game is won in the tenth game (the remaining six games), the remaining six games are the precursor game A. Continued.

  Note that the instruction function generation process of the third example is not limited to the process of realizing the transition example shown in FIG. 79C, but is based on “expected effects (corresponding to precursor effects and continuous effects in the precursor game). Other processes such as making it possible to execute another expected performance triggered by the selection of an advantageous winning combination (highly expected combination, rare combination) while teaching the result may be used. Hereinafter, some other processing examples will be described.

  First, in the instruction function generation process of the third example, when an opportunity that leads to the execution of another expected effect is established during the execution of the expected effect (the rare role that determines the execution of the precursor game C during the execution of the precursor game A) In the case of winning), the number of precursor games in which the precursor game C is executed may be drawn in the established game as described in FIG. 79 (C), or the previous expected effect (the precursor game A The sign game number lottery may be performed when the sign effect) ends.

  In FIG. 79 (C), when the execution of another gase precursor (precursor game C) is determined when a highly anticipated role (for example, a rare role) is won during the gase precursor (predictor game A), It is assumed that the precursor game C is executed in such a manner that the precursor of the gasse is reset after the end of the preceding gasse precursor. However, in the case of winning the rare part multiple times during the precursor of the gasse, If the precursor game (Gase precursor) is reset for an AT-winning rare role), the precursor game may continue indefinitely. In the instruction function generation process of the third example, in order to solve such a problem, if a high expectation role is won multiple times in the precursor game (especially during the precursor of the gasses), the precursor game (the precursor of gasses) to be reset The upper limit number of times may be limited. As a specific processing example for limiting the upper limit number of precursor games (Gase precursors) to be reset when a high-anticipated role is won multiple times during one precursor game (Gase precursor), Until it is reached, it may be processed so as to determine the resetting of the precursor game every time a highly anticipated role is won. Processing may be performed so as to determine the number of precursor games to be reset within the range of the number of times. In addition, although the upper limit number can be set to any number, since the Gase precursor teaches an unfavorable result for a player who is not elected AT, the upper limit is also used to prevent the unfavorable result from being repeatedly taught. It is desirable to set the number of times to a minimum of 1.

  In addition, in the instruction function generation process of the third example, a strong system such as a strong cherry, a strong watermelon, a strong chance eye, etc., which has a particularly high expectation among the high expectation roles, is shown during the harbinger. If the winning combination is won a plurality of times, it may be forcibly reset after the end of the current gasse precursor. More specifically, when a strong rare role is won multiple times in the middle of the precursor game A, even if the execution of the precursor game C is not determined by the precursor lottery based on each strong rare role winner, After the completion of A, the precursor game C may be forcibly executed. It should be noted that the number of times of winning the top highly anticipated role for forcibly resetting the precursor game can be set to any number between one and a plurality of times.

  In addition, in the instruction function generation process of the third example, the presentation mode in the precursor game (precursor game C) set after the end of the gaze precursor game (precursor game A) is displayed in the same presentation mode as the simple precursor game. You may make it appear, but you may make it appear in the production | generation aspect which can make the relation with the precursor game A feel.

  For example, the precursor game C may be executed while showing as if the precursor game A is continuing. In such a case, it is possible to respect the game period allocated to both of the precursor games A by not deleting the numbers of the precursor game A and the precursor game C, and it is apparent that the precursor game A is more than usual. Since the game can appear to be extended to a long number of games, it can be expected to maintain and improve the player's expectation as a special situation.

  Further, for example, the sign game C may be started after the result of the sign game A is always displayed by a continuous effect (can be replaced with the sign effect). In such a case, the winning combination (internal lottery result) that triggered the execution of the precursor game A is cherished by performing an effect (continuous effect) for determining the result of the precursor game A, and thereafter Since the effect (continuous effect) for determining the result of the precursor game C is performed at another timing, the winning combination that triggered the execution of the precursor game C can be cherished. In the instruction function generation process of the third example, from the viewpoint of valuing the internal lottery result, this stage is more than the presentation mode (the precursor game C as if the precursor game A continues). It is desirable to control the performance mode shown in (1) (successfully teaching the result of each precursor game).

  In addition, in the instruction function generation process of the third example, when the execution of the precursor game C is determined during the execution of the precursor game A as described above, the precursor game C is reset in such a manner that the precursor game is reset after the precursor game A is ended. The period from when the execution of the precursor game C is determined until the number of remaining games of the precursor game A is consumed (for example, when the precursor game A is determined to be 16 games, Results display for each of the precursor games A and C based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination (the display of whether or not to shift to AT) for the remaining six games for the precursor game A when execution of the precursor game C is determined The time period may be shortened to a predetermined extent within a range that does not hinder. In the previous specific example, when the number of remaining games of the precursor game A is six games, this corresponds to changing the number of remaining precursor games so that the precursor game A is completed in three games. By performing the instruction function generation process of the third example as described above, it is possible to execute an expected effect based on each internal lottery result (corresponding to the precursor effect appearing in the precursor game) and teach the display of the result. be able to. Then, by shortening the running precursor game (precursor game A), it is possible to advance the start time of the precursor game (precursor game C) to be reset. Expectation production can enhance the interest of the player.

[11-3-3-4. Effect of instruction function generation process of second example]
According to the slot machine 1, by performing the instruction function generation process of the second example, the “advantageous game advantageous to the player under any one of a plurality of lottery states having different winning expectations” In the gaming machine in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state in which the game is executed is lottery and the expected presentation indicating whether or not the transition to the advantageous gaming state is appropriate based on the result of the lottery is executed over a plurality of games. Is determined, it is possible to realize a gaming machine that can change the appearance ratio of the expected effect so as to suppress the influence of the execution mode of the expected effect in the game after the determination. is there.

  The “advantageous game state” corresponds to the “AT state” in the instruction function generation process of the second example, and similarly, the “expected effect” corresponds to the “predictive effect”. In the instruction function generation process of the second example, the hell state flag is turned on when the start of the precursor game period in which the precursor effect is performed is determined (steps S666 and S674 in FIG. 59) (step in FIG. 59). (S670) By doing so, the hell state is controlled during the precursor game. When controlled to the hell state, winning at the beginning of a new AT is suppressed (see FIG. 63). At the time when the start is determined, it is possible to suppress the influence of the execution mode (which also determines that the precursor effect is always executed). In other words, by suppressing the winning of the first AT in the hell state, the appearance of a new precursor game is also suppressed, so that the appearance ratio of the precursor effect is made variable. As a result, during the precursor game, no new precursor game is generated, and the precursor effect related to the precursor game being executed can be displayed in the execution mode at the time of execution decision.

  Further, the “game machine that can be realized by performing the instruction function generation process of the second example” described above is more specifically described as “one of the lottery states among a plurality of lottery states having different winning expectations”. The transition to the advantageous gaming state where the advantageous game advantageous to the player is executed is drawn, and an expected effect indicating whether or not the transition to the advantageous gaming state is successful is executed over a plurality of games based on the result of the lottery. In the gaming machine to be executed, when the execution of the expected effect is determined, the lottery state is controlled to a low expectation state among a plurality of lottery states having different winning expectation levels at a predetermined timing thereafter to enter the advantageous gaming state. It can also be said that by suppressing the transition, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the expected effect regardless of the winning combination in the subsequent games. At this time, the “low expectation state” corresponds to the “hell state”.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine, when a continuous presentation over a plurality of games is executed, the player's interest concentrates on the presentation, so the inside of the winning combination performed in each game during the presentation There was a tendency to be obscured by the results of the lottery.

  In addition, in conventional gaming machines, an internal lottery of a winning combination is performed even during continuous performance, but depending on the result of the winning combination in the internal lottery (for example, a high expected winning such as a rare role) If a role is selected), a new production will be generated and the current production will be canceled, or another new production will not be generated to continue the current production. However, there is a problem that the execution mode of continuous effects may be affected, and the player's expectation regarding these effects changes (mainly decreases).

  More specifically, when the previous effect is canceled, it is known that the previous effect is a result of losing at that time, and the player's sense of expectation decreases. In addition, when the subsequent performance is not generated, the player's sense of expectation is also expected because the result that the highly anticipated winning role is selected but the result that the winning lottery to AT or other advantageous games is lost is presumed. Decreases. Also, if the previous production is rounded up and the later production occurs, the result display due to the rounded-up production is likely to be random, so the player's expectation is also rounded down. There is a risk that.

  However, according to the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generation process of the second example is performed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that carefully handles the results of the internal lottery in each game. More specifically, when it is determined that the precursor game (especially the Gase precursor) is to be executed, a low probability state (hell state) at a predetermined timing thereafter (for example, the timing when the precursor game flag is turned ON). ), The result of the internal lottery performed during the precursor game can be prevented from leading to a sense of expectation for the special game. In other words, this is to provide a game situation (direction situation) that does not confuse development contents based on each lottery result by a plurality of lottery opportunities, and thus has the effect of treating the result of the internal lottery in each game. Can do.

  When the instruction function generation process of the second example is performed in the slot machine 1, the “predetermined timing for dropping to a low-probability state (hell state)” can be classified as follows, and each has an effect. I can expect.

  First, if the game immediately after the execution of the Gase Predictor is decided, or the predetermined timing to drop the start game of the Gase Predictor to a low probability state (hell state), during the subsequent game (before moving to the Gase Predictor) (Even if some kind of preparation period is provided) No matter what the winning role is won, the expectation of the special game by the winning role can be suppressed, and it became a judgment factor of the running gaze precursor The importance to the winning combination can be ensured, and the player's sense of expectation for the result of the running sign can be ensured.

  In addition, when it is a predetermined timing to drop somewhere during the execution of the gaze precursor to a low probability state (hell state), at least by the winning combination in the internal lottery after dropping to the low probability state, Since it can suppress that a player's expectation changes, it can contribute to ensuring the performance execution which attached importance to the result of the internal lottery in each game. Here, in the second example instruction function generation process (see [11-3-3-3]), in addition to “continuous presentation (or precursor presentation)”, “roughness presentation” and “ For example, if these three types of performances are performed with a harsh precursor, the player will have a precursor when the “normal performance” appears. You may not be able to detect that the game is a game, but even before the “continuous production (or prelude production)” appears, it is assumed that the game is a prelude game when the “roughness production” appears. Can do. However, if the player can guess that the game is a precursor game and then drop it to a low probability state, the player's expectation may be reduced if he wins a rare role during that time. When the predetermined timing for dropping somewhere in the low probability state is used, it is preferable to set at least the time when the “roughness effect” appears.

  Further, when the instruction function generation process of the second example is performed, the slot machine 1 has a higher expectation level than the normal game state in order to suppress the influence of the execution aspect of the expected effect (prediction effect) to be executed. There is a period for forcibly dropping to a low low probability state (hell state). In this way, when the ball is forcibly dropped to the low probability state, the payout rate decreases as a whole, so that the slot machine 1 cancels the decrease, so that the high probability state (for example, the high probability state or the ultra high probability state). (Probability) period / probability can be increased, the probability of first hit when a rare role is drawn can be improved, and the probability of winning a rare role can be improved. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generation process of the second example is performed, a gaming machine that carefully handles the result of the internal lottery is provided and the situation advantageous to the player is raised and strengthened. Can do. In addition, the game play rate can be improved because the payout rate can be sharpened.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, when the instruction function generation process of the second example is performed, the appearance ratio of the expected effect is made variable so as to suppress the influence of the execution mode of the expected effect (prediction effect) to be executed. As described above, the processing is not limited to forcibly dropping to a low-probability state (hell state) with a lower expectation than usual for a predetermined game period. Other methods that make it difficult to win the advantageous gaming state (AT) for the gaming period may be used. Specifically, for example, the predetermined game period may be changed by changing the lottery table used for the lottery (the game state itself is changed), or is performed in the predetermined game period. About a game, you may make it suppress the frequency | count of execution of an internal lottery by making it seem that the some game is performed by pseudo | simulation game. Furthermore, another process that makes it difficult to establish a rare role that is likely to lead to the winning of the expected performance may be used. Even when such processing is performed, the appearance ratio of the expected effect can be made variable so as to suppress the influence of the execution mode of the expected effect in the game after the execution of the expected effect is determined. The slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generation process of the second example is performed can achieve the same effect as that in the case of controlling to a hell state for a predetermined game period.

[11-3-3-5. Effect of instruction function generation process of third example]
According to the slot machine 1, by performing the instruction function generation process of the third example, “an advantageous game advantageous to the player under any one of a plurality of lottery states having different winning expectations” In the gaming machine in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state in which the game is executed is drawn and the expected presentation indicating whether or not the transition to the advantageous gaming state is successful is executed over a plurality of games based on the result of the lottery, the expected presentation is executed. When an advantageous winning combination (for example, a rare role) that is easier to win than other winning roles is selected as the winning combination when transitioning to the advantageous gaming state, while teaching the result of the expected effect It is possible to realize a “gaming machine that can execute another expected performance triggered by the selection of an advantageous winning combination”.

  The “advantageous game state” corresponds to the “AT state” in the instruction function generation process of the third example, and similarly, the “expected effect” corresponds to the “predictive effect”, “continuous effect”, or “predictive game”. . In the instruction function generation process of the third example, when an expected effect (for example, the predecessor game A) is executed based on the internal lottery result (the lottery result of the winning combination), the highly expected player is selected during the execution of the expected effect. When the execution of another expected effect (for example, the precursor game C) is selected by selecting the combination, the precursor game A is continuously executed, and after the precursor game A is ended, the precursor game C is executed. Then, when the instruction function generation process of the third example is performed, the slot machine 1 teaches the result of the expected effect (a precursor game A), but also the expected effect (a precursor game C) due to the selection of the highly expected role. ) Can be executed separately, it is possible to realize control that respects both the previous expected performance and another expected performance, and maintain the expectation of the internal lottery results that triggered each expected performance. There is an effect.

  In conventional gaming machines, when a continuous performance over a plurality of games is executed, the internal lottery of the winning combination is performed while the continuous performance is being performed, but depending on the result of the winning combination in the internal lottery (For example, when a highly anticipated winning role such as a rare role is selected) to generate another continuous production and cancel the current continuous production or continue the current continuous production For example, another continuous production was canceled. In gaming machines in which such processing is performed, the result of each continuous performance is not sufficiently taught because a part of the continuous performance that could have occurred in each case does not appear, thereby reducing the interest of the player There was a risk of causing it. In addition, there is a problem that the result of the internal lottery that triggers the execution of the continuous production is delayed because a part of the continuous production that can occur is not displayed.

  On the other hand, when the instruction function generation process of the third example is performed, the slot machine 1 is based on the internal lottery results performed during the “first expected effect” and the “first expected effect” that are already being executed. By executing both expected performances and telling the player the results of each expected performance, the lowering of the player's interests can be suppressed. It has the effect of respecting not only the expected performance but also the results of the internal lottery.

  When the instruction function generation process of the third example is performed, as described above, the slot machine 1 respects both precursor games even if another winner game is won during the precursor game (gase precursor). However, in order to realize such control, it is not necessary to forcibly change the lottery state (AT lottery game state) related to the special game state during the execution of the precursor game. In other words, by enabling the sign game to be executed in a lottery state that is not different from the normal time before the start of the sign game, an expectation for AT winning and sign effect (continuous effect) that the player feels when winning a highly anticipated role Can be maintained. Then, by not forcibly changing the lottery state related to the special game state during the precursor game as described above, the special game state is extremely different from the case where the instruction function generation process of the first example or the second example is performed. It is possible to reduce the period that is difficult to win.

  Further, when the instruction function generation process of the third example is performed, in the slot machine 1, after the “previous gasse precursor” is executed after the “previous gasse precursor” ends, the first example and the second example are performed. As in the case where the instruction function generation process is performed, the transition to the special mode in which the expectation to the special gaming state is higher than before is made so that the interest of the player is reduced and the player's expectation is suppressed. The feeling can be maintained or improved over a relatively long period. In other words, even if a warning sign is continuously generated and the result of the loss of AT transition is taught, the player is then transferred to a special mode with a higher level of superiority, so that the player can at least until the special mode ends. I can continue to expect. In addition, when the rare role is won in the special mode, the player's expectation can be further enhanced by starting the precursor game again.

  Further, when the instruction function generation process of the third example is performed, the slot machine 1 is set when the high expectation role is frequently won during the precursor game (gase precursor) as shown in the derivative example. It is possible to reduce the number of signs of gas. According to such a slot machine 1, it is possible to control the player with respect to a plurality of expected effects (predictive effects), but to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player by avoiding a series of redundant gasses. .

  Further, when the instruction function generation process of the third example is performed, the slot machine 1 is compulsory at the time when a high-ranking promising role is won a predetermined number of times during the precursor game (Gase precursor) as shown in the derivative example. You can set a harse precursor. According to such a slot machine 1, since it is possible to increase the rate at which the precursor game is started with respect to the high expectation role with high original expectation, it is possible to produce an effect that values the internal lottery result of the high expectation role win Can be provided to the player.

  In addition, when the instruction function generation process of the third example is performed, the slot machine 1 re-starts when the winning combination is won a plurality of times during the precursor game (especially during the precursor), as shown in the derivative example. You may make it restrict | limit the upper limit frequency | count of the precursor game (gaseous precursor) set. According to such a slot machine 1, when the winning of a highly anticipated role is won a plurality of times in a short period of time during the precursor game, the precursor game is repeatedly set and the precursor game is over an excessively long period of time. It can be expected that the player's interest will be enhanced over an appropriate long period of time.

[11-3-4. Instruction function display processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 determines that the instruction function is to be generated as a result of the instruction function generation process (specifically, for example, at the time of selection of a small turn order in an AT game). The instruction content based on the winning combination of the game is displayed on the special display LED 612 as an instruction function display (instruction function display process). In the instruction function display process, the main board 409 selects a display form of the instruction function display to be displayed on the special display LED 612 from a plurality of display forms prepared in advance (for example, display data is held in the ROM 1112 or the like). . Hereinafter, the instruction function display displayed using the special display LED 612 will be described in detail.

[11-3-4-1. Instruction function display (first example)]
First, a first example of instruction function display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the first example, it is assumed that the slot machine 1 includes two 7-segment LEDs (special display LEDs 612a and 612b) arranged side by side as shown in FIG. 47, and 2 using the special display LEDs 612a and 612b. The indication function is displayed by displaying the letters and numbers.

  80 and 81 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the instruction function display of the first example. FIG. 80 shows a display mode of the special display LED 612a, and FIG. 81 shows a display mode of the special display LED 612b. In both FIG. 80 and FIG. 81, the “segment display” column shows the alphanumeric characters displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the “content” column shows the content that the displayed alphanumeric characters mean. Further, in FIG. 81, the “navigation display” field shows an outline of the display of the effect display (navigation display) on the image display body 500 or the like when the corresponding instruction function display is performed, and the “use usage” field shows the relevant display. The scene and situation in which the display is used is shown. The navigation display controlled by the sub board 510 will be described later in [11-3-5].

In the instruction function display of the first example, it is assumed that the following rules are provided as an example of the rules regarding the instruction function display.
(1) An instruction function is displayed using two 7-segment LEDs (7-segment) (special display LEDs 612a and 612b). The special display LED 612a displays information indicating an indication of the pressing position, and the special display LED 612b displays information indicating the pressing order.
(2) During the period in which the instruction function display is performed, the instruction function display is started at least before the reception of the pressing operation (reel stop operation) on the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started, and the last reel 301 being rotated The display on the special display LED 612 is switched from the instruction function display to the payout number display at the timing when the player's hand is released from the reel stop button 211 for which the reel stop operation corresponding to has been performed. That is, the instruction function display period and the payout number display period do not overlap. If no game value (medal) is paid out as a result of the game, that is, if the payout number is “0”, the payout number display may not be performed. As a supplementary requirement, if the instruction function display is performed and the payout number display is not performed, the instruction function display is canceled (hidden) at the same timing as when the payout number display is performed. The instruction function display may be continued until the payout process is completed.
(3) In a game in which the instruction function display is performed by the special display LED 612, when any reel among the rotating reels 301a to 301c is first stopped, the stopped reel displays the instruction function display ( When the special display LED 612b) is not the reel indicated as the first reel to be stopped (that is, when a reel different from the instruction content is first stopped), or when the reel stop button 211 is pressed, the instruction function is displayed. Even when the timing does not correspond to the position indicated by the special display LED 612a as an indication of the pressing position (that is, when the reel is stopped at a position different from the instruction content), all The display mode on the special display LED 612 is not changed until the stop operation on the reel 301 is completed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the instruction function is to be generated, the main board 409 determines what instruction contents are displayed on the special display LEDs 612a and 612b as the instruction function display in the game. To be determined based on the winning role. First, instruction contents that can be determined by the main board 409 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 (details will be described later).

  The main board 409 arbitrarily determines the instruction content within the range that does not deny the “appropriate pressing place” based on the winning combination of the game with respect to the instruction contents of the “approximate pressing place” displayed on the special display LED 612a. be able to. Specifically, for example, when “BB1 (red 7 symbol set)” is selected as the winning combination, the main board 409 determines an instruction content to display “2” (red 7 symbol) on the special display LED 612a. However, in addition to this, since the game method aiming at “Red 7 design” is not denied, the instruction content for displaying “0” (no designation) may be determined.

  In addition, the main board 409 uses the “appropriate pushing order” based on the winning combination of the game for the instruction contents of the “pushing order” displayed on the special display LED 612b as well as the instruction contents of the “standard of pressing place”. The content of the instruction can be arbitrarily determined within a range that does not negate the above. For example, it is assumed that an instruction function is generated in a game in which a push order bell (AT1, AT2) with a forward push as “appropriate push order” is selected as a winning combination. At this time, the main board 409 can determine the instruction content of “push order” to be “left / middle / right” (six choice push order), and according to the display example of FIG. 81 (details will be described later). “1” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. In addition, as the instruction content for clarifying only “left” of the first stop without clarifying the second stop and the third stop, “first left (2 choices)” may be used as the instruction content. According to the display example 81 (details will be described later), “A” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. In addition, from the condition that the “appropriate push order” is not denied, the instruction content of the push order only needs to include at least a game procedure based on the “appropriate push order”. That is, as the instruction content having the possibility of the first stop of the left reel 301a, “Left first or right first” (segment display “E” in FIG. 81) or “Left first or first in middle” (FIG. 81 may be the instruction content, or may be the instruction content for which the pressing order is unknown (the segment display “0” in FIG. 81).

  Next, the display examples shown in FIGS. 80 and 81 will be specifically described. First, referring to FIG. 80, as a guide for the pressing place, there are four types of “0 (no designation)”, “1 (chance symbol)”, “2 (red 7 symbol)”, “3 (BAR symbol)”. Numbers are set for display. When “0” is displayed as a guide for the pressing position, it means that the guide for pressing is not specified, that is, the operation at a specific stop timing is not instructed in the game. Even if there is a pressing operation (unspecified stop operation) of the reel stop button 211 without being aware of the stop timing, the symbol combinations based on some winning combination are not necessarily aligned on the effective line. In other words, in the case where the symbol combination based on the winning combination is surely stopped in the game in which “not specified” is selected, the predetermined stop timing that can prevent the winning combination from being missed as in the above-described maximum efficiency method. It is required to perform a stop operation. Specifically, for example, when the push order bell (AT1 to AT10) is won during AT, “0” is displayed on the special display LED 612a, but the push order bell is a stop operation by an appropriate push order. As long as there is, it is possible to arrange the symbol combination of bells regardless of the stop timing (without missing). On the other hand, for example, when “0” is displayed on the special display LED 612a when the winning combination is a role that may be missed depending on the stop timing (for example, a watermelon role), the stop timing is not considered. If the reel stop button 211 is pressed, the watermelon role may be missed. To ensure that the watermelon role is won, when the symbols that make up the watermelon role combination are within the range that can be drawn The reel stop button 211 needs to be pressed at an appropriate timing.

  Here, it is preferable that the symbol used as a guide for the pressing position is a symbol that is relatively easy for the player to visually recognize while the reel 301 is rotating. However, the stop operation is aimed at the symbol used as a guide at an appropriate timing. Even if it does, it is not always necessary to stop the symbol on the active line.

  Also, for the symbols corresponding to “1” to “3” shown in FIG. 80, the corresponding symbols may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the “chance symbol” that is the target of “1” may be a “right” symbol, a “righteous” symbol, or may be applied to other symbols. Further, the symbol “2” may be the “blue 7” symbol instead of the red 7 symbol. Note that the segment display shown in FIG. 80 is merely an example, and the segment display pattern can be increased or decreased within a range that can be displayed by the special display LED 612a. For example, you may add a segment display about symbols (for example, watermelon symbol) other than illustrated in FIG. In addition, the symbol set as a guide for the pressing location is not limited to one. For example, a segment display such as “either red 7 symbol or blue 7” is set as a guide for the pressing location. May be. Further, although common to FIGS. 80 and 81, the correspondence between “content” and “seg display” does not have to be one-to-one, and a plurality of “seg display” indicating the same “content” is prepared. May be.

  Next, referring to FIG. 81, 16 display patterns are set for display, and alphanumeric characters “0” to “9” and “A” to “F” are assigned as display contents of the segment display. . Below, the content which each display pattern means is demonstrated in detail. When displaying in 7 segments, capital letters “B” and “D” may be indistinguishable from the numbers “8” and “0”, respectively. It is decided to display with lowercase letters.

  The display “0” in the special display LED 612b is used when the pressing order is not limited (the pressing order is not asked). However, as described in the “Usage” column, it is not used only when the winning role is in any order, but when it is a winning role that can be won by alternative, the pushing order is taught. It can also be used when not. The winning combination of any push order includes not only push order bells and replays, but also low chances (rare roles) such as chance eyes, watermelons, and cherries. Therefore, when the instruction function display is performed when the rare role is won, the display on the special display LED 612b becomes “0”. At this time, the expected display such as “Chance!” And the rare role type display are displayed in the navigation display. You may make it perform. By performing such a display, it is possible to suggest or teach to the player that the game has a high degree of expectation different from normal. Also, in the latter case where the push order is not taught in the case of a winning combination that can be won by an alternative, the proper push order is not taught, so the navigation display example is "????" .

  The indications “1” to “6” on the special display LEDs 612b are used when the stop order of each of the three reels 301a to 301c is determined as an appropriate push order, and displays a so-called six-choice push order. Can do. When the 6-option push order is displayed on the instruction function display, at least the reel to be stopped first and the reel to be stopped second are taught in the navigation display. Thirdly, the reel to be stopped will be clear in the erasure law, but may be clearly indicated.

  In addition, the indications “7” to “9” on the special display LED 612b are used when it is determined as an appropriate pressing order which one of the three reels 301a to 301c should be stopped first. Thus, the so-called three-choice push order can be displayed. When the three-option push order is displayed on the instruction function display, the reel to be stopped first is taught on the navigation display.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49, etc., there are five choice push order bells. In such a case, in the three choice push order display, Since there are not enough display patterns, it is only necessary to use a 6-option push order display or only a part (only in the case of a middle push push order bell) to use a 3-select push order display.

  When the special display LED 612b displays the pressing order such as “1” to “9”, the largest payout occurs when the stop operation according to both the display on the special display LED 612a and the display on the special display LED 612b is performed. A game result that is advantageous to the player is provided, for example, a push order bell wins in a stop form corresponding to the number of sheets. As described above, in order to obtain a stop system with the largest number of payouts, it is necessary to perform a stop operation at an appropriate timing in the case of a winning combination that may be missed.

  Further, “providing a game result advantageous to the player” described in the previous paragraph includes “suppressing a game result that is disadvantageous to the player”. Hereinafter, a specific example will be described. For example, when a push order replay is prepared that stops different symbol combinations depending on the push order, and when a stop operation is performed according to a “specific push order”, the blue 7 symbol set stops Suppose you can. This blue 7 symbol set is used as one of the effects of teaching the addition when, for example, winning in the push order replay during AT and it is internally determined that the number of AT games will be added. To do. When the number of AT games is added at the time of winning of such push order replay, displaying the “specific push order” instruction function leads to the provision of “game results advantageous to the player”. On the other hand, if the instruction function is displayed when the number of AT games is not increased while winning the push order replay and the instruction function is displayed, it is assumed that the blue 7 symbol set is stopped by the stop operation according to the instruction. However, since the “game result advantageous to the player” that is the addition of the number of AT games is not provided, the “game result unfavorable to the player” is provided. In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, in order to suppress the provision of such “game result disadvantageous to the player”, when the number of AT games is not added at the time of the above-mentioned push order replay win, It is possible to display the instruction function so as to avoid the “order”. By playing the game according to such indication function display, a blue 7 symbol set that does not add the number of AT games will not appear, so that “a disadvantageous game result is provided to the player”. As a result, “a game result advantageous to the player is provided”.

  On the other hand, the displays “A” to “F” on the special display LED 612b are different from the cases where “1” to “9” are displayed, and “part” of the push order that can lead to a game result advantageous to the player. Used when displaying. For example, the display “A” only indicates that the left reel 301a should be stopped first, and does not indicate which of the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c should be stopped second. The player must select (2 alternatives) the reel to be stopped second. Also, for example, the display “d” indicates that the left reel 301a should not be stopped first, and does not indicate which of the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c should be stopped first. Even if an appropriate pushing order (for example, the middle reel 301b) is selected at the first stop, any of the remaining two reels 301 (in this case, the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c) is again rotated at the second stop. As a result, it is possible to select four options. If an appropriate push order is satisfied only by selection at the first stop, two alternatives can be made.

  As described above, when the order of pressing such as “A” to “F” is displayed on the special display LED 612b, even if the stop operation is performed according to the display content, the order of pressing is not necessarily the proper order. However, when an appropriate push order can be finally selected, a game result advantageous to the player is provided, for example, the push order bell wins in the stop form that has the largest payout number.

  The display examples on the special display LEDs 612a and 612b have been described above, but actually, the two-digit value obtained by combining these is displayed on the special display LED 612 to indicate the instruction content in the game. FIG. 89 to be described later shows a specific display example.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the instruction function display of the first example is performed, the instruction function display is performed in a display mode in which the instruction contents can be easily grasped. An appropriate reel stop operation can be executed while viewing the display LEDs 612a and 612b, and a more advantageous game result can be expected than when the instruction function display is not performed. In addition, by making it easier for a player to attract attention to a display device that displays such an instruction function, it is possible to create gameability that is not found in conventional gaming machines.

  In addition, the display examples as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81 do not necessarily require all the symbols and the pressing order as a guide for the pressing place, and the symbols and the pressing order are appropriately grouped. By adopting such a display example, it can be expected that the volume of data required for the main board 409 to display the instruction function is reduced.

[11-3-4-2. Instruction function display (second example)]
Next, a second example of instruction function display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the instruction function display of the second example, the slot machine 1 is provided with one dot-segmented 7-segment LED (special display LED 612c shown in FIG. 85), and the instruction function is displayed by displaying a predetermined pattern with the special display LED 612c. Display.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining a display device used in the indication function display of the second example. In the instruction function display of the second example, a 7-segment LED with dots (special display LED 612c) is used as a display for displaying the instruction function. As shown in FIG. 82, the special display LED 612c is configured by adding dot LEDs to a so-called 7-segment LED, and is a segment LED having a total of 8 lightable portions. FIG. 82 shows an example of the lighting rule of the special display LED 612c. The eight lightable parts are represented by each digit bit of data expressed in 8-bit binary number (in order from the lower order, 1 bit, 2 bits,. .., 8 bits). Therefore, by indicating the target data (instruction function display data) indicating the instruction content in 8-bit binary, the special function LED 612c can realize the instruction function display corresponding to the target data. Specifically, for example, when the second bit of the target data is set (the value of the second digit from the lower order is “1”), the lightable part indicated by “2 bits” in FIG. Is done. Such a display rule is merely an example, and for example, a predetermined process may be performed so that the value of the target data cannot be easily read.

83 and 84 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the instruction function display of the second example. In the instruction function display of the second example, it is assumed that the following rules are provided as an example of the rules regarding the instruction function display.
(1) An instruction function is displayed using one 7-segment LED with a dot (special display LED 612c). The special display LED 612c is turned on in correspondence with each digit bit of “instruction function display data” expressed in 8-bit binary number. As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, in the “instruction function display data”, the upper 4 bits (5 bits to 8 bits) hold information indicating the approximate location of the push (FIG. 83). Information indicating the pressing order is held in 4 bits (1 bit to 4 bits) (FIG. 84).
(2) Same as rule (2) regarding the instruction function described in the first example.
(3) Same as rule (3) regarding the instruction function described in the first example.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the instruction function is to be generated, what instruction contents are displayed on the special display LED 612c as the instruction function display is the same as in the first example. The board 409 is determined based on the winning combination in the game. Further, the specific instruction contents illustrated in FIGS. 83 and 84 correspond to the instruction contents illustrated in FIGS. 80 and 81, and thus the description thereof will not be repeated.

  First, the “segment display” shown in FIG. 83 will be described. FIG. 83 exemplifies a specific example of upper 4 bits indicating an indication of a pressing position in the instruction function display data. Specifically, “1” is set in the fifth bit when the standard of the pressing position is “not specified”, and “1” is set in the sixth bit when the standard of the pressing position is “chance symbol”. When the standard for the pressing position is “Red 7 symbol”, “1” is set at the seventh bit, and when the standard for the pressing location is “BAR symbol”, “1” is set at the eighth bit. It is done. Then, according to the lighting law shown in FIG. 82, the “segment display” corresponding to each “content” is performed in the special display LED 612c.

  Next, the “segment display” shown in FIG. 84 will be described. FIG. 84 illustrates a specific example of the lower 4 bits indicating the pressing order in the instruction function display data. Specifically, different instruction contents are set for each of 16 types of lower 4 bits “0000” to “1111”. Then, “seg display” corresponding to each digit bit is performed in the special display LED 612c.

  The upper 4 bits shown in “binary display” in FIG. 83 and the lower 4 bits shown in “binary display” in FIG. 84 are displayed in different digits. The data can be represented by binary 8-bit data that combines the upper 4 bits (FIG. 83) indicating the place of pressing and the lower 4 bits (FIG. 84) indicating the pressing order, and is indicated by the special display LED 612c. The function display can also display the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits simultaneously.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining a specific display example of the instruction function display of the second example. 85, a display example of the instruction function display displayed on the special display LED 612c based on the examples of FIGS. 83 and 84, and a table of the navigation display displayed on the image display 500 corresponding to the instruction function display. An example is shown. The details of the navigation display will be described in detail in the following [11-3-5] as the specific example of the instruction function display of the first example with reference to FIG. The description is omitted here.

  According to FIG. 1 shows a display example when the indication content is “not specified” (No. 0 in FIG. 83) and the push order is “unquestioned” (No. 0 in FIG. 84). Yes. At this time, in the special display LED 612c, a lighting display corresponding to the instruction function display data of binary number 8 bits “00010000” including the upper 4 bits “0001” and the lower 4 bits “0000” is performed, More specifically, only the lightable part corresponding to 5 bits is lit.

  Next, in FIG. No. 2 is a display example when the indication content is “not specified” (No. 0 in FIG. 83) and the pressing order is “left / right / middle” (No. 2 in FIG. 84). It is shown. At this time, the special display LED 612c performs lighting display corresponding to the instruction function display data of binary number 8 bits “00010010”, which is a combination of “0001” of the upper 4 bits and “0010” of the lower 4 bits, More specifically, the lightable part corresponding to 2 bits and 5 bits is turned on.

  Next, in FIG. 3, when the indication content is “red 7 symbol” (No. 2 in FIG. 83) and the pressing order is “first right (2 choices)” (No. 12 in FIG. 84). A display example of is shown. At this time, the special display LED 612c performs a lighting display corresponding to the instruction function display data of binary number 8 bits “01001100”, which is a combination of the upper 4 bits “0100” and the lower 4 bits “1100”. More specifically, the lightable part corresponding to 3 bits, 4 bits, and 7 bits is turned on.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the instruction function display of the second example is performed, the instruction function display is performed in a display mode that makes it difficult to grasp the instruction content at first glance. Even if the player notices that the instruction function display is performed on the display LED 612c, a new gameability is created that the instruction content cannot be immediately grasped. For example, it can be expected to have an effect of arousing curiosity for wanting to know the display rule of the indication function display in the special display LED 612c. Even if it is very difficult to grasp the instruction content from the display mode of the special display LED 612c, the player is instructed to perform a correct reel stop operation by performing the navigation display based on the instruction content. Thus, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can enhance the player's gaming interest when the instruction function display is performed.

  In addition, since the instruction function display as in the second example uses binary notation instruction function display data that is generally used in calculation processing, the main board 409 determines the instruction content of the instruction function, and the special function display data. It is possible to easily realize a display mode in which it is difficult to grasp the content of the instruction while reducing the processing load when the display LED 612 performs the instruction function display. More specifically, it is assumed that the condition device number registered in the program (number assigned to the group when grouped) is expressed in 8-bit binary numbers, and such a condition device number is displayed as an instruction function as it is. By making it possible to output the data as instruction data with the instruction function display, it is possible to suppress unnecessary conversion processing and reduce the processing burden on the main board 409. In such a case, it is possible to realize a display mode in which it is difficult to grasp the content of the instruction without changing the condition device number to another number.

  As described above, as illustrated in the first example and the second example, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can realize the instruction function display by employing various display methods under the management of the main board 409.

[11-3-4-3. Change display mode]
Next, the change of the display mode in the display (special display LED 612) on which the instruction function display is performed will be described.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1, the instruction content based on the winning combination can be displayed on the special display LED 612 as an instruction function display. Here, since the instruction content indicated by the instruction function display is a game method (that is, an appropriate reel stop operation) that can bring a result advantageous to the player, a game timing at which the player can execute the reel stop operation. The indication function display needs to be displayed by the time. In other words, when the instruction function display is performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the “appropriate reel stop operation” to be executed next at a specific timing before the pressing operation on the reel stop button 211 becomes acceptable. The correct instruction content (for example, to which reel stop button 211a to 211c should be used for the stop operation) should be displayed on the special display LED 612. In the change of the display mode of the special display LED 612, “specific timing” described later has such a meaning.

  By the way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, such a principle regarding the display timing of the instruction function display is applied to the special display LED 612, while the special display LED 612 is instructed as described in [9-3] and the like. Information other than the function display can also be displayed (for example, payout display, error display, other effects display, etc.).

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the instruction function display is performed on the special display LED 612, the display mode at the “specific timing” on the special display LED 612 is the “appropriate reel stop operation to be executed next”. As long as the instruction function display of the correct instruction content regarding “” is displayed, the display mode of the special display LED 612 can be changed to another display mode at a timing other than the above “specific timing”. Below, the change of the display mode in special display LED612 is demonstrated in detail.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the special display LED 612 as described in detail below, the display mode is changed before and after the change so that the player can easily notice the change. However, other than that, it is also possible to suggest or teach the change by using a component other than the special display LED 612 so that the player can easily notice the change. Specifically, for example, a predetermined display (LED, lamp, etc.) is turned on or blinked, a specific sound is output from a speaker, or “Look at special display LED 612!” On the liquid crystal display surface of the image display body 500. An effect screen such as this may be displayed. Further, when a predetermined effect screen is displayed on the image display 500, if the progress of the effect screen that has been displayed so far is temporarily stopped, the player can be more surely aware of the display change. Can be made.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed in a manner that is easily noticed by the player in this way, the player can be sure that the display mode has been changed (or changed). Since it can be recognized, the player is given an impression that a special production different from normal is performed, and an effect of increasing the player's expectation with respect to granting a special privilege or the like is achieved. In addition, it is possible to cause the player to expect that the instruction content displayed after the change is an instruction content that can lead to a more advantageous game result.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode may be changed so as to be easily noticed by the player as described above. On the contrary, the display mode is changed in a mode that is not easily noticed by the player. May be. Specifically, it is possible to change the display on the special display LED 612 in a manner that is not easily noticed by the player, without performing an effect for making the player easily noticed. More specifically, for example, by changing the display of “8” to “0” in the special display LED 612, the difference between the lighting positions before and after the change is relatively reduced, or a dot segment with a narrow lighting area is lit (flashing). Or, it may be changed to turn off the light, or the brightness of the segment may be changed (including a change in luminance level by gradation control in addition to simple ON / OFF switching).

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can realize an effect as if the display mode has been changed before the player notices when changing the display mode that is difficult for the player to notice. It is possible to give a big surprise to the player who notices the display change at any timing, and can enhance the game interest. Further, since it is possible to make the player aware of when the display mode is changed, the concentration on the game can be enhanced.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode is changed so that it is difficult for the player to notice when all the reels 301 are not stopped (all the reels 301 are rotating). However, it is desirable not to change the contents of the instruction regarding the first stop reel (the guide order of the reel 301 to be stopped first and the guide for the place to be pressed). When the display mode is changed in the special display LED 612, it is preferable not to change the instruction content related to the first stop reel in the instruction content by the navigation display on the image display body 500 or the like.

  In more detail, first, the reason why it is better not to change the instruction content of the pressing order is that if the instruction content related to the first stop reel is changed due to the change of the display mode, the player who does not notice the changed instruction content This is because the game is advanced in accordance with the instruction content before the change (game operation is performed in the push order contrary to the latest instruction content), which may be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, by not changing the instruction content related to the first stop reel, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player, and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  In addition, the reason why it is better not to change the instruction content of the indication of the pressing place is, for example, the instruction content A as if the condition device corresponding to the red 7 symbol assortment is operating (for example, the pressing order is reversed, the pressing When the display mode is changed after the display mode of red 7 symbols is generated and the display mode of red 7 symbols is displayed when all reels are stopped, the reel stop button is used for the first stop. 211 (in this case, before the reel stop button 211c is pressed according to the reverse pressing), the instruction content B (for example, the instruction content) indicating that another condition device that is not aligned even when aiming at the red 7 symbol is operating. Display mode of the same stop operation as A (the instruction content indicates that red 7 symbols cannot be aligned when the third stop reel is stopped) When thus altered, because it is not aligned even targeting Red 7 symbols would be known in advance to the player, there is a possibility that the game excitement is reduced. Therefore, in such a case, the display mode after the change from the instruction content A is the instruction content C that does not contradict the instruction content A (at least, the pressing order is the first stop of the right reel, and the indication of the pressing position is red 7) By including a symbol and displaying the display content of the instruction content that does not deny the possibility of red 7 symbols being aligned when the reels are fully stopped, it is displayed before the change until the player at least stops the right reel 301c for the first stop. It is preferable to be able to expect a game result (a red 7 symbol set) along the designated instruction content A.

  In addition, as a specific example of the display mode based on the instruction content C, there may be mentioned, for example, “the pressing order is reverse pressing, and the standard of the pressing position is a red 7 symbol or a BAR symbol”. In the case of such an instruction content C, the reel band 321c (right reel 301c) does not have a stop position where both the red 7 symbol and the BAR symbol can be drawn (see the symbol arrangement in FIG. 46). When the first stop is made, the player can select (select) either the red 7 symbol or the BAR symbol as a target of the pressing position. Then, when the condition device corresponding to the red 7 symbol alignment is operating internally, if the player performs a reel stop operation at a timing in which the player can draw the red 7 symbol in an appropriate push order, 7 Symbol alignment stops. In addition, if the condition device corresponding to the red 7 symbol alignment is not operated internally, or if the stop operation based on the proper pressing order and timing is not performed, the red 7 symbol alignment does not stop. It should be noted that the instruction content that allows the player to select the push location can be performed at the second stop and the third stop of the reel.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the change of the instruction content (a guide to the pressing position) regarding the first stop reel is not limited to the above example (change from the instruction content A to the instruction content C). As another example, the instruction content C may be changed to the instruction content A. In such a case, while the special display LED 612 shows the display mode of the instruction content C, only the indefinite information that the red 7 symbol alignment may be stopped by reverse pressing is provided. Confirmation information that red 7 symbol alignment is stopped by reverse pressing by changing to the display mode based on instruction content A before the operation on the stop reel is performed (freeze processing may be performed in parallel). Before the reel 301 is stopped, the player can be expected to grant a privilege by red 7 assortment.

  In addition, regarding the change of the instruction content regarding the first stop reel (the standard of the pressing position), as another example, the instruction content B may be changed to the instruction content A. In such a case, while the special display LED 612 shows the display mode of the instruction content B, even when the red 7 symbol is aimed by reverse pressing, the irregular determination information that does not stop the red 7 symbol alignment is provided. By changing to the display mode based on the instruction content A before the operation on the first stop reel is performed, the confirmation information that the red 7 symbol alignment is stopped by reverse pressing is provided. Here, when the display mode change from the instruction content B to the instruction content A is performed in a manner that is easily noticed by the player, for example, by performing freeze control, the player's interest is enhanced before the reel 301 is stopped. Can be increased. On the other hand, regarding the change of the display mode from the instruction content B to the instruction content A, when the display mode is changed in a mode that is difficult for the player to notice, Although it is assumed that the stop operation is performed, even in such a case, the red 7 symbols are aligned against the player's recognition that the red 7 symbols are not aligned after all the reels 301 are stopped. Can be surprised and delighted by the player, and can be expected to improve interest.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the instruction content related to the first stop reel is intentionally changed in accordance with the change of the display mode, the stop operation for the reel stop button 211 is accepted by inserting the freeze control or the like. It is desirable to prevent the player from performing an incorrect game operation that does not conform to the changed instruction content by postponing the start time of accepting the stop button press to start the game.

  As an example of such a display mode change, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game is played in a game procedure that was not originally intended (for example, a pushing order error), the player notices that. The display mode can be changed (including erasure) in a difficult mode (details will be described later in [11-3-4-3-1]). According to such a slot machine 1, the player can be prevented from being confused about the subsequent game procedure, so that the game can be continued with peace of mind.

  In a conventional gaming machine, for example, when controlled to an advantageous gaming state such as an AT state, an appropriate stop operation is taught by the image display 500 or the like, but this is a monotonous one that only repeats a game according to the teaching. There was a problem of being apt to work. On the other hand, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs an instruction function display for instructing a stop operation on the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409, and also makes the player aware of the display mode on the special display LED 612. Since it can be changed in an easy mode or a mode that is difficult for the player to notice, diversity can be added to the game effects of the slot machine 1 unlike conventional game machines.

[11-3-4-3-1. Display change timing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the instruction function is displayed, any timing that satisfies the condition that the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 is not accepted as an effective operation even if the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 is performed ( The main board 409 can change the display mode of the special display LED 612 at a timing when the reel stop operation cannot be accepted. Below, the typical change timing of such a display change is given and the specific process example accompanying a display change is demonstrated.

(1) Start lever pressed to start accepting stop button press First, as a typical first change timing, when the start lever 210 is operated at the start of the game (start lever pressed), the reel stop button 211a to Examples include a period until reception of a pressing operation for 211c is started (stop button pressing reception is started). Strictly speaking, instead of changing the display mode immediately before the start of accepting the stop button press, so that the player can notice the change of the display mode before starting the stop operation on the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c, It is preferable to change the display mode at a timing at which a certain time is secured before the start of the stop button press reception.

  In the slot machine 1, when the start lever 210 is operated, an internal lottery regarding the winning combination is performed by the main board 409, and the instruction content of the instruction function display is determined based on the lottery result of the internal lottery. When the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed at the first change timing described above, for example, the first display mode is displayed on the special display LED 612 at the timing after the start lever is pressed, and then the reel is stopped. Before the pressing operation on the button 211 can be accepted, the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed to the second display mode.

  At this time, it is more preferable to add freeze control during rotation control of the reel 301 and change the display mode of the special display LED 612 to the second display mode during execution of the freeze control. Thus, by changing the display mode during the execution of the freeze control, the display mode can be reliably changed during the period when the reception of the pressing operation to the reel stop button 211 is not started, and some special feature is given to the player. It is also possible to realize an effect that makes it easy to notice that an effect (in this case, a change in display mode) is performed.

  In such a case, the second display mode is required to be the display mode of the instruction function display indicating the correct instruction content related to the reel 301 to be stopped, while the first display mode is correct. The display mode may be an instruction function display that is not an instruction content, or may be a display mode other than the instruction function display. A specific display mode example will be described later in [11-3-4-3-2]. Further, another display mode may be displayed between the first display mode and the second display mode.

  As described above, when the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed at the first change timing, the display mode displayed on the special display LED 612 is changed at least once, so that a special effect is performed. Can make the player feel, and can enhance the gaming interest. In particular, when the display mode is changed during execution of freeze control, it is possible to further enhance the special feeling by sandwiching freeze control that is clearly different from normal reel control. In addition, if such a freeze control is performed when a lottery result with a high degree of rarity is obtained, the player's expectation can be significantly increased.

  Further, when the display mode is changed at the timing immediately before the first stop button press acceptance start in the first change timing, as described in [11-3-4-3], the first stop reel is used. It is desirable not to change the content of the instruction (firstly, the push order of the reel 301 to be stopped and the guide for the push position).

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the first change timing, the display mode is changed at an arbitrary timing within the period immediately after the start lever is pressed and immediately before the stop button press reception is started. be able to. In particular, when the display mode is changed at the “timing immediately before the start of first stop button press reception” in which it is difficult for the player to change the operation mode of the first stop button press, the instruction content regarding the first stop reel is maintained. However, a player's disadvantage can be avoided by changing a display mode. In addition, in the case where the display mode is changed at the “timing when a certain time is secured before the start of stop button press reception (including during freeze control)” in which the player can change the operation mode of pressing the first stop button, This change can increase the player's expectation.

(2) First stop button press to second stop button press acceptance start (or second stop button press to third stop button press acceptance start)
Next, as a representative second change timing, when one of the reel stop buttons 211 is pressed (for example, the first stop button is pressed), the reels corresponding to the remaining reels 301 that are rotating. Examples include a period until reception of the pressing operation of the stop button 211 is started (for example, reception of pressing of the second stop button is started). In the case of the second change timing, as in the case of the first change timing, if possible, a certain time is secured before the end of the period (for example, the start of accepting the second stop button press). It is preferable to change the display mode at the timing.

  When the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed at the second change timing, for example, after the game is started and the reel 301 starts rotating, the first stop button is pressed (one of the reel stop buttons 211 is pressed first). The first display mode is displayed on the special display LED 612 until it is operated, and the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed until the pressing of the remaining stop button is started after the first stop button is pressed. Change to the second display mode.

  As a specific situation in which the display mode is changed at the second change timing, a display change originally intended and a display change not originally intended are assumed. Here, since the first display mode is displayed immediately before the first stop button is pressed, it is necessary to display an instruction function indicating “correct instruction content” at least for the first stop button. . On the other hand, as described in detail below, the second display mode can employ different types of display modes depending on whether the display change was originally intended or not intended. .

  First, the display change that was originally intended is that the display pattern on the special display LED 612 is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode in advance by the main board 409 as the game progresses ( It means a display change when it is determined (at least before the first stop button is pressed).

  In the case of such originally intended display change, a period during which the pressing operation of the second stop button (remaining reel stop button 211) cannot be accepted by executing freeze control after the first stop button is pressed. It is preferable to change the display from the first display mode to the second display mode during the freeze control. At this time, in the second display mode, an instruction function display indicating “correct instruction contents” regarding the second stop button is displayed.

  Note that when the display change is originally intended, the instruction content indicated by the first display mode does not have to be the same as the instruction content indicated by the second display mode, for example, the instruction indicated by the first display mode. The content may be “group display” regarding the first stop button, and the instruction content shown in the second display mode may be “segment display” that can specify the pressing order of all reels. “Group display” will be described later in [11-3-4-3-2].

  When the instruction content indicated by the first display mode is the same as the instruction content indicated by the second display mode at the time of the display change that was originally intended, a different display mode indicating the same instruction content is used. The display may be changed. Different display modes indicating the same instruction content will also be described later in [11-3-4-3-2].

  Next, the display change that was not originally intended is performed by the main board 409 in advance (at least, the first stop button is pressed, for example, when it is performed in a game procedure in which the progress of the game is not assumed. It means that a display change that was not determined before) will be made. Specifically, when the reel stop button 211 corresponding to a reel different from the instruction content indicated by the instruction function display (in this case, the first display mode) is pressed when the first stop button is pressed, A so-called push order mistake can be considered.

  If a pressing order error occurs, for example, if a pressing order error occurs when the first stop button is pressed, the special indication LED 612 continues to display the instruction function until then for the remaining second stop button press and third stop button press. Even if it is displayed, there is a possibility that the gaming operation according to the instruction content cannot be performed. Specifically, for example, when the left reel 301a is stopped at the first stop even though the order of pressing “right, left, middle” is indicated as the instruction content, the instruction content is continued as it is. Then, the target reel to be stopped second becomes the left reel 301a that has already been stopped, which may confuse the player as to what kind of game should be performed. In such a case, the main board 409 of the slot machine 1 can be roughly divided into the following three types of control.

  The first control is control that continues to display the instruction function at this place even if a pressing order error occurs. In this case, it is not necessary to change the display from the first display mode to the second display mode. However, a second display mode with a special display mode that teaches that the pressing order is wrong is prepared, and when a pressing order error occurs, the display is changed to such a second display mode. May be. At this time, it is preferable that the image display body 500 or the like also notifies the player that a pressing order error has occurred. When such control is performed, even if the instruction content on the instruction function display is not changed, it is possible to clearly recognize that the push order has been mistaken, so that the instruction content on the instruction function display and the subsequent game Even if the procedure cannot be handled, the game can be proceeded with consent.

  The second control is a control for erasing the instruction function display that has been displayed so far when a push order error occurs. If such a control is also considered as one of the changes in the display mode, the change in the display mode eliminates the situation where the game operation according to the instruction contents cannot be performed, and prevents the player from being confused about the subsequent game procedure. can do. Further, after erasing the instruction function display in the first display form, the special display LED 612 may display a display form informing that the instruction function display is erased as the second display form. By changing the display mode in this way, the player can recognize the reason why the first display mode has disappeared, so that the continuation of the game can be promoted without causing concern about the subsequent game. Can do.

  In the third control, when a pressing order error occurs due to the pressing of the first stop button, the instruction function display is changed to the second display mode so that the instruction content indicating the operation procedure which is advantageous for the remaining stop operation is given. It is the control to change to.

  For example, as in the push order bells (AT1 to AT10) described with reference to FIG. 51, the winning combination in which the number of medals to be paid out is 9, 9, or 1 depending on the push order is won. When the instruction function display is performed, if the correct stop operation is performed in accordance with the original instruction content (first display mode), it is possible to expect to win nine medals by winning the bell role. However, if a push order error occurs and the reel stop button 211 different from the instruction content is firstly stopped, what happens to the subsequent two reel stop buttons 211 due to the priority operation of the condition device? Even if the stop operation is performed, it is not possible to expect 9 medals to be paid out. However, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even if such a situation occurs, an operation procedure that can be expected to pay out two medals is renewed as the second display mode as an advantageous operation procedure. The instruction function can be displayed.

  In a specific example, when winning AT10, there is an instruction content (“05” according to FIGS. 80 and 81) in which the indication of the pressing position is “no specification” and the pressing order is “right / left / middle”. It is assumed that it is displayed (first display mode). Here, if the player presses the reel stop button 211b in the wrong order, the cherry symbol or the BAR symbol stops on the effective line of the middle reel 301b (see FIG. 51). When the remaining reel stop operation is performed, the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c are stopped. Before the next reel stop button pressing operation can be accepted, for example, the BAR symbol is aimed at the right reel. The display mode is changed (second display mode) to the correct instruction content (“34” according to FIGS. 80 and 81). When the remaining reel stop operation is performed in accordance with the instruction content of the second display mode, the BAR stops on the effective line of the right reel 301c, and the bell 1 symbol or bell is displayed on the effective line of the left reel 301a. 2 symbols stop. As a result, when the symbol combination of the accessory 2 or the accessory 8 stops on the effective line, two medals can be paid out.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if a display change that is not originally intended is performed, the display mode is changed so that the instruction content is advantageous to the player even a little. It is possible to remedy a player who receives an unfavorable game result due to a push order mistake or the like. By providing a gaming machine capable of realizing such relief control, it can be expected to maintain the willingness to continue the game without excessively discouraging the player who has made a push order mistake.

  In the example of the push order bell described above, the maximum number of payouts (9) could not be expected when the push order was wrong with the first stop button, but in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the first Even if the order of pressing with the stop button is wrong, the remaining stop operation was performed aiming at a specific pattern and a specific pressing order in the form corresponding to each winning role of the pressing order small role as the pressing order of the rescue measure. In this case, a “relief push order” that can be expected for the maximum number of payouts may be prepared. If a push order error occurs, the player can change the display to the second display mode that uses such a relief push order as an instruction content, so that even if the push order is wrong, Since a medal acquisition opportunity can be provided, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming interests.

  Further, when the display on the special display LED 612 is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode by the third control described above, image output by the image display body 500, audio output by a speaker, etc. are used in combination. It is preferable to ensure that the player can detect the change.

  The above is the typical change timing when the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed when the instruction function display is performed, but the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to these change timings. As long as the operation of pressing the reel stop button 211 is not accepted, the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed at other timings (for example, after all reels 301 are stopped or after the payout process is completed). Can do.

  In this way, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment changes the display mode of the special display LED 612 according to the progress of the game at a predetermined change timing at which the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 is not accepted even during the game. Can be changed. In particular, even when a game operation that is not originally intended, such as a push order error, is performed, by changing the display mode of the special display LED 612 based on the game operation, appropriate instruction content for the next game operation Can be shown. As a result, even if an inappropriate game operation is performed unintentionally like a push order mistake, relief for the game can be provided, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machine, the player's line of sight tends to concentrate only on the reel and the effect display device (corresponding to the reel 301 and the image display body 500 in the slot machine 1), and the player's interest in the entire gaming machine. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode on the indicator (special display LED 612) in which the instruction function is displayed is changed at a timing when the reel stop operation by the player is not accepted. Therefore, the player's interest can be gathered for the display. As a result, it can be expected that the player's interest in the entire gaming machine is increased as compared with the conventional gaming machine by expanding the attention target by the player.

[11-3-4-3-2. Display change example]
Hereinafter, display change examples other than those described above will be given regarding the change in the display mode of the special display LED 612 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

(1) Display change between instruction function displays First, a display change example in which the display mode is changed between instruction function displays in the special display LED 612 will be described. As described above, in the instruction function display, one or a plurality of instruction function display modes may be set for one instruction content. Therefore, when the indication function display is performed on the special display LED 612, another display mode (for example, the above-described display mode) indicating the same instruction content as the display mode from the one display mode (for example, the above-described first display mode) is performed. The second display mode can be changed.

  86 and 87 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining display examples of instruction function display in which a plurality of display modes are set. “Seg display 1” and “Seg display 2” shown in FIG. 86 are examples of indication function display on the special display LED 612a, and “Seg display 1” and “Seg display 2” shown in FIG. 87 are special display LEDs 612b. It is an example of a display of instruction function display in. Note that “Seg display 1” in FIGS. 86 and 87 is the same as the display example of “Seg display” in FIGS.

  86 and 87, “Seg display 1” and “Seg display 2” are set as a plurality of display examples indicating the same instruction content in the special display LED 612 (special display LEDs 612a and 612b). Looking at the individual displays, the display examples “0” to “3” of “Seg display 1” in the special display LED 612a respectively correspond to “4” to “7” in the “Seg display 2” display example. 86. In the display example of “Seg display 2”, “F” to “0” are respectively corresponding to the display examples “0” to “F” of “Seg display 1” in the special display LED 612b. They are set in the reverse order of the case of segment display 1 (FIG. 87).

  When comparing “Seg display 1” and “Seg display 2”, the display on the special display LED 612 (the display combining the special display LEDs 612a and 612b) shows the instruction function display of the same instruction content. , The segment display will always be different. As a specific example, the display of “Seg display 1” and “Seg display 2” will be described when the indication of the pressing location is “Red 7 symbol” and the pressing order is “Right / Middle / Left”. First, in the case of “Seg display 1”, the special display LED 612a displays “2” corresponding to the guide position of the “red 7 symbol” and the special display LED 612b displays “right / middle / left”. “6” corresponding to the pressing order is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of “Seg display 2”, “6” corresponding to the guide position of “Red 7 design” is displayed on the special display LED 612a, and “Right, middle, “9” corresponding to the order of pressing “left” is displayed. That is, in the special display LED 612 as a whole, “26” is displayed in the case of “Seg display 1”, and “69” is displayed in the case of “Seg display 2”. Display.

  Then, “Seg display 1” and “Seg display 2” shown in FIGS. 86 and 87 are set to the first display mode and the second display mode described in [11-3-4-3-1]. Thus, the display mode of the special display LED 612 (612a, 612b) can be changed while the instruction function display indicates the same instruction content. In the specific example described above, the display mode “26” can be changed to the display mode “69”. In this way, by changing the display between display modes that are easy to identify, in the slot machine 1, the game is as if the instruction content shown on the special display LED 612 is changed at first glance to the player. Even if it is possible to realize an effect, and even if the instruction content before and after the change of the display mode can be grasped, when the display mode is changed with the same instruction content, a special effect is performed An impression can be given and the expectation with respect to a game result can be heightened.

  Further, as another example of the display change between the instruction function displays, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the instruction function display in the display mode (hereinafter also referred to as “clear display mode”) that can be easily identified, As shown in FIG. 83 and FIG. 84, using the instruction function display in a display mode that is difficult to identify (hereinafter, also referred to as “unclear display mode”), these are used as the first display mode and the second display mode. As an alternative, the display mode of the special display LED 612 can be changed. 80 and 81 use two 7-segment LEDs without dots, and FIGS. 83 and 84 differ in that one 7-segment LED with dots is used. If this is used, it is possible to display with a 7-segment LED without dots, so the influence of this difference is eliminated.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player changes the degree of clarity of the display mode in the special display LED 612 by changing the display between the “clear display mode” and the “unclear display mode”. This can increase the player's expectation for the game. In particular, when the display mode is changed from “unclear display mode” to “clear display mode”, clear information will be provided to the player, such as easier to grasp the contents of the instruction. , The player's expectation can be further increased.

  In addition, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform a display change that makes the display clarity of the special display LED 612 variable, so that the display change is performed in a manner that is easily noticed by the player. It is possible to give a strong impression to the player that various effects are occurring. Furthermore, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can make the player aware of the possibility that the display mode of the instruction function display may change for each game. There is an effect of increasing the interest in the LED 612 and enhancing the entertainment interest of the game.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the change of the display mode in the special display LED 612 is not limited to one change that changes from the first display mode to the second display mode. When a specific example is given with reference to FIG. 81, when the 6-select push order bell combination (AT7) with the reverse press as an appropriate push order is selected as the winning combination, the first display mode of the special display LED 612b is “ Assuming that “C” indicating the pressing order of “first right (2 choices)” is displayed, the period after which the display change timing condition as described in [11-3-4-3-1] is satisfied. , “C” and “6” are alternately displayed at high speed, and “6” indicating the pressing order of “right / middle / left” is displayed as the final second display mode. It may be. When such a display mode change is performed, even if “C” is displayed on the special display LED 612b until the first stop button is pressed, the reel stop button 211c should be first stopped. Since there is no change, the instruction function display of the correct instruction content is performed. This is the same even if “6” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. If the display mode of the special display LED 612b is changed to “6” before the second stop button is pressed, it becomes clear that the reel stop button 211b should be secondly operated. Stop operation can be performed in the proper pressing order. On the other hand, if the display mode of the special display LED 612b remains “C” until the second stop button is pressed, the player can select the reel stop button for the second stop operation from one of the reel stop buttons 211a and 211b. However, if the display mode of the special display LED 612b is changed to “6” after that, an answer in an appropriate push order in the game is displayed (correct answer display).

  In addition, when the correct answer display regarding the stop operation is performed by changing the display mode in this way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display on the special display LED 612 is limited to an appropriate push order and the main correct answer display (for example, , Teaching whether or not the answer is correct) may be performed by a display (for example, the image display 500) managed by the sub-board 510. However, if the correct display is performed by changing the display mode of the special display LED 612 before all the reels 301 are stopped (before all the reels are stopped), the instruction content indicated as the correct stop operation in the changed display mode. However, there is a possibility of instructing a stop operation for a reel that has already been stopped. Therefore, it is desirable to change the display mode of the special display LED 612 after the reels are completely stopped to display an appropriate push order (correct push order), and to turn off the special display LED 612 after a predetermined time has elapsed. It is desirable to do. However, even if the reel 301 is stopped in a pressing order that is not correct, if there is a payout of medals (game value), the correct pressing order is not displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. It is desirable to make the special display LED 612 perform a payout display immediately after the reels are completely stopped. In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by performing the correct answer display process as described above, it is possible to entertain the player through the unit game while preventing a decrease in interest due to the answer being understood during the game. .

  In addition, when the display mode is changed with the high-speed change as described above, the display mode indicating the correct instruction content is included in the display modes to be changed at high speed, and finally any one of the display modes is changed. It may be displayed, or after a high-speed change is made in a state where a display mode indicating correct instruction content is not included, a display mode indicating correct instruction content may be finally displayed. If a plurality of types of change patterns for high-speed change are prepared, the degree of expectation can be made different depending on the change pattern, so that gameability can be improved. It should be noted that such a display mode change pattern is not limited to the “high-speed” change, and may be any change pattern that allows the player to recognize that the display mode has changed. Specifically, for example, the display mode may be switched every 0.5 seconds. Also, for example, the display mode is changed to the shortest time from when the start lever 210 is pressed to when the stop button is pressed (the time required when the wait timer is up and there is no so-called wait). Also good. Further, for example, assuming that the reel 301 has the farthest index position, the display mode may be changed according to the time required for the reel 301 to go around.

  Further, as another example of the display change between the instruction function displays, there is an example in which the grouped instruction function display display mode is used. Here, the “display mode of grouped instruction function display” means a display mode (group display) that is set in correspondence with a group, in which a plurality of instruction contents are grouped according to a predetermined rule. For example, it is possible to group instruction contents having the same reel (reel stop button) to be stopped first.

  FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining an example of the group display in the instruction function display. FIG. 88 shows a display example in the special display LED 612b, and descriptions other than the “group display” column are the same as those in FIG. According to FIG. 88, for the instruction content (specifically, Nos. 1, 2, 7, and 10) in which the reel to be stopped first is the left reel 301a, the group display “L” is performed. For the instruction content (specifically, Nos. 3, 4, 8, and 11) that the reel to be stopped is the middle reel 301b, the group display “c” is performed. With respect to the instruction content (specifically, Nos. 4, 5, 9, and 12) that is the right reel 301c, the group display “r” is performed.

  When the display mode of the special display LED 612b is changed using the “group display” shown in FIG. 88, the “group display” of the correct instruction content regarding the reels to be stopped first is displayed as the first display mode. As a second display mode, the special display LED 612b displays “seg display” of the correct instruction content regarding the reels to be stopped after the second. Specifically, for example, when a 6-select push order bell role (AT7) with reverse press as an appropriate push order is selected as a winning role, “r” is displayed as the first display mode, and then [ “6” is displayed as the second display mode in the period that satisfies the condition of the timing of the display change as described in 11-3-4-3-1]. When such a display change is performed, while the first display mode is displayed, the player can obtain only information that the right reel 301c should be stopped first. Since the information on the reels to be stopped after the second time can be obtained at the time of the change, the display mode can be changed.

  It should be noted that the display change between the indication function displays as described above is particularly in a game period (for example, a chance zone) in which the degree of privilege grant is changed depending on whether or not the proper push order is correct. High effect can be brought about. That is, a player who is playing during such a game period is eager to change the display mode from the partial instruction content to the complete instruction content, and pay attention to the display trend on the special display LED 612. Therefore, not only can the gameability be improved, but also the importance of the special display LED 612 in the entire slot machine 1 can be increased.

(2) Display change between instruction function display and other than instruction function display As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is pressed against the reel stop button 211. Since it is only necessary to indicate the correct instruction content regarding the “appropriate reel stop operation” to be executed next at a specific timing when the operation can be accepted, for example, a game period before (or after) the specific timing The display mode other than the instruction function display may be displayed on the special display LED 612. Therefore, in the following, as a display change example between the instruction function display and other than the instruction function display, in the special display LED 612, a simple display change example from the display form other than the instruction function display to the display form of the instruction function display Show.

  For example, a 7-segment LED is used as the special display LED 612, and the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed from the first display mode to the second at the first change timing described in [11-3-4-3-1]. Assume that the display mode is changed. A segment display of “0” to “3” is prepared as the first display mode. This first display mode is a display mode other than the instruction function display, that is, a display mode that is not included in the “segment display” used in the instruction function display, and the instruction content is not associated. On the other hand, segment displays “4” to “7” are prepared as the second display mode. The second display mode is a display mode used in the instruction function display, and the instruction content is associated with each.

  In such a case, first, after the start lever is pressed, “0” is displayed on the special display LED 612 as the first display mode, and the freeze control of the reel 301 is executed before the stop button press acceptance is started. Then, during the execution of the freeze control, the display mode of the special display LED 612 is sequentially changed to “1”, “2”, “3”, and before the freeze control is finished, for example, as the second display mode, “5” is displayed. Thereafter, the stop button press acceptance is started after the freeze control is ended, and the player performs a stop operation of the reel stop button 211 according to the instruction content indicated by the display mode of “5”. Here, “5” displayed in the second display mode is determined in advance based on the winning combination lottery result. By changing the display mode in this way, what was initially displayed as “0” is increased and displayed during freeze control. it can. And if a game result that is more advantageous as the final numerical value is higher can be obtained, the player can be greatly interested in the change result of the display mode.

  In the above simple example, the display mode other than the instruction function display uses a display similar to the display mode by the instruction function display (in this example, both are similar in terms of numbers), so that the display mode is changed. Can make the player feel continuity. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is not always necessary to use a similar display, and the display may be changed from a display that is clearly different from the display mode by the instruction function display. In such a case, when a different display is displayed on the special display LED 612, it is possible to make the player foresee that the display mode will be changed, and to increase the player's expectation.

(3) Other Display Modification Examples The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can realize the instruction function display by using various display methods under the control of the main board 409. The example of a display change in display LED612 is shown.

  As an example of such a display change, as a display (special display LED 612) that performs an instruction function display, display change may be performed using a different type of display from the segment LED that has been used so far. . Such another type of display corresponds to, for example, a segment LED (so-called full color LED display) capable of displaying a plurality of colors, a liquid crystal display, a dot display, a lamp, and the like.

  For example, when the special display LED 612 is a full-color LED display, the display color can be changed to red when the display mode is changed while the instruction function display is normally performed in green. In general, if the player is more likely to notice red than green, the player can easily notice the change in display mode by changing the display color and changing the display mode in this way. be able to. In addition, when the display colors of the normal time and the changed time are visually similar colors (for example, colors of warm colors such as red and orange, and colors of cold colors such as blue and purple). Can be added with a fine gameability that only a player who plays while carefully watching the display color in the special display LED 612 can quickly detect that the display mode is changed.

  Further, for example, when the special display LED 612 is a liquid crystal display, the display color can be changed as well as the full color LED display, and the brightness of the display itself can be changed. That is, when the display mode is changed, if the display brightness of the special display LED 612 is set higher than usual, the player can feel that the display mode will be changed, and the effect of enhancing the gaming interest Can be expected. In addition, various display modes can be realized as compared with the case where the segment LED is used.

  Further, for example, when the special display LED 612 is a dot display, various display modes can be realized as compared with the case where the segment LED is used. Note that the dot display has an advantage over the liquid crystal display in terms of suppression of power consumption and monotonous control signals, although the variety of display modes is inferior to the liquid crystal display. Further, even when the special display LED 612 is a liquid crystal display, a dot display, or the like as described above, the fact that these are managed by the main board 409 remains the same.

  As described above, as described in [11-3-4-3] and thereafter, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine that displays an instruction function display on the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409. The display mode of the special display LED 612 can be changed during one game (unit game). Here, the basic flow of instruction function display in the slot machine 1 is determined based on the winning combination selected in the internal lottery (winning combination lottery) regarding the winning combination, and the instruction function instruction content is determined. An instruction function display showing the contents is performed. The winning combination lottery is performed only once in the unit game. Therefore, from the player's viewpoint, the instruction function display is shown in one display mode based on the winning combination. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, since the display mode of the special display LED 612 can be changed in the unit game, the special display is performed even though the winning combination does not change in the unit game. A plurality of types of display modes can be displayed by the LED 612. As a result, an impression can be given to the player as if the lottery result has changed in the unit game. Specifically, even if a display mode (for example, “00” in the instruction function display in the first example) indicating an instruction content with a high possibility of a low expectation role is shown, the possibility of a high expectation role is high. An effect that can be expected to change to a display mode indicating the content of the instruction (for example, “2C” in the instruction function display of the first example), and the effect of maintaining the player's gaming interest throughout the entire unit game Play.

  Further, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can increase the importance of the special display LED 612 in the entire slot machine 1 by making it possible to change the display mode of the special display LED 612 within the unit game as described above. It is possible to provide a gaming style in which the game is advanced while paying attention to the special display LED 612. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, compared to a conventional gaming machine that tends to place excessive emphasis on presentation display on a liquid crystal display (corresponding to the image display body 500 in the slot machine 1). By providing a novel gaming style, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest of the player.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a carryover combination (for example, a bonus combination such as “Type 2 BB” shown in FIG. 49) that can carry over the winning flag after the next game is selected as the winning combination. When displaying the instruction function regarding the winning combination, it is not necessary to complete the instruction function display in one game of the winning game, and the instruction function display is displayed over a plurality of games from the winning game or subsequent games. You may do it. Specifically, for example, when a winning combination winning combination BB (carry-over combination) and a watermelon combination (non-carry-over combination) are simultaneously selected, the winning game shows an instruction content for aligning the symbol combinations of the BB combination. Assume that the instruction function display is performed. However, in this winning game, if the symbol combination of the BB role does not stop on the active line and the BB role does not win, the instruction function display displayed in the winning game is continuously displayed until the next game. It may be. Further, even if the instruction function display is once turned off between the winning game and the next game, the instruction function display of the next game may be performed in such a display manner as to take over the instruction function display of the winning game. By doing in this way, the slot machine 1 of this embodiment enables instruction function display over a plurality of games, teaches an opportunity to obtain an advantageous result for the player beyond the unit game (one game), and Can greatly enhance the expectation of the person.

[11-3-5. Instruction generation effect processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 performs the instruction function display by the special display LED 612 based on the result of the instruction function generation process, while the same information as the display contents (instruction contents) in the instruction function display By transmitting the instruction information command, the instruction contents are notified to the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510). As described above with reference to FIG. 55, when the instruction function is generated, the instruction information command transmitted from the main board 409 to the peripheral board can identify the group including the winning combination selected in the game. Sent in the form (command in which the winning combination is grouped).

  A specific example of such a command in which winning combinations are grouped will be described. First, for example, when “AT1” having a proper push order as a proper push order is selected as a winning combination and all proper push orders are displayed in the instruction function display, Information such as “Winning push bell group won” is notified. Here, the winning combination “AT2” is also grouped into “forward push order group” because the proper push order is forward push. Therefore, even when “AT2” is selected as the winning combination when all appropriate pressing orders are displayed in the instruction function display, the same command as in the case of “AT1” is notified. Also, for example, when “AT1” is selected as the winning combination and only the first stop reel is displayed in the proper push order in the instruction function display, “first stop is a command that groups the winning combinations” Information such as “I won the push order bell group which is the left reel” is notified. Here, the winning combinations “AT2” to “AT4” are also grouped into the “push order bell group in which the first stop is the left reel” because the first stop in the proper push order is the left reel. Therefore, when only the first stop reel is displayed in the proper push order in the instruction function display, the case where any one of “AT2” to “AT4” is selected as the winning combination is the same as the case of “AT1”. The command will be notified. The sub-board 510 that has received such an instruction information command displays an instruction generation effect (so-called navigation display) in accordance with the display content of the instruction function display on the image display body 500 or the like (instruction generation effect processing).

  That is, when the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment generates the instruction function, the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function while the navigation display having the same content as the instruction content in the instruction function is displayed on the image display body 500. Thus, the instruction content is notified in a manner that is more easily recognized by the player.

  Further, as described above in the explanation of step S31 in FIG. 54, the display mode of the navigation display controlled by the sub board 510 has a one-to-one relationship with the display mode of the instruction function display controlled by the main board 409. There is no need, and if the display content does not violate the instruction content displayed by the instruction function display, the sub-board 501 may determine a display mode for navigation display from a plurality of display modes (one-to-n correspondence relationship) ).

  FIG. 89 is a diagram for describing a specific display example of the instruction function display of the first example. In FIG. 89, a display example of the navigation display is shown in a form corresponding to the display example of the instruction function display illustrated in FIGS. According to FIG. 89, first, when the instruction function display is “00”, this is a case where “0” is displayed on the special display LED 612a and “0” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. At this time, since there is no substantial instruction content, the player does not need to aim for a special symbol, and may select the pressing order arbitrarily. Such a display is performed when, for example, a replay of any order is selected during AT. Therefore, as a display example of the navigation display, “?” Is displayed on all reels.

  Next, when the instruction function display is “02”, this is a case where “0” is displayed on the special display LED 612a and “2” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. However, it is not necessary to aim for a special symbol, but it is required to stop the reel 301 in the stopping order of pinching push (left, right, middle). Such a display is made when the “AT3” or “AT4” push order bell is won during AT. Therefore, as a display example of the navigation display, “1” is displayed at the corresponding position of the left reel 301a, “3” is displayed at the corresponding position of the middle reel 301b, and “2” is displayed at the corresponding position of the right reel 301c. The order of stopping right and middle pinching pushes is taught. In this navigation display, further, based on the content of the instruction information command that the push order bell is won, the display color of the image indicating the stop order is changed to yellow reminiscent of the bell, or the reel to be stopped next (for example, When all the reels 301 are rotating, the reels are stopped first. When two reels are rotating, the reels are stopped second). It may be highlighted.

  In the navigation display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction content displayed on the image display body 500 may be notified (or assisted) by voice output. Specifically, the reel to be stopped first. Is a left reel 301a, an example in which a sound such as “It's left!” Is output at the timing before the first stop of the reel is performed. When performing voice output, different voice outputs (for example, character, dialogue, etc.) based on the type of winning role (bell role, replay role, rare role, etc.), gaming status (high accuracy status, low accuracy status, etc.), etc. Different intonation etc.) can be used properly. By performing navigation display including voice output in this way, notification of instruction contents to the player can be made more reliable, and navigation display with changes depending on the game situation can be provided to enhance the player's interest Can be expected.

  Next, when the instruction function display is “2C”, this is a case where “2” is displayed on the special display LED 612a and “C” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. Is required to stop the right reel 301c first while aiming at the red 7 symbol, and then, for either the left reel 301a or the middle reel 301b, a selection to stop second while aiming at the red 7 symbol is required. It is done. Although not illustrated in FIG. 49, for example, when preparing a special replay combination having a different stop type depending on the pressing order, by displaying such an instruction function when the special replay combination is won, an appropriate pressing order is displayed. When the stop operation is performed, it is possible to realize a reel effect such that a specific symbol set stops. Accordingly, as a display example of the navigation, “1” is indicated at the corresponding position of the right reel 301c, and “?” Meaning the stop order is unknown at the corresponding positions of the other reels 301a and 301b. Teaches only the first stop of the right reel 301c. Furthermore, in order to teach the guide of the pressing place, an effect display “Aim for the red 7 symbol” is performed.

  Thus, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction function display and the navigation display can be displayed in parallel, so that the instruction content by the instruction function can be transmitted to the player more reliably.

  FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period by various display devices. In FIG. 90, various types of indicators and the like are described on the vertical axis, and a display period such as when the display or transmission is performed in one game progress process indicated on the horizontal axis is shown. .

  First, each item described on the vertical axis of FIG. 90 will be described. In the following description, other timing charts are used in the same format. However, since the timing charts are viewed in the same manner, description of items is omitted.

  The instruction information 801 corresponds to an instruction information command. When the instruction information 801 is ON, it means “transmission”, and the instruction information command is transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510. When the instruction information 801 is OFF, it means “standby”, and the instruction information command is not transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510.

  The instruction function 802 corresponds to an instruction function controlled by the main board 409. When the instruction function 802 is ON, it means “display” and the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function. When the instruction function 802 is OFF, it means “non-display” and the special function LED 612 does not display the instruction function.

  The payout number 803 corresponds to the number of game values to be paid out as a result of the game. When the payout number 803 is ON, it means “display”, and the special display LED 612 displays the payout number. When the payout number 803 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and the special display LED 612 does not display the payout number. Information regarding the number of payouts is stored in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409, and can be displayed again even after the power is turned off, depending on the storage location in the RAM 1114 and the program processing.

  The seg error 804 corresponds to the details (for example, type and content) of the error being displayed on the segment LED when the error is detected. Details of the error are notified at (error display). When the segment error 804 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and no error display is performed on the special display LED 612.

  The liquid crystal navigation 805 corresponds to the navigation display of the instruction function controlled by the sub-board 510. When the liquid crystal navigation 805 is ON, it means “display”, and the navigation display is performed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. When the liquid crystal navigation 805 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and no navigation display is performed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. In the liquid crystal navigation 805, navigation display is performed with contents that do not contradict the display contents in the instruction function 802. Although detailed explanation is omitted, data related to the display by the sub board 510 such as the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805 is stored in the RAM 1122 of the sub board 510, and the data can be read back as appropriate even when the power is cut off. And

  The liquid crystal error 806 is equivalent to displaying details (for example, type and content) of the error on the liquid crystal display when the error is detected, and means “display” when the liquid crystal error 806 is ON. The details of the error are reported on the liquid crystal screen of the display 500. When the liquid crystal error 806 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and details of the error are not notified on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. In addition, in the liquid crystal error 806, an error is notified with a content that does not contradict the notification in the seg error 804.

  The error occurrence 807 indicates an error occurrence state, but in this figure, it may be read that the main board 409 detects the error. When the error occurrence 807 is ON, it means that an error has occurred at the timing when the error is turned ON (error has been detected). When the error occurrence 807 is OFF, no error has occurred (error has been detected) Does not mean). If the error occurrence 807 is turned off after being turned on, it means that the error has been resolved at the timing when the error occurrence 807 is turned off.

  The display and transmission from the instruction information 801 to the seg error 804 are managed by the main board 409, and the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805 and the liquid crystal error 806 is managed by the sub board 510.

  In FIG. 90 and other drawings, the “first stop button” is the reel stop button 211 that is first pressed among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c corresponding to the rotating reels 301a to 301c. Means that. Similarly, the “second stop button” means the reel stop button 211 in which the reel 301 is stopped second, and the “third stop button” is the third (ie, last) reel 301. Means that the reel stop button 211 has been operated.

  Next, a display period (including a transmission period) of each display shown in FIG. 90 will be described. The timing chart of FIG. 90 is shown in a situation where a game is played without an error during AT in which the instruction function is executed, and no payout has occurred in the game.

  90, according to the instruction information 801, the instruction information command is transmitted when the start lever 210 is pressed. Further, according to the instruction function 802, the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 ends the stop operation for all the reels 301 from the timing at which the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 can be accepted (pressing the third stop button). Is displayed. Further, according to the liquid crystal navigation 805, the navigation display is started from the start of the rotation of the reel 301, and the display end timing is the same as the instruction function display. In the example of FIG. 90, the start of the navigation display is preceded by the start of the instruction function display. However, the navigation display is displayed based on the content of the instruction information command, and the content of the instruction information command is the instruction. Since it is the same as the instruction content in the function display, the navigation display is still performed with the same content as the instruction function display. However, the display order is not necessarily limited to this.

  In addition, in the timing chart of FIG. 90, the timing of “stop button press acceptance start” and the timing when the instruction function 802 is turned on seem to be the same, but strictly speaking, after the start of the reel stop button 211 press acceptance. The display of the instruction function is not started by the special display LED 612. That is, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the “display” of the instruction function 802 is performed prior to the timing of “stop button press acceptance start”. In the processing on the program by the CPU 1118 of the main board 409. In addition, the instruction function display is executed prior to the timing when the stop button press acceptance starts. The timings for the “stop button press acceptance start” and “instruction function display” are the same in the timing charts shown in other examples.

  In FIG. 90, the start timing of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is set as the timing at which the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 can be accepted, and the start timing of the navigation display on the image display body 500 is set at the start of the rotation of the reel 301. However, these are examples of display timing. That is, in the slot machine 1, the above-described display (instruction function display and display navigation) is performed at an arbitrary timing in a period from when the start lever 210 is pressed to when the reel stop button 211 is pressed. May be started.

  Next, an example of a display period in a situation different from that in FIG. 90 will be described. FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing another example of the display period by various displays and the like. The timing chart of FIG. 91 is the same as FIG. 90 in that the game was played without an error during the AT in which the instruction function is executed, but shows the situation in which a payout occurred in the game. It is different. In FIG. 91, in addition to the game progress shown on the horizontal axis of FIG. 90, after the reels are completely stopped, the payout of the game value (medal) is started and the payout is completed. ”And“ medal insertion (BET possible) ”for starting the next game are added.

  According to FIG. 91, when the game value is paid out, the special display LED 612 displays a payout number, and the special display LED 612 also displays the instruction function until “third stop button is pressed”. It can be seen that the display period does not overlap with the display. In FIG. 91, the period during which the instruction function 802 is displayed is “pressing the third stop button”. However, as another example, the instruction function 802 may be continuously displayed until “payout start”. Even in such a case, the display period of the instruction function 802 does not overlap with the display period of the payout number 803.

[11-3-6. Instruction function related processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 60, the instruction function related processing by the peripheral board (specifically, for example, the sub board 510) will be described. The start timing of the instruction function-related process does not necessarily have to be after completion of the instruction function generation process (step S61 in FIG. 57). For example, the instruction function related process may be performed in the middle of the instruction function generation process. In such a case, it is possible to reduce the time required for the overall processing, but it is preferable that the timing is at least after the timing at which the above-described instruction information command and conditional device command can be received.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 60, a condition device command transmitted from the main board 409 is received. In the condition device command, information on a condition device (which may be a plurality of condition devices) permitted to operate based on the winning combination selected by the internal lottery regarding the winning combination performed on the main board 409 is converted into a command format. It is a thing.

  Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is preferable that the conditional device command does not have information to the extent that the receiving side of the command (sub-board 510) can completely identify the winning combination. It is preferable that the information related to the condition device notified in is information that can identify the grouped winning combination (or condition device). In particular, when the instruction function display is not executed, the sub board 510 may not be able to identify or determine the proper pushing order or pushing position of the winning combination in the game by a command transmitted from the main board 409. It is required to do. Specifically, for example, although it can be understood that the sub-board 510 that received the command has won the push order bell, the breakdown of the winning combination (which of “AT1” to “AT10” is the winning combination) is not known. A degree not preferred is preferable. In this regard, as described in [11-1], a command for notifying the grouped winning combination when the instruction function display is not executed may be regarded as a “condition device command”. The specific format of these commands may be a command format that is generally used. For example, among the bits assigned to all the winning combinations, a bit is assigned to the winning combination in the game. A format for notifying the player and a format for notifying the identification number associated with the winning combination group in the game are conceivable.

  Although not shown, the sub-board 510 sets each status flag (special status flag and hell status flag) used in the instruction function generation processing by the main board 409 before and after receiving the conditional device command in step S701. (Including) value is received by a command or the like. In addition, it is assumed that the AT flag, the AT internal flag, and the like are transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510 and the like by a command or the like as appropriate. The instruction information command described above is also transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510. Note that the transmission mode of the command transmitted from the main board 409 may be a mode in which individual commands are transmitted at individual timings, or a command in which several pieces of command information are combined is transmitted. It may be an embodiment.

  After receiving the conditional device command in step S701, in step S702, it is determined whether or not the hell state flag is ON. If it is determined that the hell state flag is ON (YES in step S702), the process of step S703 is performed, and if it is determined that the hell state flag is not ON (OFF) (in step S702). NO), the process of step S721 described later is performed.

  In step S <b> 703, it is determined whether or not a “predictor game number command” for notifying the number of predictor games has been received. The “predictor game number command” is transmitted as a command to the peripheral board at an appropriate timing when execution of the precursor game is determined in the instruction function generation process of the main board 409 (the precursor game flag is ON). . If it is determined that the precursor game number command has been received (YES in step S703), the process of step S704 is performed. If it is determined that the precursor game number command has not been received (NO in step S703), As processing of step S718, processing for performing various effects display is performed, and the instruction function related processing is ended.

  In addition, when the process of step S718 is performed, since it is not a hell state and the sign game is not started, for example, a rare role is selected as a winning role as a specific “various effect display”. In the event of a failure, a predetermined cut-in effect or a winning effect suggestion effect screen is displayed.

  In step S704, it is determined whether or not the “continuous effect flag” is OFF. The “continuous effect flag” is an internal flag that is turned “ON” when the “predictive effect” including the “continuous effect” is being executed.

  Here, “continuous production” in the first embodiment will be described. This “continuous effect” corresponds to an effect in which display or the like is performed with the content of continuous effects over a predetermined number of games from one game to a plurality of games among the precursor effects performed during the precursor game. At the end of the “continuous effect”, an effect result that teaches (suggests / notifies) whether or not the special game (here, AT) is true is displayed. Therefore, the result of the continuous effect is also the result of the sign effect, and more specifically, the result of the sign game.

  Here, an example of the relationship between the “prediction effect” and the “continuous effect” in the first embodiment will be described. For example, “Title display” is performed for the first game of the sign effect. The title display may be a display that indicates the content of the subsequent continuous effect (for example, “the hero vs. enemy A battle start!”), Or a display that simply indicates the start of the continuous effect (for example, “determination chance start” !)) Etc. Then, after the second game of the prelude effect (corresponding to the first game after the continuous effect), the effect content of the continuous effect (corresponding to “continuous effect content” described later) is displayed. Then, in the final game of the continuous production (also the final game of the prelude production), the result of the continuous production (here, whether or not the AT transition is possible, may be the transition to another advantageous gaming state) (Suggest / Teach) In addition, you may make it notify the result by the said continuous production for the next game which complete | finished the display of the content of continuous production as the last game of a continuous production.

  In the following description regarding the instruction function related processing, “continuous effect” means such a continuous effect related to AT transition. In addition, when it is assumed that the sign production and the continuous production are executed over “multiple games”, this “multiple game” is a multi-game by a game (main game) in which an internal lottery regarding the winning combination is performed for each game. It may be a pseudo multiple game created by changing the reel 301 multiple times during one main game.

  If it is determined in step S704 that the continuous effect flag is OFF (YES in step S704), the process of step S705 is performed, and if it is determined that the continuous effect flag is not OFF (ON). (NO in step S704), the process in step S711 is performed.

  In step S <b> 705, a continuous production occurrence lottery for determining whether or not to generate a “precursor production (may be regarded as a continuous production)” is performed. In the above-described example, when a prelude effect is generated, the title display is performed in the first game of the predecessor effect, and the continuous effect is generated in the remaining game of the predecessor effect. It can be considered that it is determined whether or not to make it.

  92 and 93 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining a lottery table used for continuous effect generation lottery. FIG. 92 is an example of a lottery table used when the AT internal flag is ON, and FIG. 93 is an example of a lottery table used when the AT internal flag is OFF. In both FIG. 92 and FIG. 93, distribution is performed so that whether or not to execute the precursor effect (or continuous effect) is drawn based on the number of precursor games (that is, the number of remaining precursor games) at that time. Is set.

  According to the examples of FIGS. 92 and 93, when the number of remaining precursor games is 5 games or more or 1 game or less, the generation of the precursor effect is not won and the remaining number of precursor games is 2 to 4 games. Only in that case will you be given the chance to win the occurrence of the precursor. In addition, in the lottery tables of FIGS. 92 and 93, at least when the remaining number of precursor games becomes two games, the occurrence of the precursor effect is always won (255/255). In addition, when comparing the case where the AT is internally won (FIG. 92) and the case where the AT is not internally won (FIG. 93), the AT is the case where the AT is internally won. It is easier to win the occurrence of the precursor effect at the stage where the number of remaining precursor games is larger than when the player has not won internally. By performing a lottery of continuous production using such a lottery table, the expectation of reaching an advantageous result for the player of AT winning as the production continues, when the precursor production (or continuous production) occurs. Can be high.

  An example of the breakdown of the sign production according to the number of remaining sign games will be described. In the continuous effect generation lottery, for example, when the remaining number of precursor games is 2, and the generation of the precursor effect is won, the title display is displayed in the first game (the number of remaining precursor games is 2 because it is executed immediately). In the second game (the number of remaining precursor games is 1), the first game of the continuous production content (the first game of the continuous production, hereinafter the same) is displayed, and the result of the precursor production (or continuous production) Is displayed.

  In addition, in the continuous production occurrence lottery, for example, when the number of remaining precursor games is 3, and the generation of the precursor production is won, the title is the first game (the number of remaining precursor games is 3 because it is executed immediately). Display is performed, the first game (the first game of continuous effects) is displayed in the second game (the number of remaining precursor games 2), and the third game (the number of remaining precursor games 1) is displayed. The second game (second game of the continuous effect) of the continuous effect content is displayed, and the result of the sign effect (or the continuous effect) is displayed.

  In addition, in the continuous effect generation lottery, for example, when the remaining number of precursor games is 4, and the generation of the precursor effect is won, the title is the first game (the number of remaining precursor games is 4 because it is executed immediately). Display is performed, the first game of the continuous production content (the first game of the continuous production) is displayed in the second game (the number of remaining precursor games is 3), and the third game (the number of remaining precursor games is 2) Display of the second game of the continuous effect (second game of the continuous effect) is performed, and the display of the third game of the continuous effect (the third game of the continuous effect) is displayed in the fourth game (the number of remaining predictive games 1). Is displayed, and the result of the sign effect (or continuous effect) is displayed.

  In step S706, it is determined whether or not the occurrence of the warning effect has been won in the continuous effect generation lottery in step S705. If it is determined that the winning effect has been won (YES in step S706), the process of step S707 is performed, If it is determined that the instruction function has not been performed (NO in step S706), the instruction function related process is terminated.

  And in step S707, the continuous effect content lottery for determining the content of the precursor effect (or continuous effect) is performed with respect to the precursor effect won by the continuous effect generation | occurrence | production lottery of step S705. FIG. 94 and FIG. 95 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining a lottery table used for the lottery of contents of continuous effects. In the case other than the special mode, the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 94 is used. In the special mode, the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 95 is used.

  In FIG. 94 and FIG. 95, there are four types of production contents, “weak story”, “strong story”, “weak battle”, and “strong battle”, each based on ON / OFF of the AT internal flag, The lottery is performed with different allocations. These four types of productions have a relationship of “weak story” <“weak battle” <“strong story” <“strong battle” as the degree of expectation (reliability) that leads to AT winning. In the production contents (story-type, battle-type), the “strong” production has higher reliability than the “weak” production.

  From the above, the reliability (the degree of expectation leading to the AT winning) of the precursor effect (or continuous effect) is determined by the number of continuous games of the predictor effect (determined by the continuous effect generation lottery using FIGS. 92 and 93) or It can be seen that it is variably realized depending on the content of the prelude effect (determined by the continuous effect content lottery using FIGS. 94 and 95).

  Also, in the first embodiment, when the continuous effect content lottery is performed in the special mode (using FIG. 95), the selected effect content is determined so as to always continue for 4 games including the title display. In other words, when the special state is controlled, in the continuous effect generation lottery in step S705, when the remaining number of predictive games is 4, the generation of the predictive effect is always won (unsatisfactory). As shown, no matter what effect content is selected in the subsequent effect content lottery in step S707, the preceding effect can be continued for 4 games. As described above, the breakdown of these four game precursor effects is the result of the first one game with the title display and the remaining three games with the content of the continuous effect, especially the final game. Is displayed.

  When the production content of the continuous production displayed as the precursor production by the continuous production content lottery is determined, in step S708, generation of the precursor production based on the decided production content is started. Then, since the indication effect is being executed, the continuous effect flag is set to ON (step S709), and the instruction function related process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S704 that the continuous performance flag is not OFF (that is, the warning effect is being executed), it is determined whether the number of warning games is 0 or not as the processing of step S711. The number of precursor games can be confirmed by referring to the precursor game number command confirmed to be received in step S703. If it is determined that the number of precursor games is 0 (YES in step S711), the process of step S712 is performed as a process associated with the end of the precursor game. If it is determined that the number of precursor games is not 0 (NO in step S711), since the precursor game is being executed and the precursor effect is being executed, the processing of the precursor effect currently being executed is performed as the process in step S717. Display (continuous effect display) is performed. The precursor effect displayed by the process of step S717 is a precursor effect based on the effect content determined in step S707, and is accurately indicated by referring to the number of games since the precursor effect was started. An effect can be displayed.

  In step S712, it is determined whether or not the special state flag is ON. As described above, the ON / OFF of the special state flag is set in the instruction function generation process by the main board 409, and in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, for example, a precursor game (a precursor effect) is performed. It may be controlled to a special state (becomes a special mode) after finishing. If it is determined that the special state flag is ON (YES in step S712), a predetermined display (special state screen display) that allows the player to recognize that it is in the special mode is processed in step S713. After outputting, the instruction function related processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S712 that the special state flag is not ON (OFF) (NO in step S712), it is determined whether or not the AT internal flag is ON (step S714). If it is determined that the AT internal flag is ON (YES in step S714), the AT game is started because it means that the continuous performance and the sign game have ended in the AT internal winning state, so in step S715 As a process, after a predetermined display (AT start screen) indicating the start of AT is output, the instruction function related process is terminated. When it is determined that the AT internal flag is not ON (OFF) (NO in step S714), various instruction displays are output as the process in step S716, and the instruction function related process is terminated.

  Next, the process after step S721 is demonstrated. The processing after step S721 is processing performed when the hell state flag is ON, that is, when the hell state is controlled. The situation controlled to the hell state is, for example, when a precursor game is performed after the special mode, and when the lottery table of FIG. 63 is used, the first AT win is not won in the hell state.

  As processing in such a hell state, first, in step S721, it is determined whether or not the continuous performance flag is OFF. Since this process is the same as the process of step S704, details are omitted.

  If it is determined in step S721 that the continuous effect flag is OFF, after the continuous effect generation lottery is performed (not shown but similar to step S705), the lottery of the continuous effect content is performed in step S722, In step S723, the generation of the sign effect according to the lottery result is started, the continuous effect flag is turned ON in step S724, and the instruction function related process is ended. Note that the processing in steps S722 to S724 is the same as the processing in steps S707 to S709 described above, and therefore details thereof are omitted. If it is determined in step S721 that the continuous effect flag is not OFF, the sign effect is being performed, so the sign effect display (continuous effect display) is performed as the process in step S725, and the instruction function related process is terminated. . The process in step S725 is the same as the process described in step S717.

  As described above, by performing the processing of each step shown in FIG. 60, the control process managed by the peripheral board (sub-board 510) is performed for a state that can be positioned as a precursor of the AT game (for example, the precursor game or the special mode). be able to. The determination process (AT game determination process) related to the end of the AT game and the game number management (AT game determination process) is performed after the reel stop process (step S5 in FIG. 54), details of which are described in [11-5-3] and the like. It will be described later.

[11-3-7. Expectation level display process]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described in [11-3-4] and after, the instruction content based on the winning combination is displayed on the special display LED 612 by the control process (instruction function display process) performed by the main board 409. (Instruction content regarding a predetermined game operation) can be displayed as an instruction function display. Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game is performed by playing the game on the display (special display LED 612) on which the instruction function is displayed by another control process (expected degree display process) performed by the main board 409. An expectation display (hereinafter referred to as “expectation display”) suggesting the degree of expectation for the privilege that can be performed can be displayed. Hereinafter, such “expected degree display” will be described in detail.

  Note that the expectation level display process by the main board 409 is an arbitrary process from the start of the internal lottery process (step S3) to the end of the unit game in the process procedure of one game (unit game) shown in FIG. The expectation level display on the special display LED 612 is performed at an appropriate timing according to various specific examples of the expectation level display described later. Further, the expectation level display need not always be displayed in a game in which the instruction function display is performed. For example, the expectation level display may be performed without displaying the instruction function display, or the expectation level display may not be performed. Only the instruction function display may be performed.

  In addition, the expectation level display is a display that suggests the degree of expectation for a privilege that can be given by playing a game. In this case, the “privilege” can include various benefits that are advantageous to the player. . Specifically, confirmation of advantageous games (bonus games, AT games, etc.), transition to advantageous AT lottery game conditions (highly accurate state, super-highly accurate state, etc.), advantageous game stock and extended period (AT stock, The addition of the number of AT games, etc.) and the payout of game value (medals) associated with winning a symbol combination based on the winning combination, etc., all correspond to “privileges”. In addition, when there is a special state (an example of a so-called chance zone) in which an advantageous game can be executed based on whether or not the correct push order is answered correctly, so-called stocking of the proper push order (so-called) , Navistock) can also be included in the “privilege”.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an expectation level indication indicating the degree of expectation can be performed for at least one of these benefits. Note that the “expectation degree” for the benefit may be an expectation degree (for example, a bonus or AT winning expectation degree) with respect to whether or not the above-mentioned privilege is given, or an expectation degree (AT game) with respect to the above-mentioned privilege grant amount. (Expectation of the number of extra games in the extra number). In the case of the degree of expectation with respect to whether or not a privilege is granted, any display method of percent display or level display described later may be used. Because of the difficulty, the level display is preferable to the percentage display. In addition, in the case of the degree of expectation for the amount of privilege granted, the amount of privilege that can be expected may be displayed in the expectation level display.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the main board 409 manages the expectation display because the main board 409 manages all of the lottery, the instruction function display, and the above-mentioned privilege grant processing related to the winning combination. As a result, the reliability of the expectation level display can be increased. Note that the degree of expectation indicated by the degree of expectation display does not always need to be the actual degree of expectation related to the provision of benefits, and the main board 409 may determine and display the degree of expectation in effect. However, in the case of “determined display” or “premier display” described later, in order not to discourage the player, the display should be allowed only in situations where benefits are always granted based on actual expectations. Is preferred.

[11-3-7-1. Expectation display mode (first type)]
In the expectation level display process, the main board 409 selects a display mode of the expected level display to be displayed on the special display LED 612 from a plurality of display modes prepared in advance (for example, display data is stored in the ROM 1112 or the like). . Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the expectation level display can be performed by any one of a plurality of display modes that can be used for the instruction function display. Hereinafter, the expected level display according to such a display mode is referred to as “first type expected level display”. When performing the first type of expectation level display, it is not necessary to prepare a new display mode for displaying the expectation level. Therefore, display mode data (for example, stored in the ROM 1112 or the like) prepared in advance for displaying the instruction function is not necessary. It is possible to display the degree of expectation by diverting.

  In the following, the display mode in which the instruction function display and the expected level display are performed in the slot machine 1 in which the first type of expected level display is performed will be described with specific examples of patterns 1 and 2.

(1) Pattern 1
96 and 97 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the first type expectation level display (pattern 1). FIG. 96 shows a display example of the instruction function display. Reference numeral 97 shows a display example of the expectation level display. In this pattern, it is assumed that special display LEDs 612a and 612b are used as an example of a display on which an instruction function display and an expectation level display are performed. At this time, the display mode of the instruction function display and the display mode of the expectation level display are displayed by a two-digit display combining the display of the two segment LEDs (special display LEDs 612a and 612b).

  First, FIG. 96 (A) shows a display example of the special display LED 612a for displaying information indicating an indication of a pressing position in the instruction function display. FIG. 96B shows a display example of the special display LED 612b that displays information indicating the pressing order in the instruction function display. The display example of FIG. 96 (B) is the same as the display example of the special display LED 612b in the instruction function display of the first example shown in FIG.

  The display example of FIG. 96A is an extension based on the display example of the special display LED 612a in the instruction function display of the first example shown in FIG. Specifically, in FIG. 80, there are four types of segments in a one-to-one correspondence with the four types of instruction contents (“no designation”, “chance symbol”, “red 7 symbol”, “BAR symbol”). Display patterns (“0” to “3”) are prepared, but in the case of FIG. 96A, 16 types of segment display patterns (“ 0 ”to“ 9 ”,“ A ”to“ F ”). For example, when “0”, “4”, “8”, and [C] are displayed on the special display LED 612a as the instruction function display, all indicate the instruction content “not specified”. It should be noted that which of the display modes having the same instruction content with respect to the push location guideline is selected (in the above example, “0”, “4”, “8”, or [C] is selected). It may be determined according to a predetermined processing procedure, or may be selected at random.

  96A and 96B, the special display LED 612 (special display LEDs 612a and 612b) can display an instruction function consisting of two-digit characters or numbers. By the display, it is possible to indicate the instruction content based on a predetermined game operation (a guide to the pressing place and a pressing order) in the game. Specifically, for example, when “21”, “61”, “A1”, or “E1” is displayed on the special display LED 612 as an instruction function display, "Is the instruction content of the instruction function display.

  Next, FIG. 97A is a display example of the special display LED 612a in the expected level display, and FIG. 97B is a display example of the special display LED 612b in the expected level display. As shown in FIGS. 97 (A) and 97 (B), the expectation display by the special display LEDs 612a and 612b is performed by a segment display of “0” to “9” or “F”, respectively. If the display examples of FIGS. 97A and 97B are used, the special display LED 612 (special display LEDs 612a and 612b) can display an expectation level consisting of two-digit characters or numbers. The expected level of privilege can be suggested by the display.

  Here, the expectation degree indicated by the above-described two-digit expectation degree display will be described with a specific example. Note that this expectation level display is the same in other expectation level displays (expectation level display by the first type pattern 2 and the second type patterns 1 and 2) described later.

  When a two-digit number from “00” to “99” is displayed on the special display LED 612, the percentage of the expected degree can be displayed. That is, in the case of the lowest value “00 (0%)”, the privilege cannot be expected, and in the case of the highest value “99 (99%)”, the privilege can be expected more.

  In addition, when the display of the upper digit in the expectation display by the special display LED 612 (that is, the segment display of the special display LED 612a) is “F”, the grant of the privilege is confirmed or the grant amount is greater than or equal to the predetermined amount. It shall indicate the “confirmed status” in which the grant of the privilege is confirmed. Therefore, when “F” is displayed on the special display LED 612a, “determined display” is performed regardless of the segment display of the special display LED 612b.

  Further, when the segment display of both the special display LEDs 612a and 612b is “F” (that is, when the segment display of the special display LED 612 is “FF”), the special display is more special among the above-described final display. Display. When the premier display appears, the special control with high rarity is performed by performing freeze control of the reel 301 in parallel or executing a specific display effect on the image display body 500 controlled by the sub-board 510. It is preferable to emphasize that this is a situation. In addition, when the premier display appears, a larger privilege may be given than when other definitive displays appear.

  When the first type expectation level display (pattern 1) is performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode (see FIGS. 97A and 97B) used in the expectation level display is as follows. This corresponds to any of a plurality of display modes (combination of the segment display shown in FIGS. 96A and 96B) used in the instruction function display. For example, the display of “91” in the special display LED 612 can indicate the instruction content “stop operation of forward pressing aiming at the“ chance pattern ”” in the case of the instruction function display, while “ 91% "can be expected.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is desirable to use the numerical information used for the instruction function display for the expectation display, assuming the case where the expectation is suggested as described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, for example, it may be configured to use only the alphabet so that the expected degree is difficult to understand at first glance. In this case, even if the alphabet is displayed on the special display LED 612, it is difficult for the player to determine the degree of expectation in an instant. it can.

(2) Pattern 2
Next, a specific example of the pattern 2 when the first type expectation level display is performed will be described. FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the first type expectation level display (pattern 2), and shows a display example of the expectation level display. In the first type pattern 2, the instruction function display of the first example shown in FIGS. 80 and 81 is used as the display example of the instruction function display.

  The expectation level display of the first type pattern 2 is displayed in two digits by the special display LED 612 (special display LEDs 612a and 612b). FIG. 98 (A) shows a segment display example in the special display LED 612a. FIG. 98B shows a segment display example in the special display LED 612b.

  According to FIG. 98 (A), the special display LED 612a displays any one of “0” to “3” when the expectation is displayed. The segment display shown in FIG. 98A can indicate, for example, the expected level of the expected degree, and the expected level increases in the order of “0 (level 0)” to “3 (level 3)”. Further, according to FIG. 98 (B), the special display LED 612b displays any one of “0” to “9” and “F” when displaying the expectation level. The segment display shown in FIG. 98 (B) can be used to indicate the expectation level of the expectation degree (the expectation degree from “0” to “9”) like the segment display shown in FIG. 98 (A). Becomes higher). At this time, the segment display of “F” means a confirmation display in which the provision of a privilege or the like is confirmed.

  Further, the segment display shown in FIG. 98 (B) is based on the instruction content of the instruction function display when the instruction function display is performed in the same game, for example, in addition to the expectation level of the expectation degree. Seg display can be used. Specifically, in the instruction function display in the same game where the expectation level display is performed, when any of “0” to “9” is displayed as a segment on the special display LED 612b as information indicating the pressing order, the expectation level display Also, the same segment display may be performed on the special display LED 612b. By performing such a segment display, even if the player misunderstands the expectation level display as the instruction function display, it is possible to cause the player to perform a stop operation based on an appropriate push order, which is disadvantageous to the player. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when the segment display based on the instruction content of the instruction function display is performed in the expectation level display, it is not necessary to perform the same segment display as the instruction function display as in the above example. Before the first stop, a segment display corresponding to the instruction content that can recognize the reel 301 to be stopped first may be displayed in an expectation display. Specifically, for example, when “right first (2 choices)” is determined as the instruction content of the pressing order, according to the display example of FIG. 81, “C” is displayed as a segment on the special display LED 612b as the instruction function display. Is done. At this time, the display mode of the special display LED 612b in the expectation level display may be “5 (middle right and left)”, “6 ( Either right middle left) ”or“ 9 (first right) ”may be displayed.

  When the first type expectation level display (pattern 2) is performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode (see FIGS. 98A and 98B) used in the expectation level display is as follows. This corresponds to one of a plurality of display modes (combination of segment display shown in FIGS. 80 and 81) used in the instruction function display. For example, the display of “11” in the special display LED 612 indicates the instruction content “stop operation of forward pressing aiming at the chance symbol” in the case of the instruction function display, but in the case of the expectation display, the expectation degree for the privilege is “ It can be shown as “Level 1”.

  In addition, when the first type expectation level display shown in the above pattern 1 and pattern 2 is performed, in what order and timing the indication function display and the expectation level display are displayed on the special display LED 612 Will be described in detail after [11-3-7-3]. In any case, by performing the first type expectation level display, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform the expectation level display using the display mode of the instruction function display.

  And, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first type expectation level display is performed, the display on the special display LED 612 is performed in a display mode that can be recognized as either the instruction function display or the expectation level display. It is possible to entertain the player which display is being performed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game is progressed by a game operation (appropriate stop operation) based on the instruction content displayed in the instruction function display, an advantageous privilege advantageous to the player can be given. Specifically, for example, an instruction function display is performed by winning the push order bell combination, and an appropriate stop operation is performed according to the instruction content of the instruction function display, so that a plurality of ways corresponding to the push order bell combination are performed. The symbol combination with the largest number of payouts is stopped and the medal with the largest number of payouts is awarded. On the other hand, the expectation level display can suggest the degree of expectation of the benefit, but the benefit that the expectation level display suggests the expectation level can be a different benefit different from the advantageous benefit derived from the instruction function display. Specifically, the different privilege here corresponds to, for example, an expectation level regarding determination of a bonus game, an AT game, etc., an expectation level regarding addition of the number of AT games, and the like. The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can display such indication function display and expectation degree display on a specific display (special display LED 612) using a common display mode, thereby displaying the display mode. In this case, the player can have a sense of expectation for different types of benefits (advantageous benefits and different benefits) at the same time, and can entertain the player whether the display mode is based on indication function display or expectation level display. For. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not get tired of the game and can suppress monotonization of the game.

  For example, regarding the display on the special display LED 612, if a reel stop operation is performed because it is considered as an instruction function display, the display remains until after the timing at which the instruction function display disappears after the stop operation is performed. Since it is understood that the indication is not the instruction function display but the expectation level display, the player can expect to give a privilege according to the expectation degree indicated by the display. Accordingly, the player proceeds with the game while praying that the indication function display is not displayed when any display appears on the special display LED 612. It is possible to make the player have an expectation for the granting.

  In the previous example, the case where the game is progressed while it is difficult to determine whether the display mode displayed on the special display LED 612 is based on the indication function display or the expectation level display has been described. The form is not limited to this. Specifically, for example, by blinking the display mode appearing on the special display LED 612 or changing the display color, the display mode is likely to be based on the expectation level display. Or, for example, by displaying in the same manner as the instruction function display at the beginning, but by performing the blinking display as described above, the display mode is based on the expectation level display. It is also possible that the possibility is high.

  In such an expectation display, the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409 is determined by the main board 409 itself, who determines the winning combination by lottery, and determines the provision of benefits based on the lottery result of the lottery. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to assume that the degree of expectation of the privilege directly related to the lottery result of the winning combination lottery is displayed, and to improve the reliability of the expectation degree display.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first type expectation level display can be performed, even if the instruction function display is performed, the expectation level display is further performed, so that the benefit is granted. It can be expected that a winning combination with a high expectation level is selected (winning a highly expected role).

  More specifically, in the gaming state such as an AT game in which the instruction function display is frequently executed, the instruction function display is performed mainly at the time of winning such as a push order bell or replay. However, as described above in the explanation about the winning combination (for example, [10-1] etc.), the push order bell and the replay are high winning combinations that are relatively easy to win in the internal lottery and have a low expectation level regarding the advantageous game. “Low expectations”. On the other hand, the watermelon role, cherry role, chance role, etc., which have high expectations regarding advantageous games, are low-winning roles that are relatively difficult to win in internal lottery. Since the winning combination is an unquestionable pressing order in which the number of payouts does not change depending on the pressing order, the instruction function display is not necessarily required even during the AT game. In other words, in a gaming state such as an AT game, when the instruction function is displayed, there is a high possibility that a low-expected role has been won, and the degree of expectation regarding the provision of a privilege tends to be low. .

  In response to such a problem, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays an expectation level using the display mode of the instruction function display as the first type expectation level display. Even if the indication function display is performed on the display LED 612, it can be expected to be an expectation level display. And, if the display on the special display LED 612 is an expectation level display, it can be expected that the winning part is won, so even if the instruction function display is performed, the expectation to the highly expecting part is maintained. You can entertain the game.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the display of the degree of expectation is more easily executed when the high expected role is selected in the winning combination lottery than when the low expected portion is selected in the winning combination lottery. It is desirable to do. Specifically, for example, when the winning combination is a push-bell combination (an example of a low-expected combination), the operation probability of the expectation display is set to 0.01 (1%), while the winning combination is a weak watermelon combination In the case of (an example of a highly expected role), if the operation probability of the expectation level display is 0.50 (50%), there is a possibility that when the expectation level display is performed, the highly expected role is won. Since it is high, the player's expectation with respect to the expectation level display can be effectively increased.

  Here, the setting method of the operation probability of the expectation display for increasing the possibility of winning the highly expected role when the expectation display is performed will be supplementarily described using the above example. Referring to the lottery table for the winning combination lottery (FIG. 49), in the general state or the bonus internal state, the winning probability of the entire push order bell combination (AT1 to AT10) is 3200/65535, and the winning probability of the weak watermelon combination is , 800/65535, but by multiplying the winning probability of each winning combination by the operation probability of the expected degree display, the expected degree display appearance probability of the winning combination (that is, winning the winning combination and expectation degree) The probability of display) can be calculated. The expectation level display appearance probability of the push order bell role is (32000/65535 × 0.01), and the expected level display appearance probability of the weak watermelon role is (800/65535 × 0.50). Then, by comparing the ratio of the expectation display appearance probability of the low expectation role and the expectation display appearance probability of the high expectation role, when the expectation display is performed, the ratio that the winning role is the high expectation role ( Alternatively, it is possible to calculate the ratio that the winning combination is a low expected combination). For example, when calculating the ratio of the probability display appearance probability between the push order bell role and the weak watermelon role, it can be seen that the weak watermelon role occupies 55.56%, and only when the push order bell role or the watermelon role is elected. If the expectation level display can be performed, the weak watermelon role (high expectation role) is won in more than half of the expected level display. If this concept is extended to all winning roles, the expected level display will be displayed if the expected level display appearance probability of the high expected role occupies at least 50% of the expected level display probability of all winning roles. It is possible to increase the possibility of winning the highly expected role when it is performed. In addition, if the operation probability at the time of winning the highly expected role is set too high, there is a risk that when the expectation level display is not performed, it is almost impossible to expect the winning of the highly expected role. Therefore, a reference value (for example, 70%) regarding the upper limit of the operation probability may be provided so that a degree of expectation can be obtained even when the expectation level is not displayed.

  Then, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first type expectation level display is performed, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the highly expected role as described above. Even during an AT game that tends to be monotonous game characteristics that only repeat the game, the display of the special display LED 612 can be enjoyed by indicating whether it is an instruction function display or an expectation display, thereby realizing the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game can do.

  In the first type of expectation level display, not all display modes used for the instruction function display may be used as the display mode of the expectation level display. Further, for a small part of the display such as the premier display, a display mode unique to the expectation display that is not used for the instruction function display may be used.

  In addition, when the player displays the expectation level displayed on the special display LED 612 as an instruction function display when performing the first type expectation display, the instruction function display instruction content corresponding to the display is displayed. There is a possibility that the stop operation is performed according to the above. In such a case, if an unfavorable operation procedure is guided to the player as a result, the player's interest may be reduced. It is preferable to perform the expectation display while avoiding a display mode in which the operation procedure when the degree display is replaced with the instruction function display can be an unfavorable operation procedure.

  Performing the expectation display while avoiding the display mode in which the operation procedure when the expectation display is replaced with the instruction function display may be an unfavorable operation procedure is particularly performed by the reel stop operation for the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. It should be considered before the expectation display is performed. Specifically, for example, when the instruction content to be indicated by the instruction function display is “reverse press”, the expectation display is performed with the segment display corresponding to the instruction content of “reverse press”, or at least the first It is preferable to display the degree of expectation using a display mode of an instruction function display in which the reel 301 to be stopped becomes the right reel 301c. Referring to the display example of FIG. 96, as the segment display in the special display LED 612b, the segment display of the instruction content for first stopping the right reel 301c is “5 (right middle left)”, “6 (right middle left) ) ”,“ 9 (first right) ”, and“ C (first right (2 choices)) ”. Therefore, in the case of performing the expected level display by the percentage display in such a case, the display of the lower digits of the special display LED 612 (that is, the display on the special display LED 612b) is any one of “5”, “6”, and “9”. Just do it. In consideration of up to the second reel to be stopped, the segment display “6 (right middle left)” is a stop mode contrary to “reverse pressing”. Is preferable.

[11-3-7-2. Expectation display mode (second type)]
In the first type expectation degree display, it has been described that the expectation degree display is performed by any one of a plurality of display forms that can be used in the instruction function display. Then, the expectation level display can be performed in a display mode different from any of a plurality of display modes that can be used in the instruction function display. Hereinafter, the expected level display according to such a display mode is referred to as “second type expected level display”. When the second type expectation level display is performed, it is necessary to prepare a display mode for the expectation level display separately from the display mode for the instruction function display. Therefore, it corresponds to a plurality of display modes of the expectation level display. A plurality of display data is stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like.

  Hereinafter, in the slot machine 1 in which the second type expectation level display is performed, the display mode of the instruction function display and the expectation level display will be described with specific examples of the patterns 1 and 2.

(1) Pattern 1
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the second type expectation level display (pattern 1), and shows a display example of the expectation level display. The expectation level display of the second type pattern 1 is displayed in two digits by the special display LED 612 (special display LEDs 612a and 612b). FIG. 99 (A) shows a segment display example in the special display LED 612a. FIG. 99B shows a segment display example in the special display LED 612b. In the second type pattern 1, the instruction function display of the first example shown in FIGS. 80 and 81 is used as the display example of the instruction function display. Therefore, when the instruction function is displayed, any one of “0” to “3” is displayed as a segment on the special display LED 612a, and “0” to “9” and “A” to “A” are displayed on the special display LED 612b. Any one of “F” is displayed as a segment.

  According to FIG. 99 (A), any one of “L”, “H”, and “F” is displayed as a segment in the special display LED 612a when the expectation level is displayed. Here, the segment display of “L” in the special display LED 612a means that the degree of expectation is relatively low, and the segment display of “H” means that the degree of expectation is relatively high. Moreover, the segment display of “F” means that the grant of the privilege (or the grant of the privilege with the given amount or more) is confirmed (determined display). Further, according to FIG. 99 (B), the special display LED 612b displays one of “0” to “9” and “F” in a segment when displaying the degree of expectation. Here, the segment display of “0” to “9” in the special display LED 612b indicates the expectation level of the expectation degree, “0” being the expectation level having the lowest expectation degree and “9” having the most expectation degree. High expectation level. Further, the segment display of “F” in the special display LED 612b is used for a special premier display among the final display in which “F” is segmented by the special display LED 612a. Details of the premier display are the same as those described above with reference to FIG. When the premier display is performed in the expectation display of the second type pattern 1, “FF” is displayed on the special display LED 612.

  When the expectation level display of the second type pattern 1 is performed, the two-digit display mode by the special display LED 612 indicates a rough expectation degree in the upper digits (“L”, “H”, “F”). The lower-order digits (“0” to “9”, “A” to “F”) can indicate a more detailed expectation degree.

  In addition, the display mode of the two segment LEDs (special display LEDs 612a and 612b) is not captured separately, but as a special display LED 612 that displays in a 2-digit display mode. When the display mode is compared with the display mode of the instruction function display (see FIGS. 80 and 81), the upper digit of the expectation level display (“L”, “H”, “F”) is displayed in the upper digit of the instruction function display. Since it is not displayed, it can be seen that the display mode of the expectation level display composed of two digits appears by a display mode different from the display mode of the instruction function display.

  That is, when the expectation level display of the second type pattern 1 is performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, any indication is displayed on the special display LED 612 without explicitly indicating whether the indication function display or the expectation level display is performed. Even if the mode appears, if the upper digit (special display LED 612a) of the display mode is any one of “L”, “H”, and “F”, the expected level is displayed, and “0” to “3” , It is possible to determine that the instruction function is displayed.

(2) Pattern 2
Next, a specific example of pattern 2 when the second type expectation level display is performed will be described. FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the second type expectation level display (pattern 2), and shows a display example of the expectation level display. In the second type pattern 2, the instruction function display of the second example shown in FIGS. 83 and 84 is used as the display example of the instruction function display. Therefore, in this case, the special display LED 612 on which the expectation level display and the instruction function display are displayed is more specifically a 7-segment LED with one dot (special display LED 612c).

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84, in the indication function display using the special display LED 612c, binary data (8 bits in total, indicating a guide of the pressing place with the upper 4 bits and the pressing order with the lower 4 bits ( By performing lighting control corresponding to each digit bit of the data based on the instruction function display data), the special display LED 612c can indicate both the indication of the pressing place and the pressing order.

  On the other hand, according to FIG. 100, in the expected level display of the second type pattern 2 using the special display LED 612c, the segment display of “0” to “9” is performed based on the level of the expected level. In the second type pattern 2 expectation level display, the segment display of “F” is a definite display. In FIG. 2 and No. 2 in FIG. In order to avoid duplication with the segment display (the number “3” is displayed) when the instruction function is displayed in combination with 15, the dot segment is lit when the segment “3” is displayed in the expectation display. I try to let them.

  When the expectation level display of the second type pattern 2 is performed, the display mode of the expectation level display is one of alphanumeric characters “0” to “9” and “F”. On the other hand, the display mode of the instruction function display is likely to be a symbolic display because the lighting control corresponds to each digit bit of 8-bit binary data (instruction function display data). Compared with a specific example in which the display examples of FIG. 84 are combined, there is no overlap with the display mode of the expectation level display.

  That is, when the expectation level display of the second type pattern 2 is performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special display LED 612 (special display) is displayed without explicitly indicating whether the indication function display or the expectation level display is performed. Even if any display mode appears on the LED 612c), it is an expectation level display if the display mode is any of “0” to “9” and “F”, and otherwise, an indication function display is performed. It can be determined that there is.

  In addition, when the second type expectation level display shown in the above pattern 1 and pattern 2 is performed, in what order and timing the instruction function display and the expectation level display are displayed on the special display LED 612 Will be described in detail after [11-3-7-3]. In any case, by performing the second type expectation level display, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can display the expectation level in a display mode different from the display mode of the instruction function display. .

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the second type expectation level display is performed, which of the indication function display and the expectation level display is displayed for the display mode displayed on the special display LED 612 is displayed. Since it is identifiable, it is possible to execute the expected effect by the expectation level display without causing the player to misidentify, and the display of the expectation level can enhance the game entertainment. In addition, since the instruction function display and the expectation level display are displayed by the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409, an effect on the image display body 500 managed by the sub board 510 (for example, a screen related to navigation display or expectation level) Regardless of the presence or absence of display), it is possible to realize the above-described improvement of the game entertainment.

  In such an expectation display, the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409 is determined by the main board 409 itself, who determines the winning combination by lottery, and determines the provision of benefits based on the lottery result of the lottery. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to assume that the degree of expectation of the privilege directly related to the lottery result of the winning combination lottery is displayed, and to improve the reliability of the expectation degree display.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the second type expectation level display can be performed, the expectation level display is performed when a display mode different from the instruction function display is displayed on the special display LED 612. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the privilege from the point in the middle of the game. In particular, as described in the type 1 expectation level display, when a highly anticipated role is selected in the winning role lottery, the expectation level display is easier to execute than when a low expected role is selected. (For example, as exemplified in the first type, when the winning combination is a push-bell combination, the operation probability of the expectation display is set to 0.01, while when the winning combination is a weak watermelon combination, an expectation display is performed. If the expectation level is displayed, it is possible that the player is likely to be elected as a highly anticipated role, so the player's expectation on the expectation level is effective. Can be enhanced.

  Further, in a gaming state in which instruction function display is frequently executed such as an AT game, the instruction function display is displayed at the time of winning such as a push order bell, and the monotonous operation is simply repeated in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function display. Although it tends to become game characteristics, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by displaying the second type expectation degree display, the expectation degree display in a display mode different from the instruction function display can be performed. The possibility of occurring can be created, and monotonization of games such as during an AT game can be suppressed.

  In addition, although the expectation degree display illustrated in FIGS. 96 to 100 suggests the expectation degree when at least some display mode is displayed on the special display LED 612, the state where nothing is displayed on the special display LED 612. May also be regarded as one expectation level display (for example, the minimum expectation level).

[11-3-7-3. Priority display regarding expectation level display]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409 displays not only an instruction function display indicating an instruction content related to a predetermined game operation, but also an expectation display indicating an expectation degree of a privilege. Can do. The main board 409 can control to display the special display LED 612 with priority on either the expectation level display or the instruction function display during the unit game (one game) (priority display).

  Here, the above priority display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes display control (priority display of timing) with priority on display timing and display with priority on the display layer from the viewpoint of priority control. It can be divided into control (priority display of layer). In addition, from the viewpoint of priority, the priority display described above is an expectation priority display for displaying the expectation level display in preference to the instruction function display, and an instruction function for displaying the instruction function display in preference to the expectation level display. It can be divided into priority display.

  Hereinafter, such various priority displays will be described in detail with specific examples.

[11-3-7-3-1. Timing priority display]
Here, timing priority display will be described. In the priority display of timing, by providing a difference in priority in display timing between the expectation display and the instruction function display, when displaying the expectation display and the instruction function display in the unit game, The display with the higher priority is displayed on the special display LED 612 before the display with the lower priority. As for the setting of the priority difference in display timing, information in which priority is set in advance may be stored in the ROM 1112, or the main board 409 for each unit game based on the gaming state, the lottery result of the winning combination lottery, or the like. May perform processing to set.

  In the priority display of the timing, the display with the low priority is not displayed on the special display LED 612 just by turning off the display with the high priority. After the display with a high priority is turned off, the display with a low priority is turned on separately to display the low priority. Both instruction function displays are displayed on the special display LED 612.

(1) Expectation degree priority display First, the expectation degree priority display in which a higher priority is given to the expectation degree display than the instruction function display will be described. It should be noted that the priority of the instruction function display is lower than the expectation level display, but the instruction function display may be explicitly given a low priority, and is handled in an initial state in which no priority is given. May be.

  Further, in the expectation priority display, when both the expectation display and the instruction function display are displayed in the unit game, the expectation display is displayed on the special display LED 612 before the instruction function display. Even in such a case, it is preferable to switch to the instruction function display by the display timing at which the instruction function display should be performed. Specifically, for example, in a game in which it is decided to display the instruction content related to the first stop reel by the instruction function display (more specifically, the first reel stop operation is performed). Expected degree displayed before the operation is in a state where the operation can be accepted and before a predetermined timing of “start of accepting stop button press” shown in FIG. The display is turned off and the instruction function display is turned on, so that the instruction function display for instructing the operation mode of the first reel stop operation is displayed on the special display LED 612 after the predetermined timing. It is preferable.

  Further, assuming that the instruction function display is performed after the expectation level display is performed in the unit game, after the game operation based on the instruction content of the instruction function display is completed (for example, after the third stop button is pressed). The expectation level display may be displayed again on the special display LED 612. Then, the display mode of the expected level display displayed again may be different from the display mode of the expected level display previously displayed. Specifically, for example, “30%” is displayed in the previous expected level display. The display mode indicating the degree of expectation of the game, and the display mode indicating the expectation level of “80%” in the display of the expected level displayed again, thereby changing (raising or lowering) the degree of expectation within the same unit game. May be.

  FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining a display example when timing priority display (expectation priority display) is performed. FIG. 101A is a timing chart showing display periods of various displays, and FIG. 101B is a diagram showing transition of the liquid crystal screen example of the image display body 500 in the display example.

  Each item described on the horizontal axis in FIG. 101 (A) is a representative timing in the progress of the game, but the items other than the freeze start item and the freeze end item are the same as those described in FIG. Therefore, detailed description is omitted. “Freeze start” and “Freeze end” indicate the start timing and end timing when freeze control is performed during the rotation control of the reel 301. During the period in which this freeze control is being performed, the reel stop button Even if an operation on 211 is performed, the operation is not accepted and is invalid, and a stop operation for stopping the reel 301 cannot be performed on the reel stop button 211.

  On the vertical axis of FIG. 101A, an instruction function display 701, an expectation display 702, and a liquid crystal effect display 703 are described as various displays indicating the display period. The instruction function display 701 and the expectation level display 702 are both displayed on a special display LED 612 (more specifically, at least one of the special display LEDs 612a, 612b, and 612c). Means that the display is not performed. In FIG. 101A, a segment display example is described when the instruction function display 701 or the expectation level display 702 is ON. This segment display example is an example of the instruction function display example of FIG. 96 and the expectation level of FIG. A segment display example corresponding to the display example is used. However, such a segment display example is merely an example, and other instruction function display examples (see, for example, FIG. 80, FIG. 81, FIG. 83, FIG. 84, FIG. 86 to FIG. 88), and other expectations A segment display example corresponding to a display example (for example, see FIGS. 98 to 100) may be used.

  Further, the liquid crystal effect display 703 in FIG. 101A corresponds to an effect display displayed on the image display body 500 managed by the sub-board 510. When the display is ON, an expectation level display or instruction is displayed on the image display body 500. This means that the effect display related to the function display is performed, and when OFF, it means that the effect display related to the expectation level display or the instruction function display is not performed in the image display body 500. In general, the image display 500 displays some effects throughout the entire unit game. Even if the liquid crystal effect display 703 is OFF in FIG. 101A or a similar timing chart described later, the image display is performed. It does not mean that no effect is displayed on the body 500.

  FIG. 101 (B) shows a screen example of the effect display related to the expectation level display or the instruction function display displayed on the image display body 500 when the liquid crystal effect display 703 in FIG. 101 (A) is ON. ing. The screen example of FIG. 101 (B) is an example when a predetermined effect display is displayed on the image display body 500 based on the display mode of the expectation level display or the instruction function display on the special display LED 612. Thus, the effect display by the image display body 500 assists, so that the display mode of each display on the special display LED 612 can be more reliably transmitted to the player. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is not always necessary to perform such an effect display regarding the expectation level display or the instruction function display.

  The above description of each item in FIGS. 101A and 101B is the same in the same drawings (FIGS. 102 to 104) to be described later, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Referring to FIG. 101 (A) and FIG. 101 (B), the change in display as the game progresses will be described. First, after the game starts, the expectation display 702 is turned ON during the period from the start of reel rotation to the start of freeze. Then, the expectation level display of the display mode “30” is performed by the special display LED 612. Referring to FIG. 97, the expectation level display of the display mode “30” means that the expectation degree for the privilege is 30%. Note that the period during which the expectation level display is displayed is before the start of accepting the stop button press, so the player cannot perform a game operation for stopping the reel 301 (stop operation for the reel stop button 211). In addition, while the special display LED 612 is displaying the degree of expectation in the display mode “30”, the liquid crystal effect display 730 may display an effect display of “CHANCE?” (A), so that something can be expected from the game. It suggests to the player that it cannot. However, the expectation by the effect display of (a) does not give a stronger expectation than the effect display of (d) described later.

  Thereafter, when the freeze control is started, the expectation level display 702 is turned off. However, since the instruction function display 701 is not turned on yet at the timing immediately after the start of the freeze, nothing is displayed on the special display LED 612. The instruction function display 701 is turned ON when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the freeze, whereby the instruction function display of the display mode “31” is performed by the special display LED 612. Referring to FIG. 96, the instruction function display of the display mode “31” means the instruction content “the guide of the pressing place is the BAR symbol and the pressing order is the forward pressing”. Such an instruction function display is continuously displayed until the stop operation for all the reels 301 is completed (the third stop button is pressed), and then turned OFF. In the liquid crystal effect display 703, first, a freeze-only effect screen is displayed while the freeze control is being executed (effect display of (b)). After the freeze is completed, while the instruction function display 701 is ON, a navigation display based on the instruction content of the instruction function display of the display mode “31” is displayed (effect display of (c)). By performing the effect display of (b), the player is notified that freeze control has occurred, and by performing the effect display of (c), the instruction content display instruction instructions are assisted. The player can be encouraged to perform an appropriate game operation.

  After the third stop button is pressed, the instruction function display 701 is turned off and the expectation level display 702 is turned on again, and the special display LED 612 displays the expectation level. As shown in FIG. 101 (A), in the expectation level display 702 that is turned on again, a display mode “80” that is different from the display mode “30” in the previous expectation level display is displayed. The expectation level increased to 80%. In addition, the display mode of the liquid crystal effect display 703 is changed with the expectation level display 702 being turned on again, and as shown in FIG. 101 (B), an effect display of “CHANCE !!” (d) is performed. By this, the expectation in the game can be made higher than the effect display in (a).

  Thereafter, when the game progresses, the unit game (one game) ends with the completion of the payout. Then, when a medal is inserted for the next game, the liquid crystal effect display 703 displays the effect display (e) of “bonus confirmed!” To give a bonus bonus in the previous game that has ended. Teach that is confirmed. The effect display of (e) is turned OFF at the timing when the start lever is pressed so as not to disturb the effect display in the next game.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority that is given higher priority than the instruction function display by performing the priority display (expected priority display) as illustrated in FIG. 100 is performed. Since the display is first displayed on the special display LED 612 in the unit game, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the privilege from a relatively early stage in the unit game. In particular, when the game is in a gaming state in which the instruction function display is frequently displayed, such as during an AT game, a display different from the instruction function display may occur suddenly, which makes each game and player have a sense of tension and expectation. You can make it.

  Also, in a gaming state in which the instruction function display is frequently displayed, such as during an AT game, the expectation display is displayed first, so that the low-winning role of the push order unrecognized role in which the instruction function display is not performed (for details) , [11-3-7-1] etc.), and such a low winning combination is a high expectant with a relatively high degree of expectation for the benefits. It is possible to greatly improve the player's expectation for the provision of the privilege.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority display (expectation priority display) of timing is performed, so that the instruction function display having a lower priority than the expectation display is also taught by the instruction function display. Since the instruction function display can be performed on the special display LED 612 at a timing at which the player can execute a predetermined game operation, it is possible to prevent the player from performing the predetermined game operation and suffering a disadvantage. it can. Furthermore, after the display period of the instruction function display is ended, the display mode is made variable so that the expectation display can be displayed again, so that even if the expectation degree in the previous expectation display is relatively low, It is possible to make the player have hope that the degree of expectation may increase with the expectation level display. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority display of the timing (expected priority display) can be performed to maintain the player's interest in the game result throughout the entire unit game. The decrease can be suppressed.

  In addition, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display contents of the expectation display and the instruction function display that the liquid crystal effect display on the image display body 500 managed by the sub-board 510 is displayed by the special display LED 612. By assisting, it is possible to notify the player of information more reliably.

(2) Instruction function priority display Next, an instruction function priority display in which a higher priority is given to the instruction function display than the expectation level display will be described. The priority of the expectation display is lower than that of the instruction function display. However, a low priority may be explicitly given to the expectation display, and it is handled in an initial state in which no priority is given. May be.

  Further, in the instruction function priority display, when both the expectation level display and the instruction function display are displayed in the unit game, the expectation level display is displayed after the instruction function display is displayed in the special display LED 612. The expectation level display is displayed at a timing that avoids the period during which the instruction function display should be displayed.

  The specific “period for displaying the instruction function display” is at least the period from the start of accepting the stop button press (before a certain period of time) to the press of the third stop button. It is preferable that the expectation level display is displayed at any timing after the third stop button is pressed. However, if the instruction content displayed by the instruction function display is satisfied when the first reel stop operation is performed (for example, the instruction content indicating only the first stop reel), “display the instruction function display” The “power period” is not limited to the above. In such a case, without waiting for the completion of the stop operation (pressing the third stop button) for all the reels 301a to 301c, the timing before that (for example, the first period) The expectation may be displayed after the reel stop operation.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining a display example when timing priority display (instruction function priority display) is performed. FIG. 102A is a timing chart showing display periods of various displays, and FIG. 102B is a diagram showing transition of the liquid crystal screen example of the image display body 500 in the display example.

  Referring to FIG. 102 (A) and FIG. 102 (B), the display change as the game progresses will be described. First, after the game starts, the period from the start of reel rotation to the first stop button press through freeze control. The instruction function display 701 is turned ON, and the instruction function display of the display mode “29” is performed by the special display LED 612. Referring to FIG. 96, the instruction function display of the display mode “29” means the instruction content “the guide of the pressing place is red 7 symbols and the pressing order is the first right stop”. This instruction content corresponds to the instruction content instructing only the first stop reel since the stop order of the remaining reels 301a and 301b may be any if the reel 301c is stopped first. The indication function display of the mode “29” is turned OFF at the timing when the first stop button is pressed. During this period, the liquid crystal effect display 703 displays a navigation display based on the instruction content of the instruction function display of the display mode “29” (effect display of (a)).

  At the timing of pressing the first stop button, the indication function display 701 is turned off and the expectation display 702 is turned on, so that the expectation display of the display mode “F9” is performed by the special display LED 612. Referring to FIG. 97, the display of the expectation level of the display mode “F9” is a confirmed effect related to the provision of a privilege. The expectation level display is continuously displayed until the timing of the complete reel stop. In the liquid crystal effect display 703 during this period, an effect display ((b) effect display) suggesting that the degree of expectation for the privilege “Intense heat!” Is considerably high based on the expectation display. Can increase the expectation of the person.

  In FIG. 102A, the lower digit of the display mode of the expectation level display is “9” because the display mode “9” indicating the pressing order in the instruction function display is succeeded. In this way, even if the player does not notice that the display on the special display LED 612 has been changed from the instruction function display to the expectation display, the display mode indicating the pressing order is not changed, so that the game operation can be performed. You can avoid feeling anxious.

  According to FIG. 102 (A), after the expectation level display 702 is turned OFF at the timing of all reels stopping, both the instruction function display 701 and the expectation level display 702 are in an OFF state until the unit game is finished. . At this time, in the liquid crystal effect display 703, an effect display of (c) “Bonus confirmed!” Is displayed, thereby instructing that the provision of the bonus bonus in the game has been confirmed.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the priority display (instruction function priority display) of timing as illustrated in FIG. 101 is performed, so that the instruction function with higher priority than the expectation display is given. Since the display is first displayed in the special display LED 612 in the unit game, the expectation display may be displayed in the subsequent unit game even if the instruction function display is displayed. This gives the player a sense of expectation that it will appear, and has the effect of maintaining the gaming interest throughout the entire unit game. In particular, when an instruction function display is frequently displayed, such as during an AT game, even if the instruction function display is displayed, if the expectation level display is subsequently displayed, Since it can be expected to grant, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the timing priority display (instruction function priority display) is performed, the special display LED 612 can display the instruction function early in the unit game. An appropriate game operation based on the function display can be surely taught to the player, and the risk of the player performing an unfavorable game operation by overlooking the instruction function display can be avoided. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment as described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the lowering of the player's gaming interests due to adverse gaming operations and gives the player a sense of security. Can do.

  In addition, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display contents of the expectation display and the instruction function display that the liquid crystal effect display on the image display body 500 managed by the sub-board 510 is displayed by the special display LED 612. By assisting, it is possible to notify the player of information more reliably.

[11-3-7-3-2. Layer priority display]
Here, priority display of layers will be described. In the priority display of layers, a difference in priority in display control is provided between the display layer for displaying the expectation level and the display layer for displaying the instruction function. Even when the instruction function display is output in parallel to the display (for example, the special display LED 612), the display layer (upper display layer) with a higher priority is preferentially displayed on the special display LED 612. The For setting the priority difference in display control, information in which priority is set in advance may be stored in the ROM 1112, or the main board 409 for each unit game based on the gaming state, the lottery result of the winning combination lottery, or the like. May perform processing to set.

  In the priority display of the layer, the output of the display layer (upper display layer) with a higher priority is output from the situation where the expectation display and the instruction function display are output in parallel (both ON states). When turned off, the display on the special display LED 612 is switched to the display of the display layer (lower display layer) with a low priority.

  In addition, regarding the priority display of the layer layer, when the display device that is the output destination of the display layer is a segment LED such as the special display LED 612, only the display layer having a higher priority is displayed among the display layers output in parallel. For example, when a display capable of superimposed display, such as a liquid crystal display, is selected as the output destination, the output display layer is superimposed and displayed at the same time. Alternatively, highlighting may be performed by providing a difference in color, brightness, display cycle, or the like. However, when performing such superposition display, for example, when the display layer of the instruction function display is highlighted, the image display 500 performs effect display based on the instruction content of the instruction function display. It is preferable that auxiliary control is performed so that the player can recognize the displayed display layer.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing such priority display of the layer layers, mutual display such as no display period blank between the respective displays (expectation display and instruction function display) is performed. Even if the output timing is not adjusted in consideration of typical display timing, priority display of the upper display layer and switching of the display layer can be realized only by outputting at each output timing, so display control by the main board 409 is possible. The above load can be reduced, and as a result, the program capacity of the main board 409 can be reduced.

  In the following, regarding the priority display of layers, the expectation priority display and the instruction function priority display will be described respectively. However, regardless of what priority display is performed, the display mode of the instruction function display at the display timing at which the instruction function display should be performed Is displayed on the special display LED 612 as in the case of the priority display at the timing described above.

(1) Expectation priority display First, of the layer priority display, explanation is given on the expectation priority display realized by setting the display layer of the expectation display as the upper display layer and the display layer of the instruction function display as the lower display layer. To do.

  FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining a display example when layer priority display (expected priority display) is performed. FIG. 103A is a timing chart showing display periods of various displays, and FIG. 103B is a diagram showing transition of the liquid crystal screen example of the image display body 500 in the display example.

  The display example shown in FIG. 103 is a winning pattern that is not illustrated in FIGS. 49 and 50, but a bonus combination (for example, “BB1”) and a highly anticipated combination (for example, “strong watermelon combination”) by lottery for winning combination. And display example when winning simultaneously.

  Referring to FIGS. 103 (A) and 103 (B), the change in display as the game progresses will be described. First, after the game starts, the upper display layer starts from the reel rotation start to the predetermined timing after the freeze start. A certain degree of expectation display 702 is output (ON), and the expectation degree display of the display mode “90” is performed by the special display LED 612. Referring to FIG. 97, the display of the expectation level of the display mode “90” means a considerably high expectation degree that the degree of expectation for the privilege is 90%. Note that the period during which the expectation level display is displayed is before the start of accepting the stop button press, so the player cannot perform a game operation for stopping the reel 301 (stop operation for the reel stop button 211).

  On the other hand, the instruction function display 701 which is the lower display layer is turned on for a while after starting the reel rotation, but is not displayed on the special display LED 612 while the expectation display 702 is turned on (FIG. 103 ( Corresponding to the broken line part in A). If the expectation level display 702 is turned off before the freeze control ends, the output of the upper display layer disappears, and the display of the special display LED 612 is switched from the expectation level display 702 to the instruction function display 701. The instruction function display of the mode “26” is performed. Referring to FIG. 96, the instruction function display of the display mode “26” means the instruction content “the guide of the pressing place is red 7 symbols and the pressing order is reverse pressing”. Thereafter, the ON state of the instruction function display 701 continues until the third stop button is pressed, but the expectation display 702 which is the upper display layer does not enter the ON state during this time, so the instruction function display is continuously displayed on the special display LED 612. Is done.

  In addition, in the liquid crystal effect display 703, during the period from the start of reel rotation to the end of the freeze, the effect of (a) that indicates “high heat!” Is suggested as an effect display based on the display content of the expectation display 702. By performing the display, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game has a very high degree of expectation regarding the benefits. Thereafter, after the freeze control is finished, the special display is performed by performing the effect display of (b) as a navigation display based on the instruction content of the instruction function display 701 so that the red 7 symbol is aimed by reverse pressing. Since not only the LED 612 but also the image display body 500 can teach the player an appropriate game operation, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an inappropriate game operation.

  Thereafter, when the game progresses, the unit game (one game) ends with the completion of the payout. Then, when a medal is inserted for the next game, the effect display of (c) “Bonus confirmed!” Is performed, and it can be taught that the provision of the bonus privilege is confirmed in the previous game that has been completed. .

  Note that the sub-board 510 may change the display timing of the bonus confirmed effect in (c) based on the stop position of the reel 301, the operation mode by the player, and the like. Specifically, for example, when all the reels are stopped by reverse pressing according to the instruction content of the instruction function display 701, but the stop timing is shifted and the red 7 symbol alignment does not stop, When the symbol combination is stopped, display in the next game as shown in FIG. 103 (A) is performed. On the other hand, as a result of the appropriate stop operation being performed in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function display 701, when the red 7 symbol assemblage stops, the bonus finalization effect (c) is displayed at the timing of all reels stopping. You can do it. In this way, the sub-board 510 adjusts the display timing of the liquid crystal effect display based on the stop position of the reel 301 and the like, thereby enabling the effect display with little deviation from the game situation and having a sense of incongruity in the progress of the game. You can avoid it.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority display (expected priority display) of the layers illustrated in FIG. 103 is performed, so that the special display LED 612 displays the expected display and an appropriate display. Since it is possible to tell the player the appropriate game operation by switching to the instruction function display at the timing, the expectation for winning the highly expected role by the expectation level display and the expectation for the game result by performing the appropriate game operation Both feeling and can be enhanced. In particular, when a high expectation display appears as shown in FIG. 103, a game instructed by a subsequent instruction function display so as not to lose a privilege grant opportunity due to an inappropriate game operation. Can be careful with the operation.

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a situation where it is particularly important for the player to perform an appropriate stop operation, such as when a special replay combination having a different stop type is won depending on the pressing order, priority display of layers ( By performing the expectation priority display), it is possible to greatly expect a deterrent effect that prevents the player from performing an unfavorable game operation.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority level display (expected priority level display) is performed, so that the expected level display is preferentially displayed in a gaming state in which the instruction function display is frequently displayed such as during an AT game. It is possible to foresee that the player has won the low winning combination of the push order unrecognized combination in which the instruction function is not displayed (refer to the description of [11-3-7-1] for details). Since the low winning combination is a high expectation role with a relatively high expectation degree for the privilege, the player's expectation for the provision of the privilege can be greatly improved.

(2) Instruction function priority display Next, among the layer priority displays, the instruction function priority display realized by setting the display layer of the instruction function display as the upper display layer and the display layer of the expectation level display as the lower display layer. explain.

  FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining a display example when layer priority display (instruction function priority display) is performed. FIG. 104A is a timing chart showing display periods of various displays, and FIG. 104B is a diagram showing transition of the liquid crystal screen example of the image display body 500 in the display example. The display example shown in FIG. 104 is a display example when a weak cherry combination is won by a winning combination lottery.

  104 (A) and 104 (B) will be used to explain the change in display as the game progresses. First, after the game starts, the expectation level display that is the lower display layer from the start of reel rotation to the start of payout 702 is output in a display mode of “76” (ON). Referring to FIG. 97, the expectation level display of the display mode “76” means that the degree of expectation for the privilege is 76%. However, as indicated by the broken line in FIG. 104 (A), the instruction function display 701 which is the upper display layer is output (ON) from the predetermined timing after the start of the freeze until the third stop button is pressed. The special display LED 612 does not display the degree of expectation. Therefore, the period during which the expectation level display of the display mode “76” is displayed by the special display LED 612 is the “prior display period” from the reel rotation start to the predetermined timing after the freeze start, and from the third stop button press to the payout start. This is the “post-display period”.

  Then, the special display LED 612 displays the display mode “36” as the instruction function display from the “prior display period” to the “post-display period”. Referring to FIG. 96, the instruction function display of the display mode “36” means the instruction content “the guide of the pressing place is the BAR symbol and the pressing order is the reverse pressing”. Since the winning combination in the game is a weak cherry, it is originally an unquestionable combination, but when a stop operation is performed by reverse pressing aiming at the BAR symbol, the accessory 19 (weak) shown in FIG. Since the symbol combination of the cherry-compatible condition device) is drawn on the effective line, even if the game operation is performed with the instruction content, the game result is not disadvantageous for the player.

  To summarize the change of the display mode in the special display LED 612 shown in FIG. 104 (A), the expectation degree display of the display mode “76” is performed from the start of reel rotation to the predetermined timing after the start of freeze. Until the third stop button is pressed, the indication function display of the display mode “36” is switched, and from the third stop button press to the start of payout, the display is switched again to the expectation level display of the display mode “76”.

  Looking at the transition of the liquid crystal display example of the liquid crystal effect display 703, something may happen in the game because the effect display of “!” Is performed from the start of reel rotation to the end of freeze. It suggests to the player that there is no. In addition, since this display period is before the start of accepting the stop button press, even if the meaning of the effect display in (a) is not understood, there is no influence that causes the player to be confused about the subsequent game operation.

  Next, during the period from the end of the freeze until the third stop button is pressed, the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function of the display mode “36”. At this time, the liquid crystal effect display 703 displays the instruction function display 701. As the navigation display based on the instruction content, the effect display of (b) is performed in which the BAR symbol is aimed by reverse pressing. Since the effect display of (b) is performed, not only the special display LED 612 but also the image display body 500 can teach the player an appropriate game operation, so that the player can perform an inappropriate game operation. It can be suppressed not to do so.

  From the time the third stop button is pressed to the start of payout, the special display LED 612 displays the expected degree of the display mode “76”. At this time, the liquid crystal effect display 703 pays attention to the player's expected degree display. As an effect for making it happen, an effect display of (c) “Let's pay attention to Seg!” Is performed. By performing such an effect display of (c), even if there is a player who misses the expectation level display before the instruction function display is performed, the player is prompted to recognize the displayed expectation level display again. Therefore, it can be expected that the player can surely recognize that the expectation level is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the game progresses, the unit game (one game) ends with the completion of the payout. Then, when a medal is inserted for the next game, in order to teach that the privilege indicated by the expectation display is not given in the previous game, an effect display (d) “sorry! Is done. In addition, when the provision of the privilege suggested by the expectation level display is performed, an effect display that teaches the provision of the privilege such as “Successful addition!” May be performed. As for the timing at which the effect display of (d) is performed, the sub-board 510 may appropriately change the display timing as in the effect display of (c) in FIG.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the instruction function display is displayed by performing the priority display (instruction function priority display) of the layers as illustrated in FIG. 104, the subsequent unit game There is a possibility that the expectation level display is displayed in the game, so that the player has a sense of expectation that the expectation level display appears, and the effect of maintaining the game interest throughout the entire unit game is achieved. In particular, when an instruction function display is frequently displayed, such as during an AT game, even if the instruction function display is displayed, if the expectation level display is subsequently displayed, Since it can be expected to grant, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since priority display of layers (instruction function priority display) is performed, as long as the display mode of instruction function display is output, the special display LED 612 is displayed with the highest priority. The instruction function display can be surely executed at an appropriate timing for teaching the player about an appropriate game operation. As a result, an appropriate gaming operation based on the instruction function display can be surely taught to the player, and the risk of the player performing an unfavorable gaming operation by overlooking the instruction function display is avoided. be able to. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment as described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the lowering of the player's gaming interests due to adverse gaming operations and gives the player a sense of security. Can do.

  In addition, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display contents of the expectation display and the instruction function display that the liquid crystal effect display on the image display body 500 managed by the sub-board 510 is displayed by the special display LED 612. By assisting, it is possible to notify the player of information more reliably. In particular, the importance of the special display LED 612 can be increased by performing an effect that draws attention to the special display LED 612 as in the effect display of (c) described in FIG.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a feature when performing the priority display of the layer, the special display LED 612 outputs another display layer below the upper display layer, thereby displaying the upper display. When the output of a layer is turned off, the next display mode can be displayed in an extremely short time because the lower display layer can be displayed without causing a time lag other than the time required for switching the display. It is possible to realize a display effect with a sense of urgency. Specifically, for example, the moment when the player presses the third stop button (or the third time), such as switching from the effect display of (b) described in FIG. 104 (B) to the effect display of (c). The moment that the hand is released from the stop button), the display mode of the instruction function display can be switched to the display mode of the expectation level display, so that the display mode of the special display LED 612 changes each time each game operation is performed. It can make a player expect.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display (special display LED 612) managed by the main board 409 that controls the progress of the game, regardless of whether the timing priority display or the layer priority display is performed. ), It is possible to display different types of indications such as an indication function display and an expectation level display, and an indication function display or an expectation in a situation where both an indication function display and an expectation level display can be displayed during a unit game. Any one of the degree displays can be preferentially displayed. In a conventional general slot machine, a lot of information is given to the player by performing various effect displays on the effect display device managed by the sub-board (corresponding to the image display body 500 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment). However, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, such a problem is solved, although it has been difficult to maintain the interest of the player by itself. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine to which a new game property that is not found in a conventional gaming machine is added.

[11-3-7-4. Other expectation display]
In the above [11-3-7-1] to [11-3-7-3], the processing in the case of displaying the expectation level display on the display (special display LED 612) on which the instruction function display is performed has been described. However, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, other expectation levels can be displayed. In the following, other indications of expectation that can be executed in the slot machine of this embodiment will be listed and described. In addition, the expectation level display enumerated below can be utilized in combination with the expectation level display demonstrated in [11-3-7-1]-[11-3-7-3] suitably.

(1) Expectation level display based on change in display form of instruction function display In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display form of the instruction function display displayed by the special display LED 612 is changed to the display form while maintaining the display contents. It is possible to display the degree of expectation by changing.

  Specifically, for example, when the expected display is not performed, the display mode is changed to a low-speed flashing (flashing with a long cycle) when the segment display according to the instruction is only lit during normal times. In such a case, a low expectation degree display such as the segment display “L” in FIG. 99A is used, and when high-speed blinking (flashing in a short cycle) is performed, the segment of FIG. 99A is displayed. A high expectation level display such as the display “H” may be used. Although such a display form is only an example, by performing an expectation display with different expectation levels based on various display forms, as an expectation degree related to a privilege, for example, an expectation degree at which an AT game is added You can make a difference or suggest the number of games to be added.

(2) Expectation degree display as a notice display In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the instruction function display is performed on the special display LED 612, before the display mode showing the specific instruction content is displayed, the display is performed. A degree of expectation that the degree of expectation related to the privilege becomes higher when a predetermined display form (fake display similar to blinking display or instruction function display) different from the aspect can be displayed and the predetermined display form is displayed. Display may be performed.

  Specifically, for example, when the indication function display is to be performed in the display mode “13” on the special display LED 612, the segment blinks rapidly before the display mode “13” is completely displayed. An expectation level display indicating that the game has a high expectation level for the privilege may be performed. In addition, when such high-speed flashing occurs, the display mode “13” of the instruction function display is not displayed completely (the instruction function display is stopped), and the display mode is displayed in a predetermined expectation level display. Or an effect that suggests a sense of expectation for a privilege may be performed on the image display body 500. In addition, when the instruction function display is canceled, internally, it is not a game that is determined to display the instruction function when the push order small role is won. It is preferable that the game wins a role of watermelon or watermelon.

(3) Expectation degree display in which display mode can be changed in stages In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above in [11-3-7-1] to [11-3-7-3], special When the display LED 612 can display a predetermined expectation level display, the expectation level display increases the degree of expectation as the display time and the number of times of display increase by displaying the display mode of the expectation level display in multiple stages. May be performed.

  Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the display mode of “50” is finally displayed as the expectation level display, instead of displaying “50” once on the special display LED, “10”, It is possible to display such that “20” and “50” are divided into a plurality of stages and the degree of expectation is gradually increased. The specific display process of the stepwise expectation level display is not limited to the incremental display as in the above example. For example, the expectation level is lowered and then the high expectation level is displayed at the end. It is possible to display the final degree of expectation after displaying the degree of expectation several times.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the expectation level display is performed on the special display LED 612, the target function (target benefit) indicated by the expectation level display is displayed within the same unit game. It can also be suggested by the display. Specifically, in the special display LED 612, after the display mode of “10” and “20” is displayed as the expectation level and the display mode of “50” is finally displayed, the instruction “Aim for the red 7 pattern” is displayed. When the instruction function display of the content is displayed, the expectation degree of “50%” by the expectation display is the expectation degree for “red 7 symbol set” suggested by the instruction function display. That is, even if 100% expectation is indicated by the expectation level display, the target benefit varies depending on the instruction content of the instruction function display. In some cases, it may be a low privilege such as a bell pattern match. In this way, by associating the target of the expectation level by the expectation level display with the indication function display, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only the expectation level suggested by the expectation level display but also the indication function indication is suggested. Since the target privilege can also be given meaning, the player's interest can be maintained through the unit game.

(4) Expectation level display that produces display possibility of specific mode indicating execution of lottery related to appearance, In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the specific mode is displayed on the indicator (special display LED 612) where the indication function is displayed. When a lottery related to the appearance of a ball is performed in the case where is displayed, an expectation that directs whether or not a specific mode is displayed in a stepwise manner by displaying a predetermined expectation level with the special display LED 612 A degree of production can be realized.

  FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining an expectation level display that produces whether or not a specific mode can be displayed. In FIG. 105, the display transition of the expectation level display in which the display mode changes stepwise in one segment LED (special display LED 612c) is shown. Here, when “3” is displayed in a segment, it is assumed that a “specific mode” is displayed, and a lottery (for example, adding the number of AT games) related to playing is performed. As shown in FIG. 105, in the special display LED 612c, first, the 7-segment portion includes “(a) upper stage lighting”, “(b) middle stage lighting”, “(c) lower stage lighting”, “(d) upper right stage lighting. It will be lit in the order of "". After that, if “(e) lower right stage lighting” is achieved after a certain waiting time, “3” of the specific mode is completed as the segment display, so that it is determined that the lottery related to the appearance is performed (expectation) Successful production results). On the other hand, when “(f) lower left lit” is displayed after (d), “2” is displayed as the segment display, which indicates that the lottery related to the appearance is not performed (expectation) Failure results). It should be noted that it is preferable that the result of the expectation effect is also clearly shown on the image display body 500.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an expectation level display as illustrated in FIG. 105 is performed, so that an indicator (for example, a special display LED 612c) for displaying an instruction function display is different from the instruction function display. Not only can the expectation level display be made possible, but also an expectation level effect that can be completed only by the display device. Thus, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine capable of executing an important effect on the display managed by the main board 409. Note that, in the case where an expectation effect is performed on the display managed by the main board 409 (for example, the special display LED 612), “7” is displayed on the display managed by the sub board 510 (for example, the image display body 500). It is preferable to display an alert such as “Look at the segment display” so as to attract the player's interest in the display where the expectation effect is performed.

  The above is the description of the gaming state in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. However, the lottery table used in various internal lotteries for controlling the gaming state does not need to be one, for example, A plurality of setting values (for example, four stages from setting values 1 to 4) may be provided, and different lottery tables may be used for each setting value. Specifically, each setting value has a difference (step difference, extreme difference, etc.) in the internal lottery probability. The set value may be such that a lottery probability such as a bonus winning combination and an AT winning rate is more preferentially set as the set value becomes higher, such as set value 1 <set value 2 <set value 3 <set value 4. For example, compared to the set value 1, the set value 4 has a high probability of winning BB1, so the possibility of winning BB1 is high. By providing stepwise set values in this way, the slot machine 1 can be used as a clue when the player guesses the set value by giving a characteristic to each set value or according to the management of the hall or the like. Can be operated. The setting value is not limited to the above.

[11-4. Reel stop processing]
When the start-up process is completed, an operation for stopping a reel that continues to rotate at a constant speed (stop operation, that is, pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) is waited. FIG. 106 shows the content of reel stop processing by the “table method” as an example. Hereinafter, the flow of the reel stop control process will be described.

  In the reel stop process, first, in step S201, a reel stop control table is selected in accordance with a condition device that operates in accordance with the result of the internal lottery in the game. This reel stop control table is prepared in advance with patterns corresponding to all the condition devices in a one-to-one correspondence, and these are stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409 as read-only table data.

  When the reel stop control table is selected based on the conditional device established in step S201 described above, it enters a standby state until a pressing operation of each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c is accepted (step S202). , S210, S217). In these standby states, whether each of the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c has already stopped, or the first reel stop flag is not ON (F = 0, that is, OFF) It is also determined whether any one of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is pressed. Until all the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are pressed, the determination in step S209 is not satisfied, and the processes in and after step S202 are repeated.

  Here, the order in which the pressing operations of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are accepted (stop operation procedure) is “forward press”, “squeeze press”, “middle forward press”, “middle reverse” as described above. There are six types of “press”, “reverse pinch press”, and “reverse press”. In the following description regarding FIG. 106, the order of these presses is focused on the reel stop button 211 on which the press operation has been performed. Then, sort them in the order of the three pushes. That is, the case where the first stop reel is the left reel 301a is referred to as “forward pressing”, the case where it is the middle reel 301b is referred to as “middle pressing”, and the case where it is the right reel 301c is referred to as “reverse pressing”.

  In step S202, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the left reel 301a has been stopped (the left reel stop flag LF) is OFF (LF = 0), and the pressing operation of the left reel stop button 211a has been accepted. To do. If it is assumed in step S201 that the left reel stop button 211a is first pressed (first) in accordance with the “forward press” stop operation procedure from the standby state of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c, step S202 is performed. The determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S203.

  In step S203, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0). The “first reel” as used herein refers to a reel that receives a stop operation first or stops first. In this example (“forward press”), the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) because the stop operation of the left reel 301a is accepted first. Therefore, the determination at step S203 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S204.

  In the next step S204, a first reel stop process is performed on the left reel 301a. In this first reel stop process, control of the stop position of the winning symbol corresponding to the internal lottery flag is executed based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the operating condition device.

  In step S206, the reel stop control table for the remaining middle reel 301b and right reel 301c is determined. As described above, since the slot machine 1 has only two effective lines, a right-up line and a right-down line, there is only one stop control table for the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) at this time. Can be determined. That is, among the symbols in the symbol display window 401 of the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 301a) (this is referred to as a stop eye, the same applies hereinafter), the symbol at the upper or lower position can be the winning combination symbol. If the symbol has a characteristic, a reel stop control table is selected that can align the corresponding winning symbol of the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) on the effective line based on the symbol. It will be.

  In step S207, the first reel stop flag is set to ON (F = 1), and the process proceeds to next step S208.

  Next, in step S208, the left reel stop flag LF is set to ON (LF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, it is determined whether all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped. In this example, the left reel stop flag LF has only been turned ON, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are still rotating. Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the processing returns to step S202 and the subsequent processing is repeated. Run.

  Then, when the processing from step S202 is executed again, the left reel 301a is already in the stopped state, so the determination in step S202 is not satisfied, and the routine goes to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the flag indicating that the middle reel 301b has been stopped (the middle reel stop flag MF) is OFF (MF = 0) and that the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b has been accepted. To do. Here, in order to follow the stop operation procedure of “forward press”, the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. Therefore, the determination at step S210 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S211.

  In step S211, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) as in step S203 described above. At this time, since the first reel stop flag is already ON (F = 1), this determination is not satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S213.

  In step S213, as the middle reel stop process, control of the stop position of the winning winning symbol based on the reel control table corresponding to the operating condition device (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S206 above). Execute. At this time, the middle reel 301b becomes the second stopped reel (second reel), and steps S212, S214, and S215 are all bypassed, and the process proceeds to step S216, where the middle reel stop flag MF is turned on (MF = 1). Then, the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are only stopped, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and is in a stopped state (the right reel stop flag RF is OFF). Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the process returns to step S202, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  Further, in the processing after step S202 for the third time, it is first determined in step S217 whether the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF = 0) and the pressing operation of the right reel stop button 211c is accepted. However, the subsequent processes in steps S218 and S220 are the same as the processes in steps S210 and subsequent steps (steps S211 and S213), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In step S223, the right reel stop flag RF is set to ON (MF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  Finally, in step S209, since all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in a stopped state at this time, this determination is satisfied, and the reel stop process ends.

  In the case of the “middle press” stop operation procedure, the same description as above can be made, and the details are omitted. However, since the “reverse pressing” stop operation procedure is partially different from the above description, it will be described below.

  The “reverse push” stop operation procedure differs from the “forward push” or “middle push” stop operation procedure described above in step S221 (determination of the remaining reel stop control table after the first reel stop process). is there. That is, in the “reverse push” stop operation procedure, only the right reel 301c is stopped, and if there is any winning symbol in the lower position among the stops of the right reel 301c, there are still two valid It is possible to arrange the winning symbols in any line. Therefore, at the stage of step S221, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols on any active line are prepared, and any one may be selected.

[11-4-1. Reel stop control]
In the reel stop process described above, reel stop control for drawing the winning symbol (corresponding winning symbol) corresponding to the establishment flag into the symbol display window 401 as much as possible (so-called pull-in control) is performed. Specifically, when a player's reel stop operation is accepted, a range that can be stopped in the symbol display window 401 (a range in which the corresponding winning symbol can be drawn, for example, four symbols). Minutes) is determined in advance, and if the corresponding winning combination symbol is within the range, control is performed to pull the symbol into the symbol display window 401 and stop the reel. The “retractable range” here refers to the maximum number of symbols that can be moved in the rotation direction of the reel from when the reel stop operation is accepted until the reel stops. Say. For example, if the pullable range is a maximum of 4 symbols, when a reel stop operation is accepted, the reel can be further rotated up to 4 symbols based on the position.

  Therefore, according to such reel stop control, even if there is no corresponding winning symbol in the symbol display window 401 at the time when the reel stop operation is received, the corresponding winning symbol is within the range that can be drawn. If there is, the winning winning symbol can be moved to the symbol display window 401 and stopped. In addition, by performing this pull-in control, even if the player is slightly ahead of the winning winning symbol, if the winning winning symbol is within the pullable range, the winning symbol is displayed as a symbol. It can be pulled into the window 401 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress as much as possible the occurrence of losing (the winning bonus cannot be obtained and the gaming bonus corresponding to the winning bonus cannot be acquired and the gaming bonus disappears).

  In the slot machine 1, when the condition device corresponding to the replay role or the push order unrecognized bell (bell 1, bell 2), etc. is operating, the winning winning symbol is always displayed without requiring the player's attention. Can be aligned. This is because, for the symbols constituting the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay combination, bell 1, bell 2, etc., the corresponding winning combination symbols are arranged at intervals of a maximum of four symbols ( (See FIG. 46 above). In the reel pull-in control, when the maximum number of pull-in is 4 (4 frames), the symbols arranged at intervals of 4 as described above are always valid regardless of the push timing (push position). It becomes possible to draw in the line.

  Specifically, for example, when the replay symbols are arranged in the middle when a predetermined replay role is won, focusing on the replay symbols, on the left reel 301a, the other symbols are the largest between the replay symbols and the replay symbols. Four are arranged (see FIG. 46). As a result, in the left reel 301a, regardless of the position of the reel at which the stop operation is accepted, as long as the condition device corresponding to the replay function is operating, the replay symbol is always drawn into one of the active lines and stopped. be able to.

  Further, when the result of the internal lottery is a double combination of a bonus combination and a small combination, the small combination is preferentially drawn over the bonus symbol. If a winning combination of a bonus combination and a small combination is won, even if a symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is displayed in the selected game, the established state of the bonus combination is maintained after the next game, and the next game In a game in which a subsequent small combination (or replay combination) is not established, a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed.

  The above is an example of the reel stop process by the table method. In addition to this, there is a reel stop process by a control method, but since a known process can be applied to this, a specific description is omitted here. In the first embodiment, either the control method or the table method of reel stop processing may be executed, and which method is to be adopted may be determined as appropriate when the control program is constructed.

[11-5. Determination process]
When the reel stop process is completed, the main board 409 has a winning combination symbol on any active line in the symbol display window 401 (a combination mode of symbols corresponding to any winning combination is displayed). Whether or not) is determined. In FIG. 107, the contents of this determination processing will be specifically described.

  When all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped by the reel stop process, the winning combination symbols are aligned on any of the active lines from the stop eye form in the symbol display window 401 (corresponding to the winning combination) It is determined whether or not a combination mode of symbols to be displayed is displayed). In particular, the stop eye when all the reels 301 are stopped is referred to as a stop eye.

  First, in step S301, it is determined whether a bonus game is in progress. This is to determine the ON state (= 1) and OFF state (= 0) of a predetermined game state flag (for example, a bonus game flag). If the bonus game flag is ON (= 1), the determination in step S301 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S302. If the bonus game flag is OFF (= 0), the determination in step S301 is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S312.

  In step S302, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the active line is a bonus symbol (a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination). The determination of the symbol combination will be described using a specific example. If the bonus is the two types BB shown in FIG. 49 and the like, the symbol combination corresponding to the two types BB is a symbol arrangement of “red 7” on the active line (See condition device “BB1” in FIG. 53.) When such symbol arrangement is stopped on any diagonal line, it can be determined that the two types of BB symbols (bonus symbols) have stopped. In this way, when it is determined that the symbol combination of the bonus symbols has stopped on the active line (YES in step S302), a bonus game start process relating to the start of the bonus game is performed (step S303), and then the process is terminated. To do. The bonus game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S302 that the symbol combination stopped on the active line is not a bonus symbol (NO in step S302), the process proceeds to step S304.

  In step S304, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the active line is a replay symbol (a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination). If it is determined that the symbol combination is a replay symbol, a replay game process is executed ( Step S305). In this replay game process, the MAX bet command is temporarily stored in the RAM 1114 in order to start the next game with the same bet number (MAX bet in this example) as the bet number in the game. Based on this command, the next game can be started as a replay. After the process of step S305, the replay winning flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S306), and the process ends.

  When it is determined in step S304 that the symbol combination stopped on the active line is not a replay symbol (NO in step S304), as the next determination process, the symbol combination is a small character symbol (a symbol combination indicating a small character winning). ) Is determined (step S308). If it is determined in step S308 that the symbol is a small role symbol, as a process in step S309, a prescribed number of medals are paid out according to the arranged small role symbols (a prescribed number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110). put out). Then, the medal payout number is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612). Thereby, the player is notified (notified and displayed) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the small role has been paid out. And after the process of step S309 is complete | finished, the applicable small role winning flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S310), and a process is complete | finished.

  If it is determined in step S308 that the symbol combination stopped on the active line is not a small role symbol (NO in step S308), none of the above determinations in steps S302, S304, and S308 is satisfied, and any symbol on the active line There are no winning symbols. Note that the outcome at this time is also referred to as “losing eye (disjoint pattern combination mode)”. In such a case, a loss process is executed (step S311). In the losing process, when the winning flag that is ON (= 1) at this time is a winning flag other than the bonus, the winning flag is turned OFF (= 0). If none of the winning flags is ON (= 1) (in this case, the loss flag is ON (= 1)), the loss flag is turned OFF (= 0). After the loss process in step S311, the determination process ends.

  The above-described processing from step S302 to step S311 is processing executed when the gaming state is controlled to the general state or the bonus internal state. Next, the process after step S312 performed when determination of step S301 is not satisfy | filled is demonstrated. The process here is a process executed during a bonus game (BB game) in which the gaming state is controlled to the bonus state.

  In step S312, it is determined whether bonus game payout symbols are aligned on the active line. “Bonus game payout symbol” as used herein refers to a collective term of symbol combinations in which medals are paid out when they are aligned during a bonus game. This is a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination whose payout is prescribed in the state or the internal state, but a special bonus exclusive combination may be prepared). If an affirmative determination is obtained in step S312, a prescribed number of medals are paid out according to the bonus game payout symbols that have been prepared (step S313). In the medal payout process, a predetermined number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110 and the medal payout number is displayed on the payout number display LED 612. Through such medal payout processing, the player is notified (notified and displayed) that a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the bonus game payout has been paid out.

  Following step S313, in step S314, a bonus game end determination process for determining whether or not to end the bonus game is executed (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 109), and then the determination process ends.

  If it is determined in step S312 that the bonus game payout symbol has not stopped (NO in step S312), the establishment flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S315), and the process ends. As a pattern that is NO in step S312, it is conceivable that a bonus game payout combination is won, but is eliminated, and a bonus game payout combination is not won. In the process of step S315, in the former case, the bonus game payout establishment flag is turned off, and in the latter case, the lose flag is turned off. If a bonus special combination that is always won during the bonus game is prepared, and the bonus special combination is won, the process of step S315 can be performed. May be omitted.

  The processing in steps S301 to S315 described above is gaming state determination processing performed by the main board 409 (particularly the CPU 1110). Thereafter, AT game determination processing is performed in step S320.

  Since the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment has the AT function as described above, a determination process (AT game determination process) regarding the continuation and termination of the AT game and the management of the number of games for each game. ) Is necessary. Since the AT game determination process corresponds to a process of performance that affects the generation of an instruction, the main board 409 executes it.

  It should be noted that the timing at which the AT game determination process is performed may be any suitable timing of the determination processes shown in FIG. 107, but here, as an example, the processes of steps S306, S310, S311, S314, and S315 are performed. Later, it is assumed that the AT game determination process in step S320 is performed. Details of the AT game determination process will be described in [11-5-3] with reference to FIG.

[11-5-1. Bonus game start processing]
If the determination in step S302 in FIG. 107 is satisfied, a bonus game start process is executed. This bonus game start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether a bonus flag (for example, BB flag) is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S401 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the bonus game flag is turned on (= 1) and the bonus flag is turned off (= 0). Next, in step S406, the cumulative payout number count in the bonus game is cleared. Thereby, accumulation of the cumulative payout number is executed from the next game. From the next game, the bonus game is started with a specified number of bets of the bonus game (in this example, the specified number of BB games is two).

  If the determination in step S401 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S402 and error processing is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where bonus symbols are aligned even though the bonus flag is OFF (= 0). In other words, this may occur when any illegal means (for example, goto action) is performed or when a failure occurs in the slot machine 1. Accordingly, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on, and other indications are made to notify the occurrence of an error to the above-described LED or the like.

[11-5-2. Bonus game end determination process]
Next, the bonus game end determination process in step S314 of FIG. 107 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S451, in response to the payout of medals in step S313 of FIG. 107 described above, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the bonus game.

  Next, in step S452, it is determined whether or not the cumulative payout number exceeds the total payout number specified for each bonus (for example, 200). If the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S454 to display the cumulative payout number in the bonus game (displayed on the payout number display LED 612, etc. The cumulative payout number is provided with a display LED or the like separately. It may be displayed on this).

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the bonus game flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S460), and the process ends.

[11-5-3. AT game determination process]
FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the AT game determination process. As described above in [11-3-2] and the like, the AT game is a game that is executed on the basis of winning the AT in the AT lottery. When the winning combination of “push order bell” is won, instruction information such as “appropriate push order” is displayed on the special display LED 612 (instruction function display), and a teaching effect (navigation display) along the instruction function display is displayed. It is displayed on the image display 500 or the like. The AT game determination process is a determination process related to the start, continuation, and end of such an AT game, and is executed by the main board 409 (particularly, the CPU 1110) that is an AT control entity. Hereinafter, an example of the AT game determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, an outline of the AT game will be described. The AT game is started when the AT game start condition is satisfied, and is continuously executed in the subsequent game period until the AT end condition is satisfied. [11-3-2] As described in the following instruction function process, when the AT game start condition is satisfied, a predetermined internal flag (AT flag) is turned ON (= 1) and the AT game is started. Is started, and the AT flag is turned OFF (= 0) at the end of the AT game. It should be noted that information such as an AT flag such as an AT flag and the number of AT games to be described later are held in a memory (eg, RAM 1114) in the main board 409 that controls the AT game. Similar information may be held in a memory (for example, the RAM 1122).

  The conditions for starting the AT game (conditions for turning on the AT flag) are as described in detail in [11-3-2] below. In simple terms, the state in which the AT is won in the AT lottery ( When the AT internal flag is ON), the start condition of the winning AT is satisfied. In addition, as described above, when the AT flag is turned ON and the AT game starts, the AT internal flag is turned OFF.

  In step S501 of FIG. 110, as the first process of the AT game determination process, the current AT flag is compared with the AT flag in the AT game determination process of the previous game, and whether or not the AT flag is ON (= 1). Determine. That is, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is changed from OFF to ON from the previous game to the current game. It is assumed that the value of the AT flag in the AT game determination process of the previous game is stored separately. If it is determined that the AT flag is turned on (YES in step S501), the number of AT games at the start of AT is set (step S502), and the process is terminated. The number of AT games at the start of the AT (so-called initial game number) may be set in advance as a fixed game number, or may be determined by other methods when the AT is won. However, here, as an example, it is assumed that the initial number of games determined in the above-described instruction function processing is set as the number of AT games at the start of AT.

  By performing the process in step S502 as described above, the AT game is started from the next game. At the start of the AT game, an effect is given (for example, display of an AT start screen) in which the AT game is started and the number of AT games is clearly indicated to the player.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S501 that the AT flag is ON, that is, if the AT flag is OFF or the AT flag is ON from the previous game (NO in step S501), the AT flag is It is determined whether or not ON (= 1) (step S505). If it is determined that the AT flag is ON (YES in step S505), it means that one game in the AT game has been performed, and therefore, a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the number of AT games is performed ( Step S506). If it is determined in step S505 that the AT flag is not ON (NO in step S505), the process is terminated as it is because the AT game is not in progress.

  Here, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the number of AT games is added based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during the AT game, apart from the number of games at the start determined at the start of the AT game. Suppose that it has an add-on function. When the number of AT games is added, a predetermined internal flag (addition flag) is turned ON (= 1), and the number of AT games to be added (number of added games) is determined. The condition for determining the extra is not particularly limited, and may be a winning of a specific winning combination in the winning lottery, or may be determined based on some other lottery result. Further, the method for determining the number of added games is not limited to a special method. Then, the following processes in steps S507 to S509 are performed when the function for adding the number of AT games is provided.

  First, in step S507, it is determined whether or not the extra flag is ON (= 1). If the extra flag is ON (YES in step S507), a process of adding the extra game number to the current AT game number is performed (step S508), and the extra flag is turned OFF (= 0) (step S509). . As a result, the number of remaining AT games is increased by an additional amount, and the duration of the AT game advantageous to the player is extended.

  After the process of step S509 (if the add-on function is not provided, after the process of step S506), it is determined whether or not the current number of AT games is “0” (step S510). Since the AT game end condition is satisfied, the AT flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S511), and the process ends. At this time, not only the end of the AT game is clearly indicated to the player, but also information related to a series of AT games (for example, the total number of payout medals and the number of AT games continued in the AT game) is clearly indicated to the player You can do it.

  If it is determined in step S510 that the current number of AT games is not “0” (NO in step S510), the AT game end condition is not satisfied, and thus the process is ended without changing the AT flag. As a result, the AT game is continued in the subsequent games.

  The AT game determination process described with reference to FIG. 110 is a processing example in a case where the game period (AT game period) controlled to the gaming state for the AT game is a system in which one count is subtracted for each game. When the AT game period is managed by another subtraction method (for example, a method in which the AT game period is determined by the number of appearances of AT navigation), it is desirable to perform an appropriate AT game determination process according to the subtraction method. .

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an internal flag indicating the start of the AT game (for example, an AT start flag) may be prepared separately from the AT flag for the AT game determination process. The AT start flag is an internal flag that is turned on (= 1) when the AT initial lottery is won and the AT game start condition is satisfied. In such a case, in a series of processes by the AT game determination process, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the AT start flag is ON. If the AT start flag is ON, the initial game of the AT is determined in step S502. After the number is set, the AT flag is turned ON and the AT start flag is turned OFF. If the AT start flag is OFF in Step S501, the processing after Step S505 is executed. You can do it.

[11-6. Control of production operation]
The above is mainly an example of control by the main board 409, but in the slot machine 1, various presentation operations are controlled by the sub board 510 as the game progresses. This is executed by the sub board 510 (mainly the CPU 1118) based on various commands (information command, output signal) outputted from the main board 409. As described above, various commands output from the main board 449 are temporarily stored in the RAM 1122. Then, based on the command, an effect mode prepared in advance is selected and executed. Such effect modes are stored in the ROM 1120 as an effect mode data table (not shown), and a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the command are prepared.

  For example, the production mode includes a game completed only by the game (hereinafter referred to as a single production mode), a game performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter referred to as a continuous production mode), and the like. Among these, the single-shot effect mode includes an effect that suggests the winning flag (suggestion effect, notification effect, details will be described later), an effect that informs the payout of medals (an appearance that pays out appearance, and may be an aspect that informs the number of payouts), etc. There is.

  The suggestion effect is different from the effect (notification effect) that directly informs the player of the winning flag, that is, an effect that indirectly informs the winning flag, for example, the form of the winning combination corresponding to the winning flag. In other words, a display that expresses a color or the like is performed. The suggestion effect is also performed when the winning flag is not present (that is, when the game is lost). In this case, it is set as an effect of content that is difficult to notice that it is lost (for example, ambiguous content that can be taken with any winning combination). Thereby, it can be made difficult for the player to notice that the game is lost.

  For example, in the case where the winning flag is a bonus combination or when an AT lottery is won in the AT lottery, the notice effect is clearly notified to the player of the game-related results such as “Bonus confirmed!” And “AT winning!”. It is something that can be done. This effect is more effective when executed for a winning combination that is particularly pleasing to the player, such as a bonus or AT (because a large amount of medals can be obtained). That is, when a player wins an AT or the like, it is possible to give a meaning to congratulate the player.

  In addition, as a continuous production mode, there are those corresponding to game states such as a general state, a bonus internal state, and a bonus state. These are clarifications about the game state, and the player can perform these effects (continuous effects) to determine whether the current game state is, for example, the general state or not. It becomes easy to distinguish whether it is a state or not.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, not only the continuous performance mode corresponding to the above gaming state (general state, bonus internal state, bonus state) but also [11-3-3] etc. The continuous effect can be executed in a manner that suggests or teaches whether or not to shift to a special game (for example, an AT game) advantageous to the player, such as an AT sign effect. Further, such a continuous effect is not limited to the control by the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510), and may be controlled by the main board 409. Furthermore, although such a continuous effect may be completed in one game, it is continuously executed in a manner in which related effect contents are displayed over a plurality of games, and finally the result is displayed. It is common. In the instruction function processing of the first embodiment, as a display form of “prediction effect”, a title display of one game is first performed, and then “continuous effect” is performed from one game to a plurality of games. Although explained, it can be said that the “predictive effect” is a continuous effect as a whole. And when the result of such a continuous effect (for example, a predecessor effect) is displayed, the player can recognize whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game is performed in a subsequent game.

  The various effects described above can be executed as image display by the image display body 500, generation of sound effects by the speaker 512 or the like, light emission or lighting by LED decoration or the like. Such a production mode can make it difficult to give a boring impression when the player continues the game for a long time. The production mode is not limited to being executed by the image display body 500, the speaker 512, the LED decoration, or the like. For example, instead of the image display body 500, an EL display (Electroluminescence Display) or a dot LED may be used. Furthermore, dolls imitating characters, movable models, etc., and side reels (for example, they are placed at different positions from each reel, and can be started and stopped regardless of player operations as part of the production. It is also possible to provide various effects by providing illumination such as a lamp (for example, a rotatable light represented by a rotating lamp). By adopting such a method, it is possible to sufficiently entertain the player without using a liquid crystal display or the like.

[11-7. Processing when an abnormal condition occurs]
Processing performed when an abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  In the slot machine 1, when an abnormal state occurs during the game, an error notification is made according to the type of error detected. In particular, in the case of an error that can be detected by the main board 409, the error lamp 604 is turned on (or flashes), and an error display indicating the type of the error can be performed by the special display LED 612. The special display LED 612 normally displays an instruction function display and a payout number display. In addition, an error may not be detected, but a sudden power interruption is also included in the abnormal state.

  When an abnormal state as described above occurs, it is necessary to cancel the error in order to return to the normal game state (in the case of a power interruption, it is sufficient that an error display does not remain after the power is restored). Although the error canceling method varies depending on the error that has occurred, there are many cases in which it is necessary to turn off the power (OFF / ON).

[11-7-1. RAM clear]
Here, clearing of data values (RAM clear) in the RAM 1114 mounted on the main board 409 will be described.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific operation such as setting change or power OFF / ON is performed, the value of data held in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 is erased or initialized in an address range corresponding to each operation. A clear process (RAM clear) for rewriting the value is performed. Therefore, even when the error cancellation processing is performed, there is a possibility that a part of the data held in the RAM 1114 is cleared when the power is turned OFF / ON.

  However, when the error canceling process is performed while the instruction function is displayed or the power is cut off while the medal is paid out, the data used for the instruction function display and the payout number display is cleared by clearing the RAM. A case that hinders the continuation of the game is assumed. In the slot machine 1, in consideration of such a problem, the RAM clear target range in the RAM 1114 is determined in advance.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining a RAM data block. FIG. 111 shows an internal image of the RAM 1114, where the upper end is the beginning of the memory address and the lower end is the end of the memory address. For example, the unused area 1114z is a data area where data is not read and written (in other words, a data area other than the used area), and is grouped on the end side of the memory address. As shown in FIG. 111, in the RAM 1114, a plurality of “areas” are predetermined according to the type of data to be stored. In addition, five types of “clear range 0” to “clear range 4” are defined as the RAM clear target ranges. Each clear range may include an unused area 1114z.

  First, the clear range of RAM clear will be described. “Clear range 0” means a target range that is basically not executed and corresponds to all erasure. That is, the RAM clear in the clear range 0 is not performed in normal maintenance or error processing. From another viewpoint, the data value is not cleared in the set value data area 1114a except when the RAM is cleared in the clear range 0. This means that the set value data area 1114a is not basically cleared.

  “Clear range 1” means a target range in which the RAM is cleared at the start of a setting change performed by operating the setting key switch 1112t. Specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 111, all data areas below the door flag area 1114b are targeted, and the set value data area 1114a is not cleared.

  “Clear range 2” means a target range in which RAM clear is performed at the time of reset performed by operating the reset switch 112u. Specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 111, the data area below the lamp ON data area 1114d is targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to the door monitoring timer area 1114c are not cleared.

  “Clear range 3” means a target range in which the RAM is cleared at the end of the bonus. Clearing RAM from clear range 0 to clear range 2 requires work by hall clerk as an opportunity to execute each RAM clear, but RAM clearing at the end of the bonus is automatically performed by internal processing after the bonus ends Is executed automatically. In the RAM clear at the end of the bonus, specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 111, the data area below the replay insertion number area 1114j is targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to the instruction function display area 1114i is not cleared.

  The “clear range 3” is also a target range in which the RAM is cleared when the power is simply turned OFF / ON. That is, when the power is turned OFF / ON without changing the setting or resetting, the data area that is the target range in “clear range 3” is cleared. Since the instruction function display area 1114i is not included in the “clear range 3”, the instruction content of the instruction function is not erased by turning the power OFF / ON.

  “Clear range 4” means a target range in which the RAM is cleared at the start of each game. The RAM clear at the start of each game is automatically executed, for example, by an internal process when the start lever 210 is operated in a state where the bet number of medals is determined. In the RAM clearing at the start of each game, specifically, the data area within the display flag area 1114l among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 111 is targeted, and the setting value data area 1114a to the interrupt check The timer area 1114k is not cleared.

  Next, each data area shown in FIG. 111 will be briefly described. The setting value set in the slot machine 1 is stored in the setting value data area 1114a.

  Information indicating the open / closed state of the door-shaped front member 200 (or front opening / closing member 90) is stored in the door flag area 1114b, and the door-shaped front member 200 (or front opening / closing member 90) is stored in the door monitoring timer area 1114c. Time information for recognizing that it is open is stored.

  The lamp ON data area 1114d stores information related to lighting of lamps (for example, a display device 501 such as a replay lamp 606 or a start lamp 608). The credit number area 1114e stores information indicating the number of credits (medal storage number). In the credit display area 1114f, information for displaying the stored medal number on the stored number display LED 613 is stored. The payout number area 1114g stores information indicating the number of payouts (medal payout number) indicating how many game values have been paid out in the game. In the payout display area 1114h, information for displaying the medal payout number on the special display LED 612 is stored. In the instruction function display area 1114i, information corresponding to the instruction content by the instruction function for displaying the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is stored.

  In the replay insertion number area 1114j, the number of game values to be inserted at the time of the replay operation (the number of medals inserted at the time of replay) is stored. Timer information necessary for executing the interrupt process is stored in the interrupt check timer area 1114k.

  Information indicating the error display state displayed on the special display LED 612 is stored in the display flag area 1114l. In the medal payout number area 1114m, a payout number of game values to be paid out as a result of the game is stored. In the insertable number area 1114n, information indicating whether or not a game value can be input is stored. In the medal insertion number area 1114o, the number of game values inserted before the start of the game is stored. The random number storage area 1114p stores random numbers used in the condition device.

  As described above, the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 can be expected to realize efficient memory control by setting a range in which the RAM is cleared for each of various actions (setting change, power OFF / ON, etc.).

  Note that the RAM 1114 defines a range (capacity) that can be used as a storage area of the main board 409 in the gaming machine, and data such as programs must be stored within the defined range. However, in recent years, with regard to processing related to test signals and processing related to fraud, data related to the program for the processing is stored in an unused area outside the specified range (for example, the unused area 1114z in FIG. 111). Is allowed. However, the use of such unused areas is limited to gaming machines having an instruction function.

  In the slot machine 1, whether or not to redisplay the data displayed before the RAM is cleared after the RAM is cleared after the power is turned off or the like is determined by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 (or the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510). ) Can be determined for each type of data. That is, the CPU 1110 (or the CPU 1118) may redisplay the data as much as possible with reference to the data stored in the data area that has not been cleared of the RAM at the time of power recovery, or specific data (for example, The data relating to the payout number display, the data relating to the navigation display, etc. can be theoretically redisplayed, but may not be redisplayed by program control. At this time, referring to the data saved in the stack point of the RAM 1114 is also included.

[11-7-2. error indication]
Next, error display in the special display LED 612 will be described. FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining error display by the special display LED. In the slot machine 1, when an error described in the “notification type” column in FIG. 112 (which will be described later, including some that are not errors) is detected, the special display LED 612 indicates that the error is displayed in the “SEG” column. By displaying such a predetermined segment, the type of the detected error is notified in an identifiable manner. Of the errors shown in the “notification type” column of FIG. 112, each error detection signal other than “communication error (during series code error)” detected by the sub-board 510 has a main error detection signal. The substrate 409 is notified. The errors shown in FIG. 112 are a part of errors that can be detected by the slot machine 1, and there are errors that can be detected by the main board 409 or the sub board 510 in addition to the illustrated errors.

  The outline of each error shown in the “notification type” column of FIG. 112 will be described below.

  The “RAM error” is an error that is notified when the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 is broken. On the other hand, “communication abnormality (during series code error)” is detected when there is an abnormality in the series code transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510, but is detected by the sub board 510, so that a special display is displayed. No error is displayed on the LED 612.

  Although “setting change” or “setting confirmation” is not an error, “setting value” is displayed (notified) on the special display LED 612 during the operation, and is described in FIG. The setting value of the slot machine 1 is stored in the setting value data area 1114a of the RAM 1114, for example. Note that the notification timing when “setting is being changed” is set at the start of a predetermined setting change operation, and the notification timing when “setting is being checked” is set at the start of a predetermined setting check operation.

  The “illegal payout error” is an error that is notified when there is an abnormal payout. Specifically, a payout count switch (not shown; a switch for counting the number of payout medals, for example) other than when a medal is paid out from the hopper 110b by the operation of a driving means (not shown) included in the medal discharge device 110. Detected when the medal releasing device 110) is turned on. In FIG. 112, the notification priority is set differently depending on whether the timing at which the error is detected is “when the main game is not stopped” or “when the main game is stopped”. The higher priority is detected when the main game is not stopped. However, regardless of the timing, the special display LED 612 displays the same “HF” segment.

  “Inserted medal passage time 1 error”, “inserted medal passage time 2 error”, “medal passage order 1 error”, “medal passage order 2 error”, “medal passage interval time error”, and “inserted medal reverse error” This error is notified when there is an abnormality in the process from when a medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot 203 until it reaches the hopper 1110b. The anomaly here includes an anomaly caused by the insertion of a foreign object other than a medal, in addition to an anomaly related to a medal passage route.

  In the slot machine 1, when a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 203 is detected by the insertion sensor 207b (when the solenoid 207a is OFF), the lever sensor, the selector sensor, and the chute sensor are thereafter detected. The hopper 110b is reached while the passage is detected at. The lever sensor, selector sensor, and chute sensor are sensors provided in the medal selector 207, and detect the passage of medals at predetermined positions where they are provided (not shown). Further, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the path to the insertion sensor 207b is locked out, so that even if the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 203, the medal is passed through the medal selector 207 and the return bar 213. Returned to the tray 201. When the medal whose passage is detected by the insertion sensor 207b does not move through such a normal process (specified medal passage sequence), the main board 409 is based on the presence / absence of detection in each sensor, the detection time, and the like. Detect each of the above errors.

  An outline of each error will be explained. The “inserted medal passage time 1 error” is an error that is notified when a medal (including foreign objects other than medals) stays in the vicinity of the insertion sensor 207b. Specifically, the medal detection by the insertion sensor 207b is detected. It is detected when it continues for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms). The “inserted medal passage time 2 error” is an error that is notified when a medal (including foreign objects other than medals) stays in the vicinity of the lever sensor. Specifically, the medal detection by the lever sensor is performed for a predetermined time. Detected when (for example, 500 ms) continues. The detection target period of “inserted medal passage time 2 error” is always set, but the notification timing of the error is at the start of medal acceptance (or at the end of the game such as after completion of the payout process).

  The “medal passing order 1 error” is an error that is notified when medal detection by the selector sensor is performed even though medal detection by the lever sensor is not detected (OFF). More specifically, the error is detected when a medal is not detected by the lever sensor in a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms) before the medal passage is detected by the selector sensor. The “medal passing order 2 error” is an error that is notified when the medal detection by the chute sensor is not performed after the medal detection by the selector sensor. More specifically, the error is detected when a medal is not detected by the chute sensor in a predetermined period (for example, 400 ms) after the medal passage is detected by the selector sensor.

  The “medal passage interval time error” is an error that is notified when a medal passes in a manner that is not expected during normal operation. Specifically, in each sensor provided in the medal selector 207, any object is detected with a passing interval shorter than the shortest medal passing interval assumed in normal time (that is, a passing interval when medals are continuously inserted). The error is detected when the state of passing is detected over a predetermined frequency (for example, five consecutive times).

  The “inserted medal retrograde error” is an error that is notified when the medal moves along a route other than the prescribed medal passage sequence, and particularly when a backward motion is detected. Specifically, it is detected based on the detection order of medal detection by each sensor (insertion sensor 207b, lever sensor, selector sensor, chute sensor, etc.) provided in the medal selector 207.

  The “payout medal jam error”, “payout medal empty error”, and “auxiliary storage full error” are errors that are notified when there is an abnormality related to medal payout or storage. The outline of each error will be described. First, the “payout medal jam error” is an error that is notified when a medal is jammed during the medal payout from the hopper 110b. Specifically, the error is detected when the payout count switch is turned on for a predetermined period (for example, 200 ms) or longer. Further, the “payout medal empty error” is an error that is notified when the medal in the hopper 110b becomes empty. Specifically, when a medal from the hopper 110b is not normally paid out and a payout retry (payout retry) is performed, the payout count switch is turned on for a predetermined period (for example, 1500 ms) after the payout retry. If not, the error is detected. The “auxiliary storage full tank error” is an error that is notified when the medal auxiliary storage box 111 is full. Specifically, the error is detected when the medal full sensor 111a of the medal auxiliary storage box 111 detects the storage of medals exceeding a predetermined standard.

  The “priority” column in FIG. 112 shows the priority of notification between errors. In this example, the priority means the priority when a plurality of errors are detected at the same time. Even if an error having a higher priority than that error is detected after one error is detected, The display contents are not changed. However, the priority of the error display in the slot machine 1 is not limited to this, and in the above example, it may be determined to switch to the display of an error with a high priority detected later. In the “SEG” column, a display example of the special display LED 612 is shown. In any case, in the slot machine 1, when a plurality of errors are detected, the game cannot be resumed (the next game is played) unless those errors are canceled.

  In the “notification method” column, when “video” is “◯”, an image for notifying an error is displayed on the image display 500, for example. However, the notification image by “video” is required to have display contents different from the error display on the special display LED 612. When “Sound” is “◯”, for example, a notification sound is output from the speaker 512. When the “lamp” is “◯”, for example, the error lamp 604 is turned on or blinks. In the notification by sound output, lamp output, etc., the notification mode may be changed according to the priority of the detected error. For example, when an error with a high priority is detected, an error with a low priority is detected. You may make it the alerting | reporting aspect which is emphasized compared.

  The “reset cancellation” column indicates whether or not the error can be canceled by a reset performed by operating the reset switch 112u. For errors that can be reset, the data area (see FIG. 111) of “clear range 2” of the data stored in the RAM 1114 is cleared when the error is canceled by reset.

  If “immediate” is written in the “responsiveness” column, it means that the error can be detected on the main board 409 side when the slot machine 1 is operating. For example, when an unauthorized payout error is detected, the main board 409 issues a command for notifying the detection immediately. That is, even if “immediately” is described, it is not always necessary to immediately display an error when the error is detected. For example, after a game result is obtained (after the payout process is completed or the payout process is completed). An error may be displayed before the start of the process. Note that the fraudulent payout error is a highly urgent error meaning that the gaming value has been illegally paid out.

[11-7-3. Processing when an error occurs]
In the following, a process when the error described in the previous chapter in the slot machine 1 occurs during the game (error occurrence process) will be described. The specific details of the processing at the time of error occurrence differ depending on what requirement definition the slot machine 1 has for the error. Here, it is assumed that the slot machine 1 includes a requirement definition (first requirement definition) relating to an error as described below, and details of an error occurrence process performed in such a case will be described.
(1) Grouping (for example, strong error and weak error) based on importance is not performed for a plurality of errors.
(2) Even if an error is detected during the game, the game continues and the error is displayed after the game ends.
(3) Even if an error is detected during the game, the instruction function display is continuously displayed.

  113 and 114 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the error occurrence processing in the first embodiment. FIG. 113 and FIG. 114 are combined into one flowchart. This flowchart is based on the overall processing procedure of one game based on the processing procedure shown in FIG. Show. 113 and 114 show an example of a processing procedure when the game progresses when there is no power interruption (that is, the power is not turned off). On the other hand, FIG. 115 to be described later is a flowchart illustrating an example of a processing procedure of the power interruption recovery process in the first embodiment. In FIG. 115, the processing procedure is also applied when the power is turned OFF / ON in the processing of FIGS. 113 and 114.

[11-7-3-1. Processing when an error occurs (when power is not interrupted)]
With reference to FIGS. 113 and 114, the processing procedure of one game including the processing at the time of error occurrence (at the time of non-power interruption) will be described. Since the overall process flow overlaps with the series of processes shown in FIG. 54, detailed description of the processes that have already been described is omitted. Further, unless otherwise specified, the processes in FIGS. 113 and 114 are executed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110). In addition, in order to make it easy to understand the situation in which each process is performed, the correspondence with the “game machine state” shown in FIG. 90 is also shown.

  First, in FIG. 113, as described in the BET process of FIG. 54, after a predetermined number of gaming values (specifically, medals) are inserted, the player presses the start lever 210 to perform the game. The process is started (step S801). Such a game flow corresponds to “medal insertion” to “depression of start lever” shown in FIG.

  When the start lever 210 is pressed and the game is started, an internal lottery process is performed (step S802), and a conditional device that is allowed to operate based on the winning combination is acquired (step S803).

  Next, in step S804, it is determined whether or not the special display LED 612 is a section in which the instruction function display is possible. Here, the section in which the instruction function can be displayed means a game (for example, during an AT game) in which the instruction function display by the instruction function can be executed. Until now, the instruction function display has been mainly described during the AT game. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specific game period other than the AT game (for example, the AT is relatively elected). The instruction function may be displayed even in a chance zone (CZ) that is easy to perform. In such a case, a positive determination is obtained in step S804 even in a game other than the AT game.

  If it is determined in step S804 that the instruction function display is possible (specifically, if it is determined that the main board 409 instructs by the instruction function) (YES in step S804), in step S803. Based on the acquired condition device, the instruction content by the instruction function is determined (step S805). Next, the instruction content determined in step S805 is stored in the instruction function display area 1114i of the RAM 1114 (step S806).

  Thereafter, the rotation of the reel 301 is started (step S807). The timing of step S807 corresponds to “reel rotation start” shown in FIG. Then, by transmitting an instruction information command to the sub-board 510, the instruction content by the instruction function is notified (step S808). As a result, the sub-board 510 can cause the image display body 500 or the like to perform navigation display at a predetermined display timing related to navigation display based on the received instruction information command. In the slot machine 1, the transmission of the instruction information command in step S808 may be performed at a timing before the start of rotation of the reel 301 (step S807).

  Thereafter, the instruction content stored in the RAM 1114 in step S806 is displayed on the special display LED 612 at a predetermined display timing related to the instruction display function (instruction function display) (step S809). Specific display examples of the instruction function display are as shown in FIGS. In addition, the predetermined display timing related to “navigation display” and “instruction function display” is as described above with reference to FIG. Then, after the instruction function is displayed in step S809, in step S810, acceptance of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S804 that the instruction function display is not possible (specifically, when the main board 409 does not determine that the instruction function is instructed) (NO in step S804). The reel 301 starts rotating without performing the processing related to the instruction function as shown in steps S805, S806, S808, and S809 (step S811), and accepting the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211a is started (step S811). Step S812).

  Steps S810 and S812 correspond to “reel stop button press acceptable” shown in FIG. Then, after the process of step S810 or step S812 is performed, the process proceeds to step S813.

  In step S813, the player presses the first stop button (the first stop operation among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop process as described in FIG. 106 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S813 corresponds to “first stop button pressed” shown in FIG.

  Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error has been detected between the pressing of the first stop button in step S813 and the subsequent pressing of the second stop button (step S814). If no error is detected in step S814 (NO in step S814), the process in step S815 is performed. If an error is detected in step S814 (YES in step S814), the process in step S819 is performed. In FIG. 114, when an error is detected in step S814, it is shown that the process of step S819 is performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining reel 301 that is rotating. The processing in step S819 may be performed after a reel stop operation is performed on the remaining reels 301. The same applies to step S816. Such processing after error detection may be made different in priority (importance) depending on the type of error, and the processing may be used properly based on the priority. For example, an error that is unlikely to occur in a normal game situation such as “HF (illegal payout error)” should be a high priority error. If such a high priority error is detected, the process of step S819 should be performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 corresponding to the remaining reel 301 that is rotating. preferable.

  In step S815, the player presses the second stop button (second stop operation among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop process as described in FIG. 106 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S815 corresponds to “second stop button pressed” shown in FIG.

  Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error has been detected between the pressing of the second stop button in step S815 and the subsequent pressing of the third stop button (step S816). If no error is detected in step S816 (NO in step S816), the process in step S817 is performed. If an error is detected in step S816 (YES in step S816), the process of step S819 is performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining reel 301 that is rotating.

  In step S817, the player presses the third stop button (third stop operation among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop process as described in FIG. 106 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S817 corresponds to “third stop button pressed” shown in FIG.

  Next, the main board 409 determines whether an error has been detected until a predetermined time elapses after the third stop button is pressed in step S817 (for example, until all reels 301 are stopped). (Step S818). Thereafter, the process of step S819 is performed regardless of whether or not an error is detected in step S818.

  In step S819, the instruction function display on special display LED 612 is terminated. However, if it is determined in step S804 that the instruction function display is not possible (NO in step S804), the instruction function display in step S809 is not performed, and special processing is required in step S819. There is no.

  Thereafter, in step S820, all the reels 301 (reels 301a to 301c) are stopped, and it becomes possible to determine a winning based on the symbol combination stopped on the active line. The timing of step S820 corresponds to “all reel stop” shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 114, the processing in step S819 and step S820 is performed regardless of whether or not an error has been detected during the game up to that point, but whether or not the subsequent processing is determined to have detected an error. It depends on what. Specifically, if no error has been detected during the previous game, the process from step S821 is performed. If an error has been detected during the previous game, the process from step S825 is performed. Is done.

  First, as a normal process in which no error has been detected during the game so far, in step S821, it is determined whether or not a game value has been paid out. In the game value payout, when it is confirmed that the winning combination is stopped based on the symbol combination stopped on the active line, the gaming value corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. If it is determined in step S821 that there is no payout (NO in step S821), no error is detected, and the game is ended. If it is determined in step S821 that there is a payout (YES in step S821), the payout number display on the special display LED 612 is started (step S822), and a game value (medal) payout process is performed (step S823). . Thereafter, since no error is detected, the game is terminated.

  On the other hand, as processing when an error has been detected during the game up to that point, it is first determined whether or not the gaming value has been paid out (step S824).

  The process of step S824 is the same as the process when no error is detected (step S821). When it is determined that there is a payout (YES in step S824), steps S822 (payout number display) and S823 are performed. The process of (dispensing process) is the same.

  However, if an error has been detected during the game up to that point, the processing of steps S826 and S827 is performed in order to cause the special display LED 612 to display an error. When the payout process is performed in step S823, the payout number display displayed on the special display LED 612 is cleared after the payout process is completed (step S825), and then the processes after step S826 are performed. If it is determined in step S824 that there is no payout, processing in step S826 and subsequent steps is performed as it is.

  In step S826, the special display LED 612 displays the types of errors detected so far (error display). A display example of the error display is as shown in FIG. Thereafter, an error canceling process is performed according to the error notified by the error display by the hall clerk or the sales office (step S827), and the game is ended.

  As described above, by performing the processing shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when an error is detected during the game, the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function display and the number of payouts. Without interrupting the display, it is possible to notify the player or hall clerk of the type of error detected by displaying an error.

  In the following, when an error occurs while the game is proceeding based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 113 and 114, it will be described in detail what the display period of various indicators will be. Illustrate under typical circumstances.

  116 to 119 are timing charts showing display period examples (No. 1 to No. 4) when an error occurs in the first embodiment. 116 to 119 all assume that the instruction function occurs (for example, during AT).

  First, in the case of FIGS. 116 to 118, when an error occurs (when detected), the timing is set so that details of the error are immediately displayed on a display (for example, the image display 500) controlled by the sub-board 510. A chart is shown. That is, at the same time as the error occurrence 807 is turned on, the liquid crystal error 806 is also turned on. However, it is assumed that the liquid crystal navigation 805 cannot “display” while the liquid crystal error 806 is ON. Such a setting can be realized by, for example, transmitting a command of error detection information to the sub-board 510 at a timing when the main board 409 detects an error.

  In FIG. 116, in a game in which no gaming value is paid out, an error occurs at the timing of starting reel rotation. At this time, an error display (liquid crystal error 806) is simultaneously displayed on the image display body 500, while an error display (seg error 804) on the special display LED 612 is not performed until the reel is completely stopped.

  In FIG. 117, in a game in which game value is paid out, an error has occurred at the start of stop button press acceptance. At this time, the liquid crystal error 806 is turned on (displayed) at the same time, and the navigation display 805 that was turned on (displayed) before the occurrence of the error is changed to OFF (non-displayed) as the liquid crystal error 806 is turned on. The The seg error 804 is turned on (displayed) only after the reels are completely stopped and the game value payout process is completed.

  In FIG. 118, in a game in which no gaming value is paid out, an error occurs at the timing of pressing the second stop button. At this time, the liquid crystal error 806 is simultaneously turned ON (displayed), and the navigation display 805 “displayed” before the occurrence of the error is changed to OFF (non-displayed) as the liquid crystal error 806 is turned ON. The seg error 804 is turned on (displayed) only after the reels are completely stopped.

  In this way, in the case of FIGS. 116 to 118, when an error occurs, the special display LED 612 displays an error after the game ends, while the image display 500 immediately displays the occurrence of the error. The occurrence of an error by a player or the like can be notified promptly. Further, the special display LED 612 can display the instruction function display, the payout number display, and the error display without overlapping the display periods. However, in the case of FIG. 116 to FIG. 118, although the game progress is not interrupted, the liquid crystal navigation 805 is “hidden” when the liquid crystal error 806 is “displayed”. There are cases where it is not possible to perform stop operations according to functions.

  On the other hand, in the case of FIG. 119, the detailed display of the error on the display (for example, the image display body 500) controlled by the sub board 510 is the timing of the error display controlled by the main board 409 (error display on the special display LED 612). The timing chart is shown with the setting of Align. That is, even if the error occurrence 807 is turned ON, the liquid crystal error 806 is not “displayed” until the segment error 804 becomes “display”. Such setting can be realized, for example, by the main board 409 not only transmitting error detection information to the sub-board 510 but also notifying the timing for displaying an error on the special display LED 612.

  In FIG. 119, in the game in which the game value is paid out, an error occurs at the timing of pressing the first stop button. At this time, the display related to the instruction function (the instruction function 802 and the liquid crystal navigation 805) is continuously displayed until the third stop button is pressed, and proceeds normally until the subsequent payout process. When the payout is completed, the error display (seg error 804 and liquid crystal error 806) is performed on the special display LED 612 and the image display body 500. Thereafter, when the error is canceled according to the error and the error is eliminated, the seg error 804 and the liquid crystal error 806 are turned off (not displayed), and the error occurrence 807 is also turned off.

  In this way, in the case of FIG. 119, even if an error occurs, the special display LED 612 and the image display body 500 are all in the game after the game ends (strictly speaking, when the payout is completed when there is a payout or when there is no payout). When an error is displayed when the reels are stopped), it is possible to detect an error in the game without interfering with game progress and game operation (specifically, stop operation in accordance with an instruction function while viewing the navigation display). Can be reliably notified. In other words, in the case of FIG. 119, the display function for the indication function display, the payout number display, and the error display in the special display LED 612 can be ensured for each display (the display is effective), and The display periods can be prevented from overlapping.

[11-7-3-2. Power failure recovery process]
With reference to FIG. 115, the procedure of the power interruption return process in the slot machine of the first embodiment will be described. The power failure recovery processing shown in FIG. 115 is performed when all power failures are recovered, such as power OFF / ON in error release processing, simple power OFF / ON when no error occurs, or recovery from a sudden power failure due to a power failure. Done in

  In FIG. 115, first, the power interruption process from all states is started. In step S901, it is determined whether any power supply voltage is equal to or lower than a predetermined threshold value. As a specific example of the predetermined threshold determination, when the power supply device 112 includes a 24V power supply and a + 12V power supply, the power supply voltage of the 24V power supply is 20.4V or less, or the power supply voltage of the + 12V power supply. Is 10.5V or less. If it is determined that none of the power supply voltages is equal to or lower than the predetermined threshold (NO in step S901), the process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S901 that any one of the power supply voltages is equal to or lower than the predetermined threshold (YES in step S901), the RAM 1114 performs processing for storing the stack pointer in the save area (step S902). The processing in step S902 and the processing in step S907 described later are as described in the description of the data area of the RAM 1114 in [11-7-1] (see also FIG. 111).

  Thereafter, after data protection processing (RAM protection processing) is performed on the RAM 1114 (step S903), the slot machine 1 is turned off (step S904). Note that the above-described processing related to the RAM is not limited to the RAM 1114 on the main board 409, and the same processing may be performed on the RAM 1122 on the sub board 510.

  Then, when a power supply restoration operation is performed by a hall related person or automatic restart (step S905), it is first determined whether any one of the power supply voltages is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold (step S906). The predetermined threshold here may be the same threshold as exemplified in step S901. If it is determined that none of the power supply voltages is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold (NO in step S906), the process ends.

  If it is determined in step S906 that one of the power supply voltages is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold (YES in step S906), the stack pointer stored in the save area of the RAM 1114 in step S902 is referred to and necessary data is read (step S906). S907).

  Then, a process for returning the stored number display LED 613 to a displayable state is performed (step S908), and a process for returning the special display LED 612 to a displayable state is performed (step S909).

  Next, it is determined whether or not any of the reels 301a to 301c is rotating in a state immediately before the power is turned off in step S904 (state before power interruption) (step S910).

  If it is determined that any of the reels 301a to 301c is rotating in the state before power interruption (YES in step S910), it means that the reel stop operation has not been completed. The instruction function instruction content stored in the RAM 1114 (more specifically, the instruction function display area 1114i shown in FIG. 111) is displayed on the special display LED 612 (step S911). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S916.

  If it is determined that none of the reels 301a to 301c is rotating in the state before power interruption (NO in step S910), whether or not the state before power interruption is the status of “all reels stopped” and “with payout”. Is determined (step S912). When it is determined that the situation is “all reels stopped” and “with payout” (YES in step S912), the payout number is displayed on the special display LED 612. The information regarding the number of payouts can be read by referring to the payout display area 1114h in addition to referring to the saved stack pointer in the RAM 1114, for example. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S916.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S912 that the situation is not “all reels stopped” or “no payout” (NO in step S912), it is determined whether an error is detected (step S914). ). If it is determined that an error has been detected (YES in step S914), information regarding the detected error is displayed on the special display LED 612 (step S915). At this time, the error lamp 604 may be turned on. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S916. If a negative determination is obtained in step S914, the process proceeds directly to step S916.

  After each of the above steps S905 to S915 is performed, in step S916, other return processing (details are omitted) is performed, and the slot machine 1 is in the pre-power supply state before entering the power cut-off state in step S904. Return to.

  As described above, by performing the power interruption recovery process shown in FIG. 115, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, even after a power interruption occurs, data loss and data loss before the power interruption are prevented. Appropriate restoration such as display can be realized.

  In the following, when the power interruption occurs while the game is in progress, the power interruption recovery processing is performed based on the processing procedure shown in the flowchart of FIG. Or will be illustrated under specific circumstances.

  120 to 122 are timing charts showing examples (No. 1 to No. 3) of display periods (by various displays) when the power interruption recovery process shown in FIG. 115 is performed during the game. 120 to 122 all show the situation in which the instruction function occurs (for example, during AT), and show display period examples using various types of display devices as in the above-described FIG. 90 and FIG. 91. Although not shown in FIG. 120 to FIG. 122, the slot machine 1 automatically performs an automatic operation after power is restored when at least one of the reels 301 a to 301 c is rotating before the power is turned off. The rotation of the reel 301 that has been rotated by the internal processing is resumed.

  In the case of FIG. 120, an error is not particularly detected, and the power supply is cut off between “start reception of pressing stop button” and “pressing first stop button”. In FIG. 120, the power may be turned off at the same time as the “stop button press acceptance start”. At this time, the instruction function 802 and the liquid crystal navigation device 805 that “displayed” the instruction content become “non-display” when the power is turned off, but when the power is restored after that, the display content before the power interruption is displayed again as “display”. (Corresponding to step S911 in FIG. 115). And after a power interruption return, a game progresses like usual. Further, since no error is detected through one game, the segment error 804 and the liquid crystal error 806 remain “non-display”.

  In the case of FIG. 121, in the game in which the game value is paid out, an error occurs at the timing of “start reception of stop button press”, and then the power is cut off before “first stop button press”. . The interruption of the power supply here may be a power interruption due to an error that has occurred, or may be a power interruption due to another reason. In such a case, if the liquid crystal error 806 is immediately “displayed” with the occurrence of the error, the liquid crystal navigation 805 ends “display” until then and becomes “non-display”. After that, even if the power is turned off after the power is turned off, the error is not canceled. Therefore, in the image display 500, the liquid crystal navigation 805 is “not displayed” and the liquid crystal error 806 is “displayed”.

  On the other hand, in the case of FIG. 121, since the special display LED 612 does not immediately display an error, the instruction function 802 is “displayed” from the timing of the start of accepting the stop button press. Even after the power is restored after the power is turned off, the contents of “display” can be read again from the RAM 1114 (corresponding to step S911 in FIG. 115). The special display LED 612 “displays” the seg error 804 after the payout is completed.

  In the case of FIG. 122, in the game in which the game value is paid out, an error is not particularly detected, and the power is cut off during the payout process after the reels are completely stopped. At this time, until the start of payout, the game is not changed to a normal game, and the payout number 803 becomes “non-display” by power-off, but is “displayed” again after the power is restored (corresponding to step S913 in FIG. 115). ) So you can complete the payout.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 120 to 122, in the slot machine 1, even if the power is shut off during the game, the power failure recovery process shown in FIG. The display status managed by can be restored before shutting down.

[11-7-4. Other error processing]
In the above [11-7-3], an example of processing at the time of error occurrence in the slot machine 1 has been described. Hereinafter, another processing example of processing at the time of error occurrence will be described.

[11-7-4-1. Common points and differences in processing when errors occur]
In the following description regarding other error occurrence processing, an error will be described for each of cases where the slot machine 1 has second to sixth requirement definitions different from the first requirement definition described above as “requirement definition for error”. The occurrence process will be described. In order to avoid confusion in the description process, the slot machine 1 having the first requirement definition is referred to as a slot machine 1a, and the slot machines 1 having the second to sixth requirement definitions are respectively designated as the slot machine 1b to the slot machine. This is expressed as a machine 1f. Therefore, for example, “error occurrence processing in the first embodiment” described in the description of FIG. 113, FIG. 114, and the like is read as “error occurrence processing in the slot machine 1a having the first requirement definition”. be able to.

  When the slot machines 1b to 1f are compared with the slot machine 1a, since the requirement definition regarding the error occurrence processing is different, the processing procedure of the error occurrence processing based on the requirement definition is different. This is common with the slot machine 1 described so far. Therefore, the description of the common part is omitted, and the difference will be mainly described.

[11-7-4-2. Error handling based on the second requirement definition]
The slot machine 1b has the following requirements as the second requirement definition related to the processing at the time of error occurrence.
(1) Grouping based on importance for a plurality of errors. Specifically, an error having a relatively high importance regarding the game progress is referred to as a “strong error”, and an error having a lower importance regarding the game progress than the “strong error” is referred to as a “weak error”.
(2) If a weak error is detected during the game, the game continues and the error is displayed after the game ends.
(3) If a strong error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is stopped until the error is cleared.
(4) When a strong error is detected during the game, the instruction function display is restored after the error is canceled.

  According to the second requirement definition, the processing required when only a weak error occurs is not different from the first requirement definition. Therefore, in the slot machine 1b, when only a weak error occurs, the display period examples (FIGS. 116 to 119) by various indicators shown in the error occurrence processing based on the first requirement definition are It can be applied as an error occurrence process based on the requirement definition.

  In addition, the slot machine 1b can also use the processing of the slot machine 1 shown in FIG. 115 for the return processing at the time of the occurrence of power interruption. Therefore, the display period example at the time of power interruption shown in FIGS. Can be applied to the slot machine 1b.

  The classification criteria for “strong error” and “weak error” are not particularly limited. For example, based on the “priority” of the error shown in FIG. You can do it. For example, all errors may be set to “strong error”.

  123 and 124 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the processing at the time of error occurrence in the slot machine 1b. Hereinafter, the processing procedure of the error occurrence process based on the second requirement definition will be described focusing on the difference from the flowchart (FIGS. 113 and 114) of the error occurrence process based on the first requirement definition.

  First, the processing from step S801 to S812 shown in FIG. 123 is the same as the processing from step S801 to S812 in FIG.

  Next, in FIG. 124, the player presses the first stop button, and a reel stop process is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed (step S830).

  Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error has been detected between the pressing of the first stop button in step S830 and the subsequent pressing of the second stop button (step S831). If no error is detected in step S831 (NO in step S831), the process in step S833 is performed. If an error is detected in step S831 (YES in step S831), it is determined in step S832 whether the detected error is a strong error. If it is determined that the error is a strong error (YES in step S832), the process of step S839 is performed. If it is determined that the error is not a strong error, that is, a weak error (NO in step S832), step S833 is performed. Proceed to the process.

  In step S833, the second stop button is pressed. Thereafter, similarly to steps S831 to S832, whether or not an error is detected (step S834) and whether or not the detected error is a strong error. The determination (step S835) is performed. The same determination process (steps S837 and S838) is performed after the third stop button is pressed in step S836.

  As described above, when a strong error is detected as a result of determination of the error detection in steps S830 to S838, the progress of the game is stopped while maintaining the state immediately before the occurrence of the strong error as the process of step S839. . When the progress of the game is stopped, the player cannot stop the rotating reel 301. As a specific process for holding the state immediately before the occurrence of the strong error, it is assumed that various data are saved in the RAM 1114 or the like.

  Then, after the progress of the game is stopped in step S839, an error canceling process corresponding to the generated strong error is required. Therefore, in step S840, whether the error canceling process is performed and the strong error is cancelled is determined. Is determined. In step S840, the process does not proceed to the next process unless the cancellation of the strong error is confirmed. Then, when it is confirmed that the strong error is released (YES in step S840), the process is started again from the time of the error occurrence as a return of the process.

  On the other hand, if the strong error is not detected in any period as a result of the determination of the error detection in steps S830 to S838 (NO in step S837 or NO in step S838), the indication function display on special display LED 612 Is terminated (step S841). In addition, when the process of step S841 is performed, only the strong error is not detected, and the case where the weak error is detected is included.

  Thereafter, in step S842, all the reels 301 (reels 301a to 301c) are stopped, and it becomes possible to determine a winning based on the symbol combination stopped on the active line. In step S843, it is determined whether or not the game value has been paid out. If it is determined that there is a payout, the special display LED 612 displays the payout number (step S844) and executes a payout process (step S845).

  If it is determined in step S843 that there is no payout, or if it is determined that there is a payout and the process in step S845 ends, whether or not an error is detected is determined as the process in step S846. If it is determined in step S846 that there is no error (NO in step S846), the process ends as it is.

  If it is determined in step S846 that there is an error (YES in step S846), it means that a weak error has been detected between steps S830 to S838, and it is necessary to display an error for the weak error. There is. Therefore, the payout number display displayed on the special display LED 612 is cleared (step S847), and the details of the weak error are displayed on the special display LED 612 as an error (step S848). Thereafter, when the error cancellation processing for the error displayed in step S848 is performed (step S827), the series of processing ends.

  As described above, when the process shown in FIGS. 123 and 124 is performed, in the slot machine 1b, when a weak error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is continued and the error display of the weak error is displayed after the game ends. On the other hand, if a strong error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is immediately stopped and the execution of the error canceling process is required. Further, although the progress of the game is interrupted when a strong error occurs, the instruction function display is restored after the error release processing, so that the player can continue the game while confirming the instruction content.

  In the following, in the slot machine 1b, when an error occurs while the game is proceeding based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIG. 123 and FIG. This is illustrated under specific circumstances.

  FIG. 125 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1b. FIG. 125 assumes that the instruction function occurs (for example, during AT).

  In FIG. 125, a weak error occurs when the first stop button is pressed (weak error occurrence 807a is ON), and a strong error occurs when the second stop button is pressed (strong error occurrence 807b is ON). ). In the slot machine 1b, even if a weak error occurs, the game is not interrupted, and the indication function display on the special display LED 612 is also maintained as “display”. In the example of FIG. 125, the image display 500 also does not “display” the liquid crystal error 806 when a weak error occurs.

  On the other hand, when a strong error occurs, the special display LED 612 immediately displays an error instead of the instruction function display (“non-display” of the instruction function 802 and “display” of the seg error 804), and the image display 500 Then, the game is interrupted by displaying an error instead of the navigation display (“non-display” of the liquid crystal navigation 805 and “display” of the liquid crystal error 806). However, since the instruction function 802 and the navigation display 805 that have been “hidden” are subsequently “displayed” when the error release processing for the strong error is completed, the game is played from the situation before the occurrence of the strong error. You can resume.

[11-7-4-3. Processing when an error occurs based on the third requirement definition]
The slot machine 1c is provided with the following requirements as the third requirement definition regarding the error occurrence processing.
(1) Grouping based on importance for a plurality of errors. Specifically, an error having a relatively high importance regarding the game progress is referred to as a “strong error”, and an error having a lower importance regarding the game progress than the “strong error” is referred to as a “weak error”.
(2) If a weak error is detected during the game, the game continues and the error is displayed after the game ends.
(3) If a strong error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is stopped until the error is cleared.
(4) If a strong error is detected during the game, the instruction function display is stopped, and the error is not restored even after the error is cleared.

  The third requirement definitions (1) to (3) are the same as the second requirement definitions (1) to (3), and only (4) is different.

  Accordingly, in the slot machine 1c, as in the slot machine 1b having the second requirement definition, when only a weak error occurs, various indicators shown in the error occurrence processing based on the first requirement definition The display period examples (FIGS. 116 to 119) can be applied. In addition, as for the return processing upon occurrence of power interruption, since the processing of FIG. 115 shown in the processing at the time of error occurrence based on the first requirement definition can be diverted, the processing at the time of power interruption shown in FIGS. 120 to 122 is possible. An example of a display period can be applied to the slot machine 1c.

  126 and 127 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the error occurrence processing in the slot machine 1c. 126 and 127 are compared with the processing of FIGS. 123 and 124 used in the description of the slot machine 1b, only step S880 of FIG. 127 is different. That is, in FIG. 127, when it is determined in step S840 that the strong error has been released, as a process in step S880, the main board 409 clears the display content of the special display LED 612, and then the process from the time of the error occurrence is performed again. Is started.

  Then, by performing the process of step S880, the slot machine 1c can prevent the indication function display on the special display LED 612 from being restored after the error is released when a strong error occurs.

  According to such a slot machine 1c, when a “strong error” having a high impact on the game occurs, even if the strong error is canceled, the state before the occurrence of the strong error is completely restored. It is possible to suppress the return to the state. Specifically, by not displaying the instruction function after returning from the error, it is possible to make it difficult to perform a game operation according to the instruction content of the instruction function in an abnormal game in which a strong error has occurred. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being easily given a privilege when an illegal act that causes a strong error is performed.

  In the following, in the slot machine 1c, when an error occurs while the game is progressing based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIG. 126 and FIG. This is illustrated under specific circumstances.

  FIG. 128 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1c. FIG. 128 assumes that the instruction function occurs (for example, during AT).

  In FIG. 128, similarly to FIG. 125 used in the description of the slot machine 1b, a weak error occurs when the first stop button is pressed (weak error occurrence 807a is ON), and further, when the second stop button is pressed. A strong error has occurred (strong error occurrence 807b is ON). However, in FIG. 128, in accordance with the requirement definition (third requirement definition) of the slot machine 1c, even if a weak error occurs, the game is not interrupted, and the indication function display on the special display LED 612 is also maintained as “display”. In the example of FIG. 128, the image display 500 also does not “display” the liquid crystal error 806 when a weak error occurs.

  On the other hand, when a strong error occurs, the special display LED 612 immediately displays an error instead of the instruction function display (“non-display” of the instruction function 802 and “display” of the seg error 804), and the image display 500 Then, instead of the navigation display, an error is displayed (“non-display” of the liquid crystal navigation 805 and “display” of the liquid crystal error 806), and the game is interrupted. Even if error cancellation processing is performed thereafter, the display content of the instruction function display is cleared as shown in step S880 of FIG. 127. Therefore, after the return, the instruction function display is displayed again on the special display LED 612. Do not show. In the example of FIG. 128, the liquid crystal navigation is similarly not displayed after the return. Therefore, in the slot machine 1c, after the strong error is released and returned, the player cannot recognize the instruction content of the instruction function, and advances the game while the instruction function does not occur.

[11-7-4-4. Error handling based on the fourth requirement definition]
The slot machine 1d has the following requirements as the fourth requirement definition regarding the error occurrence processing.
(1) Grouping based on importance for a plurality of errors. Specifically, an error having a relatively high importance regarding the game progress is referred to as a “strong error”, and an error having a lower importance regarding the game progress than the “strong error” is referred to as a “weak error”.
(2) When an error is detected during the game, the game continues to progress regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(3) When an error is detected during the game, the indication function display is not stopped regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(4) When a strong error is detected during the game, the main board 409 transmits a predetermined command (for example, an outer end board communication command) to the external relay terminal board 131, so that the external relay terminal board 131 can be used. The error information is output to an external device (for example, a hall computer 1200 or a data display) that is connected.

  The fourth requirement definition in such a slot machine 1d is common only to the third requirement definition (1), but when considering other requirement definitions, the processing required when only a weak error occurs. Is similar to the error occurrence process based on the third requirement definition (that is, the error occurrence process based on the first or second requirement definition).

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1d, as in the slot machine 1b having the second requirement definition and the slot machine 1c having the third requirement definition, when only a weak error occurs, the first requirement definition is set. Examples of display periods (FIGS. 116 to 119) using various types of display devices shown in the processing at the time of error occurrence based on this can be applied. In addition, as for the return processing upon occurrence of power interruption, since the processing of FIG. 115 shown in the processing at the time of error occurrence based on the first requirement definition can be diverted, the processing at the time of power interruption shown in FIGS. 120 to 122 is possible. The display period example can be applied to the slot machine 1d.

  In the error occurrence processing in the slot machine 1d, a predetermined error detection result is output to the outside via the external relay terminal board 131 (may be abbreviated as “outer end plate”). It is said. The slot machine 1d is connected to an external device (such as a hall computer 1200 or a data display) in the game hall via the external relay terminal plate 131 by providing the external relay terminal plate 131 on the main board 409. The external relay terminal board 131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to an external device.

  FIG. 129 and FIG. 130 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the error occurrence processing in the slot machine 1d. In the following, an error occurs based on the fourth requirement definition, focusing on differences from the flowchart (FIGS. 113, 114, 123, and 124) of the error occurrence processing based on the first or second requirement definition. A processing procedure of time processing will be described.

  First, the processing from step S801 to S812 shown in FIG. 129 is the same as the processing from step S801 to S812 in FIG.

  Next, in FIG. 130, similarly to the processing in steps S813 to S832 in FIG. 124, whether or not an error is detected after the first stop button is pressed in steps S850 to S852, and the error is a strong error. It is determined whether or not there is. However, in the case of FIG. 124, the game is temporarily stopped when it is determined that the error is a strong error (step S839 in FIG. 124), whereas in FIG. 130 the game is determined even if it is determined that the error is a strong error. The progress is continued, and instead, a command (outer end plate communication command) indicating the occurrence of a strong error is transmitted to the external relay terminal board 131 (step S853).

  In FIG. 130, in step S853, when a strong error occurrence information is transmitted to the external relay terminal board 131, a strong error occurs in an external device (for example, the hall computer 1200) connected via the external relay terminal board 131. Information can be output. During that time, the progress of the game in the slot machine 1d is not stopped, and the process proceeds to the next stop button pressing process (step S854).

  In FIG. 130, the processing after pressing the stop button as shown in steps S850 to S853 is repeated also when the second stop button is pressed (step S854) or the third stop button is pressed (step S858). The detailed description of is omitted.

  Summarizing the processing of steps S850 to S861, it is repeatedly determined whether an error has been detected between the time when the reel stop button 211 is pressed and the stop operation is performed on all the reels 301, and in particular, a strong error has been detected. When the determination is made, the occurrence of a strong error is immediately notified via the external relay terminal board 131.

  The processes in steps S862 to S870 shown in FIG. 130 are the same as the processes in steps S819 to S827 in FIG. 114, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. The outline of the processing of steps S862 to S870 shown in FIG. 130 is based on clearing the instruction function display when all the reels 301 have been stopped and performing all stop processing of the reels 301, and then based on the winning combination. If an error is detected during the game, an error is displayed on the special display LED 612 after the payout process is completed, and an error cancel process is awaited.

  The error display shown in step S869 in FIG. 130 is the error display (weak error error shown in step 826 in FIG. 114) in that error display is performed even if the error detected during the game is a strong error. Display). That is, in FIG. 130, when a strong error is detected, an error occurrence is notified to the external device via the external relay terminal board 131, while the error display of the error is also performed on the slot machine 1d itself after the game ends. Therefore, the occurrence of a strong error can be notified more reliably.

  As described above, by performing the processing shown in FIG. 129 and FIG. 130, the slot machine 1d continues the game progress regardless of whether a strong or weak error is detected during the game, and displays an error display of the error after the game ends. Is called. Further, when a strong error is detected during the game, the occurrence of the error is immediately notified to the external device via the external relay terminal board 131, so that the hall that manages the external device (for example, the hall computer 1200) is managed. It is easy for the parties concerned to notice the occurrence of an important error, and it is also possible to accurately manage the error occurrence status. Moreover, even if such a strong error occurs, the progress of the game is not interrupted, so that an effect of suppressing the burden on the player can be expected.

  In the following, in the slot machine 1d, when an error occurs while the game is progressing based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIG. 129 and FIG. This is illustrated under specific circumstances.

  FIG. 131 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1d. FIG. 131 assumes a situation where an instruction function occurs (for example, during AT). In FIG. 131, an outer end plate communication 808 is added to indicate the timing at which the main board 409 transmits a command indicating information indicating a strong error detection to the external relay terminal board 131. When the outer end plate communication 808 is ON, it means that the command is transmitted from the main board 409 to the external relay terminal board 131. When the outer end plate communication 808 is OFF, it means that the above command is not transmitted.

  In FIG. 131, as in FIG. 125 used in the description of the slot machine 1b and FIG. 128 used in the description of the slot machine 1c, a weak error occurs when the first stop button is pressed (weak error occurrence 807a is ON). Further, a strong error has occurred at the timing of pressing the second stop button (strong error occurrence 807b is ON).

  However, in FIG. 131, according to the requirement definition (fourth requirement definition) of the slot machine 1d, the game is not interrupted regardless of whether a strong or weak error occurs, and the error display is performed after the game ends. Therefore, the indication function display 802 and the “display” of the liquid crystal navigation 805 are not hindered by the occurrence of an error. However, when a strong error is detected, the main board 409 immediately sends a command to the external relay terminal board 131 with information indicating the strong error detection (the outer end board communication 808 is ON). The occurrence of a strong error can be notified to an external device connected via the network in almost real time.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 131, an error is displayed after the game is finished (more specifically, after the payout is completed (in the case of a game with no payout, after the reels are completely stopped)). Display "and" display "of the liquid crystal error 806), the error can be released before starting the next game.

[11-7-4-5. Error handling based on the fifth requirement definition]
The slot machine 1e has the following requirements as the fifth requirement definition related to the processing at the time of error occurrence.
(1) Grouping based on importance for a plurality of errors. Specifically, an error having a relatively high importance regarding the game progress is referred to as a “strong error”, and an error having a lower importance regarding the game progress than the “strong error” is referred to as a “weak error”.
(2) When an error is detected during the game, the game continues to progress regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(3) When an error is detected during the game, the indication function display is not stopped regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(4) When a strong error is detected during the game, the main board 409 transmits a predetermined command (for example, a display mode change command) to the display dedicated to the error, so that the display mode on the display unit becomes an error. Change to a specific display for occurrence.

  The fifth requirement definition (1) to (3) in the slot machine 1e is the same as the fourth requirement definition (1) to (3), and only (4) is different.

  Accordingly, in the slot machine 1e, only a weak error is provided, similarly to the slot machine 1b having the second requirement definition, the slot machine 1c having the third requirement definition, and the slot machine 1d having the fourth requirement definition. When the error occurs, the display period examples (FIGS. 116 to 119) by various displays shown in the error occurrence process based on the first requirement definition can be applied. In addition, as for the return processing upon occurrence of power interruption, since the processing of FIG. 115 shown in the processing at the time of error occurrence based on the first requirement definition can be diverted, the processing at the time of power interruption shown in FIGS. The display period example can be applied to the slot machine 1e.

  132 and 133 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the error occurrence processing in the slot machine 1e. When the processes in FIGS. 132 and 133 are compared with the processes in FIGS. 129 and 130 used in the description of the slot machine 1d, only steps S881, S882, and S883 in FIG. 133 are different.

  In FIG. 133, when the first stop button is pressed (step S850), it is determined whether or not an error is detected (step S851). If it is determined that there is an error, whether the error is a strong error or not. Is determined (step S852). When it is determined in step S852 that a strong error has occurred (YES in step S852), as a process in step S881, the main board 409 transmits a “display mode change command” to the error-dedicated display device, and the display mode in the display device is displayed. Is changed to a specific display for when an error occurs.

  Here, the “display mode change command” is one of means for informing a specific display (for example, the error lamp 604 may also be used) that at least a strong error has occurred. As long as a specific display for notifying the occurrence of a strong error can be performed on a specific display, it may not be in the command format. Further, the “display mode change command” may not only notify the occurrence of a strong error, but may also notify details (types etc.) of the error that has occurred.

  Further, the processing in step S882 and step S883 is the same as that in step S881 in the error detection check after the second stop button is pressed (step S854) or the third stop button is pressed (step S858), respectively. Since it is performed, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1e, the processing in steps S881, S882, and S883 is performed, so that a strong error has occurred can be notified by a specific display. The slot machine 1e is provided with such a specific display device separately from the display device (special display LED 612) on which the instruction function display is performed, so that an indication function display ( Furthermore, it is possible to reliably notify the occurrence of the strong error while continuing the progress of the game without disturbing the navigation display).

  In the following, in the slot machine 1e, when an error occurs while the game is proceeding based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 132 and 133, what will be the display period of various displays and the like? This is illustrated under specific circumstances.

  FIG. 134 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1e. FIG. 134 assumes a situation where an instruction function occurs (for example, during AT). In FIG. 134, a display mode change 809 is added to indicate the transmission timing of a “display mode change command” for changing the display mode for a specific display when the main board 409 detects a strong error. . When the display mode change 809 is ON, it means “send”, and the display mode change command is transmitted to a specific display. When the display mode change 809 is OFF, it means “standby”, and the display mode change command is not transmitted to a specific display. FIG. 134 does not show the timing of changing the display mode in a specific display, but it is assumed that the display mode is changed immediately after the display mode change 809 is “ON (transmission)”.

  In FIG. 134, similarly to FIG. 131 and the like used in the description of the slot machine 1d, a weak error occurs when the first stop button is pressed (weak error occurrence 807a is ON), and the second stop button is pressed. A strong error has occurred (strong error occurrence 807b is ON).

  Here, as described above, in the requirement definition (fifth requirement definition) of the slot machine 1d, (1) to (3) are the same as the fourth requirement definition (1) to (3), and (4 Only) is different. Focusing on this point, comparing FIG. 134 with FIG. 131 used in the description of the slot machine 1d, in FIG. 131, a command is transmitted to the external relay terminal board 131 when a strong error is detected. FIG. 134 is different in that the display mode change command is transmitted at the same timing, whereby the display mode of a specific display device is changed. However, the display periods of the other displays are the same as those in FIGS. 131 and 134.

  Further, although not shown in FIG. 134, it is preferable that the change of the display mode in a specific display device is continued until the error of the strong error causing the change is canceled.

  In addition, as an example of the display mode of “specific display for occurrence of strong error” on a specific display, when the error lamp 604 that is normally used for notification of occurrence of an error is also used, it is lit when normal notification of error occurs. On the other hand, in the case of specific display based on strong error detection, the display mode may be changed such as blinking. In addition, when using a dedicated special display, more detailed error notification can be realized by changing the notification pattern (lighting pattern, display image, audio output pattern, volume, etc.) according to the type of strong error. Can do.

  According to the slot machine 1e, by enabling such “specific display for occurrence of a strong error”, it is possible to immediately and reliably notify the occurrence of an error when a strong error having a large influence on the game occurs. In addition, the special display LED 612 for displaying the instruction function and the payout number display and the image display body 500 for performing the navigation display can be smoothly advanced by preventing interference with the display contents. Can be expected.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 134, an error is displayed after the game is finished (more specifically, after the payout is completed (in the case of a game with no payout, after the reels are completely stopped)). Display "and" display "of the liquid crystal error 806), the error can be released before starting the next game.

[11-7-4-6. Error handling based on the sixth requirement definition]
The slot machine 1f has the following requirements as a sixth requirement definition related to the processing at the time of error occurrence.
(1) Grouping based on importance for a plurality of errors. Specifically, an error having a relatively high importance regarding the game progress is referred to as a “strong error”, and an error having a lower importance regarding the game progress than the “strong error” is referred to as a “weak error”.
(2) When an error is detected during the game, the game continues to progress regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(3) When an error is detected during the game, the indication function display is not stopped regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(4) When a strong error is detected during the game, the strong error is detected in the display mode of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 by changing the control pattern of the instruction function display by the main board 409. Change the display mode to understand.

  The sixth requirement definition (1) to (3) in the slot machine 1f is the same as the fourth or fifth requirement definition (1) to (3), and only (4) is different.

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1f, as in the slot machines 1b to 1e having the other requirement definitions described so far, when only a weak error occurs, when only a weak error occurs, Examples of display periods (FIGS. 116 to 119) using various indicators shown in the error occurrence processing based on the requirement definition 1 can be applied. In addition, as for the return processing upon occurrence of power interruption, since the processing of FIG. 115 shown in the processing at the time of error occurrence based on the first requirement definition can be diverted, the processing at the time of power interruption shown in FIGS. The display period example can be applied to the slot machine 1f.

  135 and 136 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the error occurrence processing in the slot machine 1f. 135 and 136 are compared with the processes of FIGS. 129 and 130 used in the description of the slot machine 1d and the processes of FIGS. 132 and 133 used in the description of the slot machine 1e, step S884 in FIG. Only S885 and S886 are different.

  That is, in the error occurrence process based on the sixth requirement definition, as shown in FIG. 136, a strong error is detected in the strong error determination (steps S852, S856, S860) in the error check after each stop button is pressed. If it is determined that the main board 409 transmits a command for displaying an instruction function when an error occurs (steps S884, S885, S886), the display mode of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is changed. Then, the display mode (instruction function display of pattern 1) for displaying only the instruction content is changed to the display mode (instruction function display of pattern 2) for displaying that the strong error is detected together with the instruction content.

  Here, an example of specific control for changing the display form of the instruction function display when the instruction function display is controlled by a command will be described. When a strong error is detected, the pattern 2 instruction function display is performed. By setting a predetermined bit that is not used in the command for pattern 1, it is possible to transmit the command together with the information indicating the instruction content and the information indicating the strong error. As an example of the display of the pattern 2 on the special display LED 612, it is possible to display blinking at the time of pattern 2, to display the error information and the instruction information alternately, or to turn on the bit segment. Good.

  Note that, as described for the “display mode change command” in the description of the slot machine 1e, in order to satisfy each requirement definition in the slot machines 1a to 1f, the information communication format does not necessarily have to be a command format. In the function display control, the input / output control may be performed in a format other than the command.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1f, the processing of steps S884, S885, and S886 is performed, so that the special display LED 612 can notify the occurrence of a strong error without interrupting the instruction function display.

  Therefore, according to the slot machine 1f, when an error occurs during the game, even if it is a strong error, the game opportunity by the player can be provided reliably by not interrupting the game progress. On the other hand, since the occurrence of a strong error can be promptly notified at a place (special display LED 612 on the display panel 501) that can be easily seen by a player or the like, safety against the slot machine 1f can be ensured. I can expect.

  In the following, in the slot machine 1f, when an error occurs while the game is progressing based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIG. 135 and FIG. This is illustrated under specific circumstances.

  FIG. 137 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1f. FIG. 137 assumes that the instruction function occurs (for example, during AT). Also, in FIG. 137, when the strong error is detected, the display pattern of the instruction function display is changed from the normal pattern 1 to the pattern 2 at the time of error occurrence, so that the display period of the instruction function display in each pattern is shown. As an alternative, “instruction function (pattern 1) 802a” and “instruction function (pattern 1) 802a” are added in place of “instruction function 802” used in other figures.

  In FIG. 137, similarly to FIG. 131 used in the description of the slot machine 1d, FIG. 134 used in the description of the slot machine 1e, etc., a weak error occurs at the timing of pressing the first stop button (the weak error occurrence 807a is ON) and a strong error has occurred at the timing of pressing the second stop button (strong error occurrence 807b is ON).

  Here, as described above, in the requirement definition (sixth requirement definition) of the slot machine 1f, (1) to (3) are the same as (1) to (3) of the fourth or fifth requirement definition. Only (4) is different. Focusing on this point, the display period (FIG. 137) in the slot machine 1f is compared with the slot machine 1d (FIG. 131) or the slot machine 1e (FIG. 134). In FIG. 134, a command is transmitted to the external relay terminal board 131. In FIG. 134, a display mode change command is transmitted to a specific display. In FIG. 137, the display mode pattern of the instruction function display is displayed at the same timing. By changing, the special display LED 612 is different in that the indication function display of the pattern 2 is displayed. However, the display periods of the other displays are the same as those in FIGS. 131, 134, and 137.

  In addition, according to FIG. 137, “display” of the function display 802a is switched to “display” of the instruction function 802b at the timing when the second stop button is pressed when the strong error occurs (the timing when the strong error occurrence 807b is turned ON). It is done. The indication function display of pattern 2 is continuously displayed until the timing of pressing the third stop button. That is, in the slot machine 1f, even if the indication function display is changed to the pattern 2 due to the detection of a strong error, the indication function display of the pattern 2 is continued until the original display period by the indication function display ends. It means that.

  According to such a slot machine 1f, the progress of the game is not interrupted by the occurrence of an error, and further, the instruction content of the instruction function is continuously displayed, while the instruction function is displayed when an important strong error occurs. Since it is possible to notify the occurrence of the error by changing the mode, it is possible to realize a gaming machine that achieves both smooth progress of the game and quick response to the abnormal state.

  Further, as shown in detail, the liquid crystal error 806 controlled by the sub-board 510 is also “displayed” at the same timing after the game as the seg error 804. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 137, an error is displayed after the game is finished (more specifically, after the payout is completed (in the case of a game with no payout, after the reels are completely stopped)), the next game is displayed. You can let the error clear before you start.

  Note that the slot machine 1a to the slot machine 1f may be appropriately combined within a range in which the respective requirement definitions related to the error occurrence processing do not interfere with each other. For example, if the error occurrence process based on the first requirement definition is a limited process related to the weak error, it can be combined with the second to sixth requirement definitions. Further, for example, by combining the processing at the time of strong error detection in the fourth to sixth requirement definitions, wide notification can be realized at the time of strong error detection.

  In the slot machine 1 described above as the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main board 409 corresponds to main control means capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game, and the special display LED 612 is managed by the main control means, and has a predetermined value. It corresponds to a display device capable of displaying the effect. Further, the main board 409 (particularly the CPU 1110) is an example of a role lottery unit that executes a lottery regarding the winning combination, and a predetermined game operation based on a result of the lottery by the role lottery unit is based on the predetermined game operation. It is also an example of instruction display means for displaying an instruction display on a display device in any one of a plurality of display forms prepared in advance, and a game operation based on any display form displayed by the instruction display means This is also an example of an advantageous privilege giving means that can give an advantageous privilege that is advantageous to the player as the game progresses. Here, “instruction display” corresponds to “instruction function display” in the present embodiment. The “advantageous advantage advantageous to the player” corresponds to, for example, payout of game value that can be given by performing a reel stop operation in accordance with the instruction content displayed on the instruction function. Moreover, the main board 409 (particularly the CPU 1110) is an example of a different privilege granting unit that can grant a different privilege different from the advantageous privilege given by the advantageous privilege granting unit, and is included in a plurality of display modes used in the instruction display. It is also an example of similar display means for displaying on the display device an expectation display that suggests the expectation degree of the different privilege that can be given by the different privilege giving means. Here, “expectation display” corresponds to “expectation display” in the present embodiment. In addition, the “different privilege different from the advantageous privilege” corresponds to, for example, establishment of a bonus game or AT game, addition of the number of AT games, or the like, in which an expectation level is suggested by an expectation level display. Note that the display control of the expected display by the similar display means corresponds to the display control of the first type expectation degree display as described in detail in [11-3-7-1] of the present embodiment.

  The above is one form of the slot machine 1 of the present invention, but is not limited to this. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine other than a slot machine, such as a pachinko machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Slot machine 10 Clearance 21 Transparent plate 50 Model unit 90 Front opening / closing member 100 Outer main body 100a Rotating shaft 101 Bottom plate 102 Side plate 102a Convex portion 102b Guard portion 103 Top plate 104a Heat radiation port 104b Cord outlet 105 Partition plate 106 Projection step 107 Installation Piece 108 mounting piece 109 opening 110 medal discharge device 110a device main body 110b hopper 110c discharge port 110d overflow bowl 110e payout sensor 111 auxiliary medal storage box 111a medal full sensor 112 power supply device 112a device case 112b top plate 112c rear plate 112d front plate 112e Side plate 112f Slope plate 112g Vent hole 112h Leg portion 112i Vent space 112j Stepped portion 112k Mounting piece 112m Protruding portion 112m-1 Protruding portion 112p Through hole 112r Bottom plate 112s Plate 112t Setting key switch 112u Reset switch 112v Power switch 113 Wiring relay member 114 Boss hole 115 Rail member 116 Rail member 117 Stopper 118 Mounting tool 119 Body side wiring 120 Mounting plate 121 Cover body 122 Connector board 123 Connector board 124 Connector 125 Connector 126 Opening 127 Opening 128 Supporting tube 129 Wiring duct 131 External relay terminal plate 132 Through hole 133 Vent hole 200 Door-shaped front member 200a Through hole 201 Medal tray 202 Operation part 203 Medal slot 205 Single slot button 206 MAX button 207 Medal selector 207a Solenoid 207b Insertion sensor 208 Medal return button 209 Storage release switch 210 Start lever 211a Left reel stop button 211b Middle reel stop Button 211c Right reel stop button 212 Medal basket 213 Return basket 214 Transparent window 214a Transparent plate 214b Edge member 214c Through hole 214d Through hole 215 Locking device 215a Base member 215b Support piece 216 Forehead frame 217 Light emitting unit 217a Light emitter 217a-1 Light source 217a -2 Light guide plate 217b Reflective member 218 Fixing member 219 Concave groove 300 Symbol variation display device 301a Left reel (first reel)
301b Middle reel (second reel)
301c Right reel (3rd reel)
302 Device case 303 Driving means 304 Bottom plate 305 Top plate portion 305 Top plate portion 306 Right side plate 307 Left side plate 308 Rear plate 309 Upper swash plate 310 Lower swash plate 311 Handle 312 Reel substrate 313 Cable 315 Detent 316 Handle 321a to 321c Reel belt 331a Left reel position sensor 331b Middle reel position sensor 331c Right reel position sensor 341a Left reel drive motor 341b Middle reel drive motor 341c Right reel drive motor 400 Case member 401 Pattern display window 402 Reinforcement bar 402a Guide part 403 Bottom plate 404 Side plate 405 Rear plate 406 Top plate 407 Reinforcing member 408 Wiring work space 409 Main board 410 Boss 411 Wiring window 412 Concave step portion 413 Tapered portion 414 Wheel 415 鍔 416 Hook portion 417 Triangular space 418 Temporary fixing member shelf 4 0 Hinge bracket 420a Fixed member 420b Rotating member 420c Short link 420d Long link 420e Fixed piece 420f Bearing piece 420g Overlapping area 420h Overlapped area 420h Overlapped area 420j Pin hole 420k Pin 421 Lock piece 422 Handle side 423 Case side wiring 424 Harness 425 Connector 426 Harness 427 Connector 427a Free hole 427b Ear piece 427c Screw 428 Connector main body 429a Holder cylinder 430 Through hole 431 Attachment piece 432 Button type panel fastener 433 Bench part 434 Bench side plate 435 Nail piece 436 Finger hook part 437 Cable groove 438 Wiring port 440 Guide rail 442 Locking hole 443 Skylight portion 444 Reinforcement band 449 Main substrate 500 Image display body 500s Dashed area 501 Frame member (display panel)
502 Illuminating device 503 Substrate 505 Translucent cover plate 506 Tube frame 507 Translucent cover 508 Receiving unit 509 Engaging unit 510 Sub-board 512 Speaker 600 Upper rail 601 Fixing member 602 Tool 603 Screw 604 Error lamp 606 Replay lamp 608 Start lamp 610 Medal IN lamp 612 (612a, 612b, 612c) Special display LED
613 (613a, 613b) Storage number display LED
614 BET lamp 623a Right-down line 623b Right-up line 700 Connection 701 Fixed sheath member 701a Prevention piece 702 Rod 702a Shaft hole 702b Hook wall 703 Stopping shaft 703a Spring 704 Stopper 705 Groove 706 Picking piece 1110 CPU
1112 ROM
1114 RAM,
1116 I / O interface 1130 I / O interface 1200 Hall computer

Claims (1)

Main control means capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game;
A display device managed by the main control means and capable of displaying a predetermined effect;
With
The main control means includes
A role lottery means for executing a lottery for the winning role;
For a predetermined game operation based on the result of the lottery by the combination lottery means, an instruction display based on the predetermined game operation is displayed on the display device in any one of a plurality of display modes prepared in advance. Instruction display means;
Advantageous privilege giving means that can give an advantageous privilege that is advantageous to the player when the game is progressed by a game operation based on any one of the display modes displayed by the instruction display means;
Different privilege granting means capable of giving a different privilege different from the advantage privilege given by the advantage privilege granting means,
Similar display means for causing the display device to display an expectation display that suggests the degree of expectation of a different benefit that can be given by the different benefit granting means by any one of the display modes used in the indication display. When,
A gaming machine comprising: